JP2020151369A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having an input device with an LED.SOLUTION: In a game machine, a push-down surface and a light-emitting part are configured such that distance is minimized by push-down operation, a board is locked by fixing means, push-down operation is repeated to the push-down surface, and the push-down surface does not abut on a light source when abutting on the fixing means in a button unit at least having the push-down surface that can be slid and moved by a player's operation and can be directly touched by the player, an outer wall part at least having a push-down part at least having an outer-diameter part and a detection object part and an inner-diameter part for holding the outer-diameter part of the push-down part so as to wrap it, a spring member that is provided inside the outer wall part, and energizes and maintains the push-down part in a predetermined position, a light-emitting part having a board for mounting the light source for applying light to the inside of the push-down part, and a detection part for detecting the detection object part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

Regarding game machines.

In the game machine, an input device for directing to enhance the interest of the game is provided, and the input device has a gaming machine for the purpose of enhancing the directing effect by lighting and blinking the directing lamp.

JP-A-2010-99334

The pressed-down surface of the input device is deformed, eccentrically moved, or damaged by a bang or a push-down using an object. As a result, it is conceivable that the LED and the back side of the pushed-down portion come into contact with each other and the LED is damaged, but Patent Document 1 does not describe such a countermeasure.

A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and holding the push-down portion in a predetermined position, and a spring member.
A light emitting part having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the push-down part, and a light emitting part.
A detection unit that detects the detection target unit and
It is a button unit equipped with at least
The push-down surface and the light emitting portion are configured so that the distance is reduced by the push-down operation.
The substrate is locked by fixing means and
A gaming machine characterized in that the push-down operation is executed with respect to the push-down surface, and when the fixing means is contacted, the push-down surface and the light source are not in contact with each other. ..

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light source from being destroyed because the push-down surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source.

It is a front view of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the front direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view in the rear direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view which shows the game board attached to the premise pachinko game machine. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine that is premised. It is a figure which shows the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine which is assumed. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the power-on process. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning or failing lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning symbol lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is premised. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in a low base state of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in a high base state of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the special variation pattern lottery table which is referred to for a limited period of a pachinko gaming machine which is assumed. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the production control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the production control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which showed the game effect of the symbol variation display (during the stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base medium) of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is the figure which showed the game production of the situation which the reach production with high expectation which becomes the big hit of the pachinko game machine which is a premise is performed. It is the figure which showed the game production of the state which the big hit game is executed in the presupposed pachinko game machine. It is a figure which showed the game production during operation of the electric chew support function which is in the specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base) of a presupposed pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the outside perspective of the case of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the back surface of the front panel. It is a figure which shows the inner surface of a housing. It is a figure which shows the functional block. It is a flowchart which shows the program start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off restoration process. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress main. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section clear counter management processing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which can be displayed as the result of the winning combination lottery in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which can be displayed as the result of the winning combination lottery in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which can be displayed as the result of the winning combination lottery in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which comprises the winning combination in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which comprises the winning combination in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which comprises the winning combination in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the placement number for each winning combination in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the RT transition diagram in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the determination of the L mode number in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission of the light irradiated by the reel sheet and LED attached to the structure house lamp in the house lamp in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison when the pattern area is provided in the reel sheet in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the scenario number in one advantageous section in 3rd Embodiment, the scenario selection ratio for each set value, and the production scenario corresponding to each scenario. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which can be displayed as the result of the winning combination lottery in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which comprises the winning combination in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the placement number for each winning combination in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the RT transition diagram in 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart diagram which shows the end timing of the MB-A game in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the medal insertion timing and reel control in this example. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the reel unit and the upper screw of a reel unit in this example. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the opening of the rear surface of a reel unit in this example, and the screw of the upper part of a reel unit. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the opening of the rear surface of a reel unit, the central display board protection cover, and the upper screw of a reel unit in this example. It is a rear perspective view of the reel unit having the upper and lower openings of the reel unit in this example. It is a rear perspective view of the reel unit which has the whole opening of the reel unit in this example. FIG. 1 is an operation explanatory cross-sectional view 1 for explaining the operation principle of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is an operation explanatory cross-sectional view 2 for explaining the operation principle of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is the trouble explanatory drawing 1 of the effect input button in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a defect explanatory view 2 of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of measures for preventing a light source destruction failure of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the arrangement of the light source and the screw of the effect input button in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of measures for preventing a light source destruction failure of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the mechanism which reduces the defect (eccentric movement) of the effect input button in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the irradiation range of the light source of the effect input button in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of light source destruction caused by a defect in the effect input button pressing mechanism according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission displacement from the effect button of the pachinko in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the effect button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission displacement from the effect button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a cross-sectional view (a) (b) which shows the sensor detection piece operation in 8th Embodiment, and the figure which shows the storage area of a RAM. It is a figure explaining the chattering when the high active determination in 8th Embodiment is adopted. It is a figure explaining the chattering when the low active determination in 8th Embodiment is adopted.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “prerequisite technology”) as a premise of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As typical examples of pachinko gaming machines related to the prerequisite technology, the pachinko gaming machines are shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, and the gaming board provided in the pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 4. First, refer to these figures. The mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be referred to as front-back direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction, respectively.

[Machine configuration of pachinko game machines]
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine P is configured in an outer rectangular shape, and is configured in a square shape in front of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the game facility in a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1. The front frames P2 are attached to each other so that they can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20) arranged on the front left edge portions of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is assembled and held on the front surface side of the front frame P2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 is visible to the player through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. Has been done. Further, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are formed according to the rotation direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko gaming machine P and rotating it in either the left-right direction. , The outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. Then, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

At the lower part of the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball plates P340 (upper ball plate P341 and lower ball plate P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with an effect lamp P350 that emits light according to the development status of the game, and an upper speaker P370 capable of outputting sounds such as sound effects according to the development status of the game. An effect operating means P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3, and the effect operation means P380 possessed by this pachinko gaming machine shown as a prerequisite technology is a push input type button P381 and a tilt operation. The lever P382 is provided, and the button P381 enables the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided in the glass frame, and the operating means itself. Operation input is possible when is displaced upward (input permission state) (a plurality of operations are possible with the effect operation means of 1).

At the lower right of the front frame P2, a handle P204 for performing a firing operation of the game ball and adjusting the firing intensity is provided. A launching device unit P240 is further provided below the front frame P2, and although not shown, a ball feeding mechanism P241 (sometimes referred to as a ball feeding unit) that feeds game balls stored in the upper ball plate P341 one by one. ), Synchronize the operation of the launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (ball hammer driven by a rotary solenoid), the ball feeding mechanism P241, and the launching device P242 to launch the game ball sent out from the ball feeding mechanism toward the game area P501. A launch control board P243 or the like that is specifically controlled is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured based on a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine P including the game board P5 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 illustrates a state in which the production accessory P560 (also referred to as “movable production device”, “effect movable body”, “effect movable character”, etc.) provided in the game board unit is operating. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right part, and a circle arranged from the vicinity of the center of the lower part of the game board to the inner side of the outer rail P502 from the lower left to the upper left part. It is provided with an arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 arranged between the end of the outer rail P502 in the upper right portion and the lower part of the board surface and formed in a curved shape that opens to the left, and the outer rail P502. A substantially circular game area P501 is formed inside the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 includes a left side area P501L (left-handed area), which is a left side area of the center accessory P540, and a right side area of the center accessory, with reference to the center accessory P540 arranged at the center. It has a right side region P501R (right-handed region). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and windmills P511 (not shown), a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball-entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a normal-figure operating port P741 (general-figure operating gate device) and a large winning opening P751 (attacker) are arranged. It should be noted that the number of large winning openings may be one, or a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. Further, in the present specification, due to the configuration of the ball entry device, the game ball is discharged after entering the ball entry device, and the game ball further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type). On the other hand, the fact that a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch is called "entry ball" or "winning (especially one in which a prize ball is generated)" and flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type entrance. In particular, there are cases where the items to be described are described separately from "passing". Further, the ball entry device may be referred to as a ball entry port, and the winning device may be referred to as a winning opening.

Further, in the lower right of the game area P501, a main control display device P50 whose lighting is controlled by a main control board described later, such as a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52, and a normal symbol display device P53. Are arranged intensively. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is visibly provided through the opening of the center accessory P540. At the upper part of the center accessory P540 or the like, an effect accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs an effect operation according to the development status of the game is provided. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 through which a game ball that has flowed down without entering the winning opening of various ball entry devices can pass is provided. The game ball that has entered the winning opening of various winning devices or the game ball that has flowed into the out opening P790 flows down to the rear surface side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed by penetrating the game board P5 back and forth. Then, it is collected in the collection flow path (gamed ball passage) at the lower part of the front frame P2 and passes through the out ball sensor P792 (launched ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame for detecting the total number of launched game balls. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the game machine.

The first start winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. The first start winning device P710 is provided with a first starting winning opening P711 in which a game ball can be entered. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is an opportunity to acquire a random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711. The lottery for the first special symbol is executed immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has elapsed.

The second start winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. The second start winning device P720 is in a state where it is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721 where a game ball can enter and the second starting winning opening P721 when a normal symbol lottery, which will be described later, is won. An ordinary electric accessory P770, which is a movable body to be switched, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is a trigger for a random number used in the lottery related to the second special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721. The lottery for the second special symbol is executed immediately after the ball enters or after the holding period has elapsed. The second start winning device P721 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening P721 or is easily entered by the action of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening P721. It changes to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. That is, the second start winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening unless it is displaced to the open state, and the predetermined opportunity described later (the opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. It should be noted that the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is known to have various aspects, and the structure may not change the ease of entering the ball by opening the movable body P771, and thus the "open state" and "closed state". "Is described as" easy entry state (easy entry mode) "and" difficult entry state (difficult entry mode) ", respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left-handed area P501L and a right-side general winning device P730R arranged in the right-handed area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P in the present premise technology, the left general winning device P730L is configured with three general winning openings P731La to P731Lc as one unit, while the right general winning device P730R is the large winning device P750 described later. It is configured as part. The entry of a game ball into the general winning opening P731 is an opportunity for the prize ball to be paid out, as with other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and position of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko gaming machine, which are the premise, are merely examples, and may be configured so as to be arranged only in the right-handed region P501R.

The normal figure operation gate device P740 (normal figure operation port) is provided as a start ball entrance corresponding to a normal symbol game. The normal drawing operating gate device P740 is provided with an operating gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entering game ball is configured to be able to flow further downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball through the operating gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting winning device P720, that is, whether or not to operate the normal electric accessory P770. .. As a modified example, it is also possible to configure the general winning opening P731 to have a function that triggers a normal symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the function of executing the normal symbol lottery, a prize ball It is also possible to provide a function for generating the above as one winning device (normal drawing operation winning opening).

The large winning device P750 is configured to have a large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit. It is sometimes called an "attacker (device)" or the like. The large winning device P750 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the large winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, a state in which the special electric accessory is activated P755) and the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening P751. Alternatively, the ball changes to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball (for example, the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the big hit game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by an opening / closing operation of the big winning opening P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is in operation, the movable body P756 constituting the large winning opening P751 becomes a closed mode in which it is difficult to enter the ball due to a series of operation patterns (also referred to as "open pattern"). Has.

Further, depending on the specifications (specs) of the game machine, the large prize device P750 is called a specific area P760 (called "V zone" or "V area") through which a game ball can pass, and depending on the function, "probability fluctuation function operation". Areas ”,“ continuation areas ”, etc.) may be provided. The functions related to this "specific area" are (a) to activate the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big hit game triggered by passing through the specific area during the big hit game, and (b) to pass through the specific area during the small hit game. Activating the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and granting the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) Specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not the region has been passed. An opening / closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided in the "specific region", and the flow path can be distributed by the action of the opening / closing member P761. It may be configured to pass through the specific region P760 or other non-specific regions. Further, during the big hit game or the small hit game, the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 may have a valid period and an invalid period.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the large winning device P750 is provided in the right side region P501R (right-handed region) in the gaming region P501. Therefore, in the big hit game or the small hit game, when the game ball is launched toward the game area P501, the ball is easily hit into the big winning opening P751 by hitting the right area P501R, so-called right-handed hit. It has become.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, will be described. On the back side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-rear communication window for attaching the game board unit P5 is attached to the center. A storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the game facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member are paid to the back set unit P4. The prize ball payout unit P410, the back passage member P403, and the like, which allow the game ball paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball plate P341 or the lower ball plate P342, are provided. Further, on the game ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball plate P340, a ball pulling mechanism (ball pulling operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path for removing the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever). P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there is a main control board P40 that comprehensively controls the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and a production control board that controls the overall production according to the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. P41, an image control board P42 that controls image display according to game development, and the like are attached. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present premise technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 form an effect display unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there is a payout control board P43 that controls the payout of game balls, and a power supply that receives power from the game facility side and supplies power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. A board P44 (not shown) or the like is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure at a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board P5 or the back surface of the back set unit P4. It is arranged in each. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine P can proceed with the game and execute the production. ..

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows a functional block of a pachinko gaming machine as a premise.

The pachinko gaming machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates a power source to be used in the game machine based on an AC power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. ), The payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls and the launch of game balls, and the effect control board P41 for controlling the effect operation and processing. It is composed of various forms. The arrows shown in the figure indicate the relationship between transmission and reception above by function with a solid line arrow, and the relationship between electrical connections with a broken line arrow.

By operating the power switch P47 provided on the board, the power supply board P44 can be attached to the main control board P40, the effect control board P41, the payout control board P43, and various gaming devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, the electric power required for operation is generated and supplied. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the setting of the game machine, the power switch is covered with an open / close cover to prevent unauthorized operation. It is protected in a state of being.

The main control board P40 includes a first starting winning opening P711 (special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P752), Detection switches related to the progress of various games such as the normal drawing operation port P741 (general drawing operation port switch P742), other detection switches general winning opening P731 (left side general winning opening, right side general winning opening), and out opening P790. It is connected to switches and sensors used for management and fraud monitoring of various games such as setting key switch P49, vibration detection sensor P72, and magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives information related to the occurrence of various gaming states from these switches, determines the control content related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids and the like, and is large at the time of a big hit or a small hit. The special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770 driven to make the ordinary electric accessory P770 easy to enter when the ordinary symbol lottery is won. Information related to the driving mode is output to the gaming device such as the driving means P71.

The sensor or the like connected to the main control board P40 is connected to a terminal called an input port on the main control board to notify the main control board P40 of the presence or absence of various gaming states based on sensor detection as information, and special electric power is provided. The accessory driving means P70, the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71, and other launching permission signals for the launching device P242 are received from terminals called output ports to control each device and device.

Further, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 that display variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator P54 that notifies the type (number of rounds) of a big hit or a small hit, and a game state. Main control display device P50 that displays various displays such as the status indicator light P55 that notifies the game, and performance display device P59 that displays the performance of the game machine (for example, the base value during normal game, that is, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of shots). And so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other accounting methods such as data that excludes winnings such as the starting winning opening P711, etc., but if necessary in the present invention, a separate explanation will be given and it is assumed. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to a device outside the game machine by means of an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, or the like, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each device. Further, the main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the game machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on the prize ball payout transmitted from the main control board P40, a signal indicating the control state of the main control board, and the like, and the handle P204 by the player. In response to the operation of, the launching device unit P240 controls the launching of the game ball. The payout device P410 includes a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412 as an example, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by rotating the payout motor P411. The launching device (launching device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball plate P340 (upper ball plate P341) one by one to a launchable position by the ball feed unit P241, and then turns the hammer into a game ball. It is configured to fire a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48 mainly used for initializing the game machine and canceling an error generated during the game, and is used for connecting the payout control board P43 and the main control board P40. The operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness or connector used.

The effect control board P41 includes an effect display device P80, a drive source and a position detection sensor (for example, a drive motor, an initial position detection sensor, and an effect position detection sensor) of the effect movable accessory P560, and a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker). 141), effect input device unit P380 (for example, effect button P381 which is effect operation means P81, effect lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), effect lamp P82 ("decorative lamp", "board lamp (P550)", "frame lamp (P350)". ) ”) Is electrically connected, and various control signals are transmitted and received between them. Further, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine which is the premise of this invention, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the effect control board P41, but the speaker P83 is provided by separately providing a voice control board equipped with an IC for voice control and the like. It may be configured to control.

Data transmission / reception between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed in one direction so as to be one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , I can't request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information generated by the main control board P40 unless the information is transmitted. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the present invention, data is transmitted and received bidirectionally between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case of between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41, the data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progress]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko gaming machine P as the prerequisite technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which it is easier to acquire a game ball than in the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to shift to the "special game state", and even in the normal game state, the game state in which the player has a different degree of advantage in acquiring the right to shift to the special game state. A plurality of normal game states are provided, and among a plurality of normal game states, it is more advantageous for the player than a state in which the player can easily acquire the right to shift to the special game state (normal game state (low probability / low base state)). State) is expressed as "specific game state". The "special game state" corresponds to the so-called "big hit game" and "small hit game". The special electric accessory driving means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, and the big winning opening P751 is opened to acquire the game ball. Means a state in which is easy.

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, the game method and the progress of the game in the normal game state will be described. The normal gaming state described here is a description of the "normal gaming state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific gaming state, and is generally in a situation where the player starts the game. The game state will be described, and the game method in the specific game state, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms “low (high) probability” and “low (high) base” will be described later.

As a method of gaming in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player first operates the handle P204 to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area P501 provided on the gaming board P5. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player fires the operation amount of the handle P204 toward the left region P501L (left-handed region) of the gaming region. Operate as if to play a game.

When the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L of the game area by the player, the launched game ball flows down the game area P501, and the game nail P510 (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “navel”) (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “navel”) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, to the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device, which is arranged at a position substantially below the center in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel" or the like. Either the ball is entered (winning) or the ball is not entered in any of the winning openings, and the ball is entered into the out opening P790 as a gamed game ball. When a ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731, the main control board P40 causes the payout control board P43 to make the prize balls of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening (control command). ) Is output, and the player acquires a new game ball by paying out the prize ball.

Here, the special figure 1 start port switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711, and as a game state (game result) that can occur when the player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L in the game area. , When the ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, the main control board P40 pays out the game balls of a predetermined number of prize balls and draws a lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. Get the random value to do. The random number value is acquired by acquiring the random number value generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit based on the detection of the game ball (hard latch), or by the control device of the main control board P40 by processing on the software. Techniques such as executing the process of acquiring the random number value from the previous random number generation circuit when confirming the detection information of the game ball, or acquiring the random number value updated by software (soft latch) Yes, it may be used properly according to the random number value to be acquired, or it may be used in combination. In addition, when the ball is entered into the general prize opening, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

The lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery". The "win / fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the acquired random value is "big hit" or "missing" (depending on the specifications of the game machine, the lottery result includes "small hit". ). The "winning symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning / failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50. Yes, for one lottery result (big hit, small hit), one symbol can be determined from a plurality of stop display symbols, and "big hit" and "small hit" are determined according to the stop display symbol determined here. It is possible to make the execution mode of the special game in the above different. The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining at what timing the stop display symbol indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery is to be displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52), and the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52). It determines the time during which the variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is made (referred to as "variable display time" or "variable pattern"). It is common to use different random numbers for the "win / fail lottery", "winning symbol lottery", and "variable pattern lottery", and "win / fail lottery random numbers", "symbol random numbers", and "variable patterns", respectively. It is called a "random number". The lottery related to the control of the second special symbol performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 start port switch P722 is also the same “special symbol lottery”. A description of the "special symbol lottery" will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the game method in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area. Then, a game ball is inserted into the first start winning opening P711, a lottery related to the first special symbol (special symbol lottery) is executed, and a special symbol indicating "big hit" ("small hit") is shown on the special symbol display device. By displaying the stop display symbol of, a game aiming at acquiring the right to execute a special game is performed.

It should be noted that, in the process of the player receiving the special symbol lottery, the fact that the special symbol is variablely displayed according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery is described above, but in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, If a new start winning opening (1st starting winning opening P711, 2nd starting winning opening P721) receives a ball during this special symbol variation display period, a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is executed. It has a hold function that temporarily stores the random value corresponding to the right. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is possible to hold a maximum of four special symbol lottery as a hold function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting winning opening P711. The hold function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, in addition to the hold of the first special symbol, the hold function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is also held up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random value used for the special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L of the game area to execute a special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the lottery result of the special gaming state such as "big hit" or "small hit" is won and the right to shift to the special gaming state is acquired, it is displayed on the special symbol display device. , The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the special gaming state.

[Special game state]
Subsequently, the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state will be described. There are "big hit (game)" and "small hit (game)" in the special game state, and the special electric accessory P755 operates in both cases, that is, the special electric accessory driving means P70 from the main control board P40. A drive signal is output to the player, and the big winning opening P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The difference is that the "big hit" continuously operates the special electric accessory P755 a plurality of times. The major difference is that the "small hit" is completed by the operation of the special electric accessory once, while it is based on the operation of the operating device. As another difference, in the operation of the special electric accessory (big hit) based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to make the operation mode of the special electric accessory P755 more advantageous to the player. Specifically, the total opening time of the large winning opening P751 in the operating state (big hit) of the accessory continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening of the large winning opening P751 in the small hit is allowed. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, a jackpot will be used as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko game machine P, which is the prerequisite technology, is called "special game start demo" (in the case of a big hit, "big hit start demo", "role continuous operation start demo", etc., in chronological order. In the case of a hit, there is a production period called "small hit start demo") to notify the player that various special games have been acquired, and one time called "round (game)" (also called "unit game"). The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the "special game end demo" (referred to as "big hit end demo" and "combination operation end demo" in the case of a big hit, and "small hit end demo" in the case of a small hit. ), Which is mainly composed of a game result (number of acquired game balls, etc.) during a special game and a period for notifying the type of the normal game state (including the specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the method of the game during each of the above-mentioned special games will be described. First, during the "special game start demo" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is arranged in the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the normal game state (low probability / low). Even if the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L similar to the base state), the large winning opening P751 can hardly be expected to enter, so before the round game in which the large winning opening P751 becomes easy to enter in the special game starts. In addition, a right-handed notification effect that urges the player to launch a game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area is produced. The display device P80, the speaker (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and the effect lamp. It is executed using P82. The player adjusts the operation amount of the handle P204 to increase the firing intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the firing position so that the game ball flows down to the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. (Perform right-handed).

In the "round (game)" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is in an easy-to-enter state due to the drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric accessory driving means P70. A production that congratulates the player on having a big hit (small hit) according to the execution period of the special game due to difficulty in entering the ball, or a normal game state that shifts after the special game is completed is more advantageous for the player. Perform an effect such as an effect that suggests whether or not the game will be in a gaming state. The player launches the game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the large winning opening P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning opening determined based on the type of big hit (small hit) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, it ends when a predetermined "specified number" (sometimes expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enters. Then, according to the type of special game state being executed (type of big hit or small hit), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko game machine P, which is a prerequisite technology, has the number of game balls acquired during the period of this special game state and multiple times continuously performed during the specific game period described later. The effect of notifying the total number of acquired game balls acquired in the special game state (acquired without shifting to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)), or the normal game that shifts after the special game state. Notification of the type of state and notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-mentioned right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the steering wheel in preparation for the game according to the type of the normal game state of the transition destination from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are premised,, with some exceptions, when a jackpot game as a special gaming state is executed, a special gaming state for a player called a "specific gaming state" as a normal gaming state. It is a game that allows you to enjoy the so-called "renso", in which the right to shift to is easily acquired, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated.

[Specific game state]
Subsequently, the "specific game state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the specific gaming state is roughly divided into three specific gaming states. Then, there are a "probability state" and a "base state" as elements that separate these types, and a specific game state is configured by combining them.

(Probability state)
The "probability state" is a probability fluctuation function based on the operating state of the "probability fluctuation function" (also referred to as "probability change"), which is a function of changing the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the winning or losing lottery in the special symbol lottery. When the winning / failing lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "big hit" with a higher probability than when is operating and not operating, it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability fluctuation state"). There is also), and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit for one special symbol lottery is high.

(Base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, "the ratio (expected value) of the game balls obtained as a prize ball when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and is generally an ordinary electric accessory. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also referred to as "electric chew support (electric support) state"). .. Depending on the specifications of the game machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended firing position of the game ball is switched, so that "a prize ball is obtained when a predetermined number of game balls are fired." If the "ratio of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" is special while suppressing the consumption of game balls by increasing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (easily paid out) in the period until the special game state is acquired. It is a gaming state that is advantageous for the player in that it is possible to aim for the acquisition of the gaming state.

The "electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), but mainly includes a combination of three functions (at least one). ). The three functions that make up the "electric chew support function" are "normal symbol probability change", "normal symbol time reduction", and "opening extension (of ordinary electric accessory)". "Ordinary symbol probability change" refers to a state in which there is a high probability that an ordinary electric accessory will be operated in the "ordinary symbol lottery". The "ordinary symbol time reduction" refers to a state in which the time from executing the ordinary symbol lottery to displaying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is shortened in the ordinary symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric accessory" means that the ordinary electric accessory is easily inserted into the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery. It refers to changing to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time for making the ordinary electric accessory in a state where it is easy to enter the ball.

In the "ordinary symbol lottery", the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the ordinary symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the lottery It differs in that the execution trigger is the entry of a game ball into the normal drawing operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the winning / failing, the design, and the fluctuation pattern are determined by lottery and that the holding function is provided. When expressing the winning / failing, the symbol, and the lottery of the fluctuation pattern related to the ordinary symbol lottery, "Public drawing" (or "Public drawing" (or "Public drawing" (or "Floating pattern lottery"" It is expressed by adding "ordinary pattern") to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been described as elements for distinguishing the types of "specific game state", but "time saving state" ("variation time shortening state") is another element that constitutes the specific game state. , The "variation time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the fluctuation display time (variation pattern) of a special symbol is shortened and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery per unit time is increased, which is more for the player. It is in an advantageous state in that many special symbol lottery can be received per unit time. The "time saving state" (variable time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and it is rare that a specific gaming state is configured by itself.

[Specific game state 1: Low probability / high base state]
Returning to the explanation relating to the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (1), (8), and (12) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse the predetermined number of games (* (8). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there is a case where the specific game state 1 shifts to the specific game state 1 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (2), (7), and (11) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (2), (7), and (11) are (c) to acquire a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 1, (d). It is possible that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (2) only). The "number of games" refers to, for example, the "number of times the special symbol lottery is executed".

When the state shifts to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), both the above-mentioned "electric chew support function" and "variation time shortening function" are activated in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, the normal drawing operating gate device P740, and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory. The mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed" to launch the game ball into the right-hand region P501R (right-handed region) of the game area. Further, the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is controlled to the above-mentioned "time saving state" in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state).

Explaining the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is reached, the player fires a game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the general drawing The first procedure is to enter (pass) the ball into the operating gate device P740, and by entering (passing) the ball into the operating gate device P740, the main control board P40 receives a normal symbol lottery. Since the normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is won with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal figure probability change function, one game ball is sent to the normal figure operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 occurs once. When the ordinary electric accessory P770 is activated, the second start winning opening P721, which triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol, becomes easy to enter in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, and the player continues the second second. As a procedure, a game ball is launched toward the second starting winning opening P721. When a game ball enters the second start winning opening P721, detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the right to execute the special game (big hit, small hit). The lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In the case of acquisition of small hit games, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the game machine, acquisition of small hit games (or acquisition of multiple small hit games, specific types of It may be designed to end with the acquisition of a small hit game). When the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games played, the state shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 2: High probability / High base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (3), (7), and (9) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there is a case where the specific game state 2 shifts to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (4), (8), and (10) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (4), (8), and (10) include (a) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 2, (c). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed.

After shifting to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). It differs in that it has a "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of the game in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big hit earlier than the high probability of winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery. To do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 2 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), and the specific game state Shift to 3 (high probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 3: High probability / low base state]
Subsequently, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (5), (10), and (11) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse the predetermined number of games (* (10). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there is a case where the specific game state 3 shifts to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (6), (9), and (12) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (6), (9), and (12) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 3, (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (6) only).

When shifting to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated and becomes the "high probability (state)", and the specific game state 1 and the specific game Unlike the state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "variation time shortening function" are not operating. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal drawing operating gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right area P501 (right-handed area) of the game area. Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), the player performs a "right hit" to shoot a game ball into the right area P501R (right hit area) of the game area. However, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player advances the game by "left-handed" in which the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since it is in a high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high. The game method and game progress are the same as in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), except that the jackpot game can be acquired at an early stage because it is high.

The specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 3 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) ends depending on the number of games played, the state shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

Note that the specific gaming state 3 (high probability / low base state) is different from the board layout configuration of FIG. 6 described as the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, and the normal electric accessory P770 is located in the right side region P501R (right-handed region). Arrangement of winning devices on the game board, such as arranging a third start winning opening of a type that does not have, and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lottery can be received in a short time. In addition, depending on the control of the time saving state, "right-handed" may be the recommended gaming state.

As described above, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the game progresses according to a plurality of gaming states, but it is not always necessary to provide all the gaming states described above. Therefore, among the game machine specifications composed of a combination of a plurality of gaming states, the game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted by the presupposed pachinko game machine P are illustrated below.

Regarding typical game machine specifications ("specs"), as an example of the types of game machine specifications related to the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery, "(until next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)" , "V probability change (also called" ball probability "," attack round system ")", "latent probability change" can be adopted. The difference in the game machine specifications due to the difference in the probability fluctuation function may be expressed as "this game machine is a" XX machine (example: ST machine) "". Further, in a game machine having no probability fluctuation function, by passing through a specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small hit game, the accessory continuous operation device is subsequently operated (that is, the game shifts to the big hit game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[Probability change (until next time)]
First of all, "probability change (until next time)" will be explained. "Probability change until next time" is generally defined as "specific game state 2 (specific game state 2), which is the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states among a plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko gaming machine P. The game machine specifications for the "pachinko game machine" that will continue until the next big hit game right is acquired (high probability / high base state) are shown. In other words, the game machine of "probability change until next time" is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) continues until the right of the next big hit game is acquired, and it does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. Has been done.

Depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). In addition, in the "pachinko gaming machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to the next big hit game", the probability fluctuation function continues until the next big hit. Although it is sometimes called "probability change until the next time", the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. Since it is a probability change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating in this way, it is expressed separately as "latent probability change".

[ST (Probability change)]
Next, "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" will be described. "ST" is an abbreviation for "Special Time", and in general, "specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is performed by a predetermined number of special symbol lottery (predetermined number of times). The game machine specifications for "Pachinko game machines that will continue until the right of the jackpot game is acquired" are shown.

Depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). In addition, as in the case of "probability change until next time" described above, the game state is set to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) until a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is performed or the right to the jackpot game is acquired. It is also possible to configure the case to have a state called "latent probability change (latent ST)" in the case of being controlled.

Further, even in the case of "ST (probability change of number of times)", the period in which the game state is controlled by ST is set to "until the lottery of the special symbol lottery is performed 10,000 times". If it is a game machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "probability change until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until next time" and "ST (probability change by number of times)" distinguish "probability change state" as a game machine specification in that the end of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is different. Is. On the other hand, as described below, regarding whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is activated in the specific game state, that is, the start of execution of the probability fluctuation function, as in the "V probability change (" ball probability "" attack round system ")". The game machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a game machine specification called "V probability variation" will be described. The "V probability change" is referred to as a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the large winning opening P751 during the jackpot game before the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. When the passage of a gaming ball (“V winning”) is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability fluctuation function is activated after the jackpot game. The gaming machine specifications of the pachinko gaming machine that controls the transition to the specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) are shown. Regarding the "specific area" used for the "V probability variation", it may be particularly referred to as a "probability fluctuation function operating area".

As described above, "V probability variation" is a game machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated depends on the game result during the big hit game (depends on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area P760). There is a "V probability change (V-loop)" depending on whether the activated probability fluctuation function ends with the same control as the "probability change until the next time" or the same control as the "ST". An expression indicating a game machine specification different from "" and "V-ST" is used.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that adopts "V probability variation" as the game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the big hit game, the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the big hit game, and the normal game state or the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability / high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability variation function operates after the big hit game is switched between the case where the V prize is won and the case where the V prize is not won, and at the same time, the operation mode of the electric chew support function can be changed. As an example, in the "V probability change (V-loop)" machine, if V is won, the probability fluctuation function and the electric chew support function will continue until the next big hit, and if V is not won, the probability fluctuation function will be activated. However, the electric chew support function can also be limited to 100 special symbol lottery.

[Small hit V]
Next, a game machine specification (spec) called "small hit V" will be described as a game machine specification that can provide a gaming state advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition of a big hit without having a probability fluctuation function.

The "small hit V" is a "specific area" provided inside the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game (during the operation of the special electric accessory) that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. When passing through "P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the accessory continuous operating device is operated following the small hit game, that is, the game machine specification for starting the big hit game. is there. In other words, by passing the specific area P760 during the small hit, the big hit game can be obtained without obtaining the result of the big hit as a result of the special symbol lottery.

"Small hit V" is a special electric accessory that is not operating the accessory continuous activator due to the playability of "1 type (pachinko)" that operates the accessory continuous actuator and the special electric accessory as a result of the special symbol lottery. It is a specification that operates the accessory continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (while the large winning opening P751 is open), and while it may be expressed as "Type 1 small hit V", the conventional pachinko game Since it has a playability close to that of the so-called "type 2 pachinko" gaming machine, it is sometimes referred to as a "type 1 and type 2 mixer".

Generally, a pachinko machine that adopts "small hit V" as a game machine specification does not have a probability change function (probability change function), and the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of an electric chew support function. That is, it becomes a change trigger of a special symbol (for example, winning a small hit at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small hit at the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, which makes it easy to win when the electric chew support function is activated. By configuring it with a starting winning opening, it is easy to win a small hit under the situation where the electric chew support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big hit with a V winning during a small hit game. By doing so, it is a game playability that increases the possibility of obtaining a big hit by a small hit, instead of increasing the random value range that becomes a big hit as in the probability variation function.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical, and some other characteristic game machine specifications are known. Therefore, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
The "limiter" is a case where a specific game state in which the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is activated is repeatedly performed with the execution of the jackpot game in between (so-called "ream villa" state), and is predetermined. When the number of repetitions (number of consecutive villas) is reached, even if the jackpot game that the probability fluctuation function and the electric chew support function should originally operate is executed, the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function It is a function that limits the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "probability change limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called the "time saving limiter (electric sapoli limiter)". Call. A game machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Fall" is a game machine that executes a "fall lottery" that determines whether or not to terminate the probability fluctuation function each time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. The specifications are shown. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating together with the probability fluctuation function, if the fall lottery is won, the operation of the electric chew support function ends at the end of the probability fluctuation function, or only the probability fluctuation function ends. The operation of the Shiden Chu support function may continue.

It should be noted that a plurality of the above-mentioned game machine specifications can be combined. For example, when "ST" and "fall" are combined, when the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is set, ( Specific game state 2 (high) when either 1) winning the fall lottery, (2) performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery, or (3) acquiring the right to the jackpot game is satisfied. Probability / high base state) will end (shift to another game state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 that controls the progress of the game in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P which is the premise to be described in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine which adopts "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" as the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications (specs) will be described. .. In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s OO" indicating the processing step in the figure will be described as "step OO" in the text.

[Power-on processing of main control board (main loop processing of main control board)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, first executes the power-on processing (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. Here, the details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

When the power-on process is started on the main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately set the setting necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006) are subsequently executed, and the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is received in response to these processing contents. ) Is performed.

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value" for changing the degree of advantage of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P (particularly, the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device, that is, the jackpot probability). The flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting change processing" that can change "", and the flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting confirmation processing" for confirming the "setting value" This is a process for generating information for determining whether or not to establish (whether or not to turn on) in the game stop state setting process that is performed later. In the presupposed pachinko game machine P, the frame opening switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is open with respect to the outer frame, and may be referred to as a door opening switch, a door opening sensor, or a frame opening sensor. ), The detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is being operated by the player, and the detection status of whether the setting key switch P49 is being rotated are generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko gaming machine P normally turned off the power, and the control data related to the game state when the power cut occurred was normally performed. It is a process of confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is played as an error in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later. It is a process to set (turn on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the processing results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change state", "setting confirmation state", and "unrecoverable" This is a process of setting a flag to shift to one of the "error states" of the game progress disallowed state. The details of the "game stop state setting process" are shown in FIG. 8, and the description will be given based on the description in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko gaming machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1". Therefore, the processing of the following step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the input port confirmation process (step 1004) generated 1 The operation information of the setting key switch is calculated from the byte data so as to be off data. Although not shown, in both cases where YES is set in step 1102 and NO is set, the bit in the 1-byte data whose frame is open is also calculated to be off data.

In the following step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that can be determined as "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, the situation where it is judged that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame release switch P131 is on (the frame is open when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is on. It requires three states: (it is being rotated) and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. As described above, the information of the frame opening switch P131 is set to off in the 1-byte data, and it is determined in this step whether or not both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, when two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (note that the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1", and either one is used. One data may be "0"). Then, when it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, that is, when it is determined to be YES in step 1104, the data indicating "setting change in progress" is stored as the game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated ( Step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1108. If the set value information stored in the ram (RAM = Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (when the operation is to return from the unrecoverable error state), it is set as the initial setting value. The data corresponding to the set value "1" is set in the area for storing the set value (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that requires ram clearing and setting (changing) processing when the game cannot proceed, such as a checksum error (ram error) or a setting value error. Refers to. The determination in step 1108 determines whether or not to set the game stopped state based on the processing result of the power off information confirmation / checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored in the previous power off processing. .. If it is determined that an error state should be set (if YES is determined in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (step 1110, step 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112.

In the following step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 is operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the relevant step
(A) When the operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, in the judgment of "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is on (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) When the setting key switch P49 is on, is satisfied, and (3) The ram clear switch P48 is on, is not satisfied.
(B) When the ram clear operation for clearing the data is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on is not satisfied, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. When satisfied
(C) When the power is turned on without any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", and "ram clear operation" being performed.
It is one of the situations. Then, in these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) has (a) bit data indicating on / off of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (on data)", and (b) ram clear switch. The bit data indicating on / off of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (on data)", and (c) the 1-byte data is all off data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, it is determined in step 1112 whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there is a ram clear operation (when it is determined to be YES in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine enters the game-enabled state after ram clearing. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except in the situation where the ram clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is, and at this time, when the operation to shift the game stop state flag to the "setting confirmation state" is performed (in step 1112). (When determining NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop status flag is stored as data indicating "setting is being confirmed" ( Step 1118). Further, when there is neither a ram clear operation nor a transition operation to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating that there is no game stop as a game stop state flag. It is set as information without game stop.

If a value indicating some kind of stop state is stored for the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), it is the main game allowed state in the power-on process (step 1000). In the interrupt process (step 2000), which is the main body of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (step 1028 to step 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the game progress described as "basic game progress". However, these controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process of FIG. 7, the subsequent process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether or not the ram clear operation has been performed (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. This process is executed regardless of whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. When it is determined in step 1010 that there is a ram clearing operation, a predetermined storage area is initialized from the ram storage area of the main control board P40.

In the subsequent processes from steps 1014 to 1020, a process of setting an effect control command (effect command) for causing the effect control board P41 to recognize the state of the game machine from the main control board P40 when the power is turned on is performed. More specifically, in step 1014, a process of clearing the effect control command that was not transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off) is performed from the storage area. Then, when the information regarding the current gaming state of the main control board P40 returned after the power is turned on in step 1016 is generated as an effect control command and it is determined in step 1018 that the game is not in the game stopped state, the generated return in step 1020 is performed. The effect control command indicating the game state is set in the area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of turning on the power is completed, the necessary data (drive signal) for returning the large winning port P751 (special electric accessory P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 to the state before the power failure occurred. ) Is output from the output port to the special electric accessory driving means P70 and the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is subjected to a process of setting the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the interval for executing the interrupt processing (FIG. 9, step 2000) described later is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process is completed, the process shifts to a circular process called a main loop in which the player can play, and the execution of the circular process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in FIG. 7, the processing of the main loop of the main control board is performed by first performing a process of prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing in step 1026, and enabling interrupt processing in step 1036 until the processing of the main loop is completed. (Up to) Restrict the execution of interrupt processing.

When interrupts are disabled, in the following step 1028, the occurrence of a runaway CPU of the main control board P40 called a watchdog timer (a situation in which processing loops and stops proceeding, etc.) is to be monitored. Clear (initialize) the area that stores the timekeeping information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether the power supply is cut off (for example, whether the power supply cutoff signal sent from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If the power is cut off, the current gaming state is stored, the power cut information and the check sum information are stored, and the processing of the main control board P40 as the CPU is stopped (step 1032). ) Is executed. If the power is not cut off, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. It should be noted that some of these random number value updates are updated in the interrupt process described later, and this is a process for preventing the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to the random number being updated only in the interrupt process. If there is a process that is executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating the random number value according to the process. Therefore, it is not essential to provide a random number update process in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final process in the main loop, and performs a process for permitting interrupts. Immediately after that, the process returns to the interrupt disable of step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop. However, when the process of step 1036 for enabling interrupts is performed, the interrupt execution cycle (4 ms has elapsed since the previous interrupt process occurred). If the CPU of the main control board P40 has an input indicating the above-mentioned state, the interrupt processing described later will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Subsequently, interrupt processing (also referred to as “timer interrupt processing”) performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the sub-module program provided that can be changed according to the gaming machine specifications (specs) is generally constant. It is configured to read and control in the order of. The processing related to these submodules will be briefly described below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
At the beginning of the interrupt process, a watchdog timer clear process is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 described above. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation process)
The input port confirmation process confirms the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, so that it is possible to identify whether or not there is input information as information necessary for determination in the subsequent processing. This is the process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, an input signal indicating the operation status (touch / absence) of the handle P204, and other input signals related to artificial operations. , Special figure 1 Input signal indicating the game result by detecting the game ball such as the start port switch P712 and the big prize opening switch P752, the magnetic sensor P73, the door opening sensor P131, the vibration detection sensor P72, etc. are provided for fraud monitoring. There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all reads is called the input data (“level data”) in this interrupt. ), Stored in the ram of the main control board P40. For the part of the data read three times that is not the same data in all the readings, the data confirmed in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms ago) will be adopted as level data, that is, the interrupt this time. If the data cannot be read normally in, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) in the interrupt this time is confirmed, a comparison operation with the input data in the previous interrupt is performed to generate "rising data" (data that identifies the bit whose input data has changed from off to on). The data that identifies the switch that was switched to the on input by the interrupt this time is stored.

(Random number update process)
Random number update processing is performed by software among various random numbers such as winning / failing random numbers, symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers related to the special symbol lottery, and normal symbol lottery normal symbol winning / failing random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers. This is a process of updating a so-called soft random number, which is a random number value to be updated (step 2006). In the presupposed pachinko game machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those that are updated in the update cycle on the circuit by the random number generation circuit and those that are updated in the soft cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers at the time of random number acquisition.

In the random number update process, as described above, the soft random number is updated, but the update method is as follows.
(A) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1), and when the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded, the lower limit value (or upper limit value) is set.
(B) Subtract (or add) an arbitrary prime number to a random number, and add (or subtract) the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) when the random number range is exceeded.
(C) Repeat incrementing (or decrementing) from the random number set as the initial value, and when the update of one cycle is completed, set the separately updated "initial value random number" as a new initial value and perform the same update. Things that repeat (also called initial value update type random numbers),
Various update methods such as can be exemplified. The update method is not limited to the one illustrated in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as the random number can be maintained.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set in the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is determined whether or not the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated for the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is on-data, and it is not on-data, that is, the pachinko game machine. If the setting key is not turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated during the game stop flag is on-data, the current interrupt is used to determine whether to end "setting changing" and "setting checking". After referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated by the input port confirmation process described above) and clearing the game stop flag when the setting key switch P49 is turned off to enable the game, An effect control command for returning (or starting) an effect is set on the effect control board according to whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Further, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), when the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", the role of the "setting change switch" in this interrupt timing is played during the period until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (the switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated in this interrupt, the "setting value" is set to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine P having setting value data such that the setting is switched from 1 to 6 in order, each time there is rising data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. The process of increasing the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value) is performed.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, by providing processing in the setting change state and setting confirmation state during interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored in the interrupt processing cycle. , A program for periodic monitoring during power-on processing (see FIG. 7) in which display data can be output to the display device by LED output processing, which will be described later, and interrupt processing has not been set separately. Can be omitted. It should be noted that, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmations, control display devices, and update set values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, whether or not the game is stopped by reading the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed by the CPU of the main control board when the pachinko game machine is turned on. It is a process to confirm whether or not. (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, when some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, the game stop flag data is not 0 and any bit is "1". If it is, it is determined that the game is stopped (a state in which the game is stopped), and it is considered that the game is stopped, and a part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. 9 to “special electric motor” (Up to the accessory control process (step 2028)) ”is omitted.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting is being changed", "setting is being confirmed", and "unrecoverable error" A state such as "occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for managing the time related to the progress of the game (step 2014).

As an example of the timer data update process, management of the fluctuation display time set when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, and the operating time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (opening time of the big winning opening P751). ), Timer data update processing triggered by the progress of the game, timekeeping processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in the main control display device P50 such as special symbol display devices P51 and P52. Examples thereof include a process for measuring the switching time for switching the data, a process for measuring the period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (hall computer, etc.), and the like.

The timer data updated by the timer update process is divided into the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40 for each type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer", and is continuous. Each is stored in the storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the individual types of timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. The timer update process performs a process of decrementing (-1) the timer data stored in the storage area. If the stored timer data is already "0", it is processed so that it becomes "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it is set to "0", or If it is "0", do not decrement, etc.).

In the presupposed Pachinko game machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so in the case of 1-byte timer data, only the management target that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed only within 1 second (when there is little), it is also possible to configure it with only 2-byte timer data and not have 1-byte timer update processing. Is. Further, when it is necessary to manage the time value that cannot be managed even by the 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than a "3-byte timer".

(Validity period setting process)
The validity period setting process is a period for controlling the winning opening (mainly the winning opening related to the large winning opening P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770) that can be changed to the easy entry mode or the difficult entry mode. It is a process of setting the valid period in the valid extension period and setting the invalid period for the other period (when the winning opening is in a difficult-to-enter mode and other than the valid extension period). (Step 2016)

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine, the winning of the large winning opening P751 as the large winning device and the second starting winning opening P721, which is the second starting winning device P720 equipped with the ordinary electric accessory P770, is set as the valid period. It becomes a process to do.

In addition, during the valid extension period, in order to treat the game ball entered at the timing immediately before the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770 shifts to the difficult-to-enter mode as an effective winning, the large winning opening P750 (special electric accessory) Since it is treated as an effective period even after the control period for executing the opening control for the electric accessory such as P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 has elapsed, a certain period of time appropriately set according to the structure of the electric accessory is set. It is a control period.

Further, depending on the game machine specifications, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, the effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may also be set. In such a case, in this process, The validity period of a specific area is also set.

(Prize winning monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of the game ball for various winning openings (large winning opening P751, starting opening P711, P721, general winning opening P731) in the pachinko gaming machine, and the prize is awarded. This is a process of generating information that triggers the process of generating the right to draw a special symbol for a ball or a ball entering the starting port (occurrence of hold). (Step 2018)

The processing contents are as follows: (a) Detecting the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004) (b) The winning opening having a valid period In that case, it is judged whether or not the prize is won during the valid period, and when a valid prize is generated for each winning opening, (c) A directing control command indicating the winning information for each winning opening to be transmitted to the effect control board P41. Settings, (d) Update the counter value (called "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among the actions based on the detection of various winning openings (Updates the counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in).

In the winning monitoring process, not only the winning of various winning openings, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting the out balls, the operation opening switch P742 that triggers the ordinary symbol lottery, and the game machine. Depending on the specifications, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and the operation of the game machine (for example, the operation of the game machine (for example, the occurrence of a prize ball or the trigger of a special symbol lottery) In this process, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting the information indicating that the operation port switch P742 and the specific area P760 have been passed to the effect control board P41 is performed.

(Operating port monitoring process)
The operation port monitoring process is a process related to the occurrence of hold related to the normal symbol lottery when the rising data of the normal figure operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). Do. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal figure operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of holds is less than the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new hold. Since it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of holds to increase the number of holds information by one, the random numbers of the normal figure hit / miss, the normal figure symbol random numbers, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern random numbers are randomized. Obtain from the generation circuit, or obtain the current corresponding soft random number and store it as a hold.

(Normal symbol control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs a process related to the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (step 2022). These processes shift to different sub-module processes depending on which is the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol or the normal electric accessory, which is called the normal symbol status, and perform the control according to the state. The status of the normal symbol is "0: Waiting for the normal symbol", "1: Normal symbol is changing", "2: Normal symbol is stopped and displayed", "3: Normal electric accessory is operating", "4: Normal" There is a "Demonstration of the end of the electric accessory", and processing is performed according to each state.

<< Normal symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The normal symbol change start monitoring control process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: waiting for the normal symbol".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not been generated, and the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of holdings related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the right to change the normal symbol has been generated, and it is judged that the condition for starting the change of the normal symbol is satisfied, and the change of the normal symbol is changed. Execute the process related to the start.

When it is judged that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the hold number information is decremented by -1 from the area for storing the hold number information related to the normal symbol lottery, and then the normal symbol hit / miss random number, the normal symbol symbol random number, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number are obtained. Call and perform the normal figure success / failure lottery, the normal figure pattern lottery, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern lottery, store the lottery result in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and store the hold number information. The process of shifting is performed so that the processes are processed in the memorized order, and the normal symbol status is updated to "1: Normal symbol changing". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operating status of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability fluctuation function, normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , Ordinary symbols tend to have a short variation display time.

《Processing during normal symbol change》
The normal symbol changing process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is “1: Normal symbol changing”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation processing, a timer (normal) that manages the fluctuation display of the normal symbol until the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol according to the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined during the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing elapses, that is, This is a process of causing the normal symbol display device P53 to execute the fluctuation display of the normal symbol until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process.

More specifically, when the normal symbol variation display timer is not 0, the normal symbol display switching counter whose maximum value is "5" is updated every time this process is executed, and the normal symbol display switching counter is set to "5". At the timing of "5", a process of storing information regarding the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LED constituting the normal symbol display device P53. The normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value "0" at the timing when the maximum value "5" is reached. That is, in the variation display of the normal symbol, the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4 ms × 5 = 20 ms). The switching interval can be set as appropriate. For example, if the maximum value of the normal figure display switching counter is 25, the display pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). Be done.

When the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol ends, that is, when the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the stop display symbol of the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol lottery is the main control display device. Data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the stop display is displayed on the normal symbol display device P53 on P50. Then, the symbol fixing time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: Normal symbol stop display".

《Processing during normal symbol stop display》
The normal symbol stop display processing is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: Normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer for which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol change processing is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0". Then, the process of setting for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "hit", it depends on the winning symbol and the operating state of the base state (extension function of the normal electric accessory). , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the winning counter related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and set the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory is operating". Update to.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "missing", the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol". I do.

《Processing during normal electric accessory operation》
The normal electric accessory operating process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: Normal electric accessory operating".

In the process during operation of the normal electric accessory, the opening operation (change to the easy entry mode) and the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory are performed based on the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 set in the process during the normal symbol stop display. While controlling (change to a difficult-to-enter mode), it monitors the establishment of the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory. The operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 ends when (a) a specified number of ordinary electric accessory prizes set as the end condition of the ordinary electric accessory occur, and (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends. This is the case (when the open operation period of the normal electric accessory has expired).

When the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is satisfied, the extension period of a fixed time determined in advance corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is clocked in the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the ordinary electric accessory. Set the time. Then, the time value related to the operation end demonstration of the ordinary electric accessory is set in the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the ordinary symbol status is set to "4: During the ordinary electric accessory end demonstration".

《Demonstration process for ending normal electric accessory operation》
The normal electric accessory operation end demo process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: Normal electric accessory end demo".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demo process, the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer waits until it becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0". When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: Waiting for normal symbol" is performed.

(Starting port monitoring process)
In the start port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), a special symbol lottery is performed. Performs processing related to the occurrence of hold related to. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are detected, the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery is confirmed, and the number of holds does not reach the upper limit. Can store a random number as a new hold, so after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern The random number is acquired from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding soft random number is acquired and stored as a hold.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there are two types of special symbols, the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, the data of the corresponding special symbol hold number and start port switch are called for each of the start ports provided on the game board P5, the hold number is added for each start port, and random numbers are acquired. Is processed.

Further, when the starting port to be processed is composed of the starting port (electric chew) related to the ordinary electric accessory, the starting port winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is effective in the above-mentioned validity period setting process. After determining whether or not it was performed within the period, if it is valid, the above-mentioned processing is performed.

When storing the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, the acquired random number information is used in advance using the advance notice judgment value table, and the fluctuation content when the fluctuation based on the various reserved random numbers is executed is in advance. Information that can be inferred is generated and notified to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (referred to as "preliminary determination command", "preliminary determination information", and "look-ahead determination command"). The pre-judgment command is generated for each of the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, it is used for the lottery related to the execution of the "look-ahead effect" described later on the effect control board P41. Will be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes status information for managing a special symbol called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the special electric accessory called, any of the special symbol change start management (special symbol change start monitoring control process), special symbol change process, and special symbol stop symbol display process. Execute the process.

The special symbol status includes "0: Waiting for special symbol change", "1: Special symbol change", "2: Lost symbol stop display", "3: Big hit symbol stop display", "4: Small hit" It has a state of "design stop display", and the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big winning opening is closed", and "3". : Big hit end demonstration is in progress ”,“ 4: Small hit special electric power is in operation ”,“ 5: Small hit is closed ”,“ 6: Small hit end demonstration is in progress ”. Depending on the specifications of the game machine, it may not have a small hit, and in that case, it does not have the status data related to the small hit. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

When there are a plurality of special symbols, the special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority). In a predetermined order, the process of preferentially controlling the second special symbol is performed, and in a situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the change of the second special symbol comes first. The game machine specifications that are processed so that they are started (the second special symbol changes preferentially) are called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control", and the pachinko gaming machine P is implemented as a premise. In the description of the form, the processing related to this type will be described by way of example.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the information of the special electric accessory status is first referred to. In the case of data indicating that the special electric accessory status is during a big hit game or a small hit game (when the special electric accessory status is other than "0: waiting for a hit"), the first special symbol is changing and the first If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: Waiting for special symbol change", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the control of the second special symbol is executed, the process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by the process of decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area for storing the timer, and when the decremented result is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the timer update is completed, the submodule process described later is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2. Although the timer subtraction process is also performed during the interrupt process, the timer updated by the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated by the special symbol control process, and the special symbol control process does not include the timer data. It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<< Special symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The special symbol change start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol change".

In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold of the special symbol being processed as a target, the process is completed if there is no hold, and the subsequent process is executed if there is a hold. Subsequent processing is a special symbol lottery performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as the set value is read out and inspected, and it is determined whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the lottery table is appropriately selected with reference to the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state, etc., the winning / losing lottery, the symbol lottery, and the variable pattern lottery are executed, and the lottery result is obtained. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: Special symbol changing". In addition, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variation effect executed according to the variation display of the special symbol. It is used as information for the determination process (lottery process) of. The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol change》
The special symbol changing process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is “1: special symbol changing”.

In the special symbol changing process, the timer that manages the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is monitored until the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery elapses, and every interrupt is performed until the remaining fluctuation time becomes "0". The special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (when controlling special symbol 1)) is used to display the fluctuation display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts by the updated special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24"). Performs the lighting display pattern switching process of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variation display time of the special symbol becomes "0", it indicates that the variation display of the special symbol has been executed once for the external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. Setting of information for outputting an external signal, stop display of special symbols Process of setting fixed time of symbols for fixed display, stop display showing stop display symbols determined as a result of winning / fail lottery, symbol lottery Lighting pattern data for displaying a symbol on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) is set. Then, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: out of place symbol stop display", "3: big hit symbol stop display", and "4: small hit symbol stop display" according to the result of the winning / losing lottery.

《Processing while displaying special symbol off symbol stop》
The processing during display of the special symbol off symbol is a process of shifting when the special symbol status is "2: Out of design stop display".

In the special symbol off symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it is processed. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the number of remaining games in the game status (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery is increased. It is updated and confirmed regarding the establishment of the end condition, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state is performed.

《Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display》
The special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting when the special symbol status is "3: jackpot symbol stop display".

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it is processed. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the status of the special electric accessory is updated to "2: The big winning opening is closed". Further, in order to end the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery, a process of clearing the remaining number of times information storage area and the operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, the information of various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot symbol information, and the special electric accessory P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set the content data.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing the effect of the jackpot game (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is further executed. Further, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator light P56 (a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the game area), which is one of the components of the main control display device P50, is recommended. Lighting pattern data for lighting the LED) that is sometimes lit is also set.

《Processing during special symbol small hit symbol stop display》
The special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting when the special symbol status is “4: Small hit symbol stop display being displayed”.

Similar to the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, the special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is to set the data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 and turn on the right-handed indicator light P56 at the end of the symbol fixing time. Perform the relevant setting process. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, when the small hit game is executed (small hit symbol stop display), unlike when the big hit symbol is stopped, the game state (high probability state or high probability state) related to the special symbol lottery There is no process to end the high base state), and the game state is determined based on the judgment result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, as in the process of the process of processing the special symbol off symbol stop display. Control. In addition, the status of the special electric accessory will be updated to "5: Small hit closed" in accordance with these processes. Depending on the game machine specifications, as a modification, the specifications are designed to have a process of forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) when the small hit game is executed, as in the case of stopping the big hit symbol. It is also possible.

When any of the above sub-module processes is selectively executed, the process of the first special symbol is performed following the process of the second special symbol. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the status of the special symbol of the first special symbol. The explanation is omitted because almost the same process is repeated only by (judging by referring to).

《Ordered entry control, parallel control》
Further, in the above-mentioned explanation of the special symbol control process, the description is based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but there are cases where a gaming machine specification different from that of the pachinko gaming machine, which is the premise of the present invention, is adopted. It is also possible to proceed with the special symbol control process by different processes. The typical ones will be briefly described below.

The "ball entry order digestion control" is a game machine specification in which the hold information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order in which they are generated. While the fluctuation of one symbol is not performed, the fluctuation display of the other is not performed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "injection order digestion", and simultaneously displays fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a type of game machine specification that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lottery per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 operates with the stop display of the special symbol of 1 (when the big hit and the small hit are executed), the other symbol is forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped or the variable display is displayed. Specifications that suspend the subtraction of the remaining time are appropriately adopted. As an example, if one special symbol is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss, or if one special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control process)
In the special electric accessory control process, the sub-module process related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 is executed according to the data content (value) of the special electric accessory status (sometimes referred to as the special electric game status), and the special electric accessory control process is performed. It is a process of managing the operation of an object (step 2028). In other words, when the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, each state in the big hit game and the small hit game state is controlled, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751 is controlled.

As mentioned above, the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big winning opening is closed", and "3: the big hit end demonstration". , "4: Small hit special electric operation is in operation", "5: Small hit is closed", and "6: Small hit end demonstration is in progress".

Of these special electric accessory statuses, when the status is "0: waiting for a hit", it means that the player's game has not yet acquired the right to execute the big hit game or the small hit game. , The special electric accessory control process ends without any process.

Then, when the status of the special electric accessory is other than "0: waiting for a hit", one of the respective processes described later is executed according to the status.

《Processing during operation of special electric accessory》
The special electric accessory operating process is a process executed when the special electric accessory status is "1: special electric accessory operating" or "4: small hit special electric function operating". This process is a process in which a so-called round game (unit game) is executed in the special game (a state in which the large winning opening P751 can be controlled to be opened).

In the process during operation of the special electric accessory, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) a specified number of prizes (also called "count") according to the activated special electric accessory, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as is completed when either of them is satisfied. If these conditions are not satisfied, the special electric accessory control process in the current interrupt process is terminated without performing the subsequent process. The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the special electric accessory P755 includes a pattern for opening and closing the large winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round. While the timer used to determine (a) during the game is set to "0" multiple times, after confirming whether or not there is the next operation data during one round game, the condition (c) " When it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in this unit game, it is determined that the above (a) is satisfied.

On the other hand, when either (a) or (b) of the above conditions for ending the round game is satisfied, the closing time of the large winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory as a subsequent process. , Increment the status of the special electric accessory to "2: The big prize opening is closed". Then, command data for notifying that the round game is completed is set as an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while closing the big prize opening》
The processing during closing of the large winning opening is a processing executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "2: closing of the large winning opening" or "5: closing of the small hit". This process is a process in which the special game is controlled in the "between rounds" between the so-called round games and the round games, and before the start of the first round at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game. When the state is controlled by the "big hit start demo (period)" and "small hit start demo (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the hit end demo described later is executed. This is a process related to the state of being controlled during the waiting period until the result.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening, first, it is determined whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in the processing during operation of the special electric accessory has elapsed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time. If has not passed, the special electric accessory control process in the interrupt this time is terminated.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, was the operation (round game) of the special electric accessory P755 that was completed first was the final round game in this hit game (big hit game, small hit game)? Whether or not it is determined, and different processing is executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of the winning start demo). To determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 that was activated during this hit game is the maximum number of operations data of the special electric accessory P755 that was activated during this hit game. It is judged based on whether or not it exceeds, and the cumulative data of the number of times of operation of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the hit start demonstration.

In the process of closing the big winning opening, if it is judged that the final round game is over, the execution pattern of the winning end demo according to the type of hit (the type of special symbol that started the big hit or small hit). Read and set (mainly hit end demo time data). Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to "3: Big hit end demo in progress" or "6: Small hit end demo in progress", and an effect command for executing the end demo effect is set on the effect control board P41. Demonstration. Further, in order to set the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the valid extension period is stored in the timer that manages the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751 and ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined at the end of the game other than the final round game (or at the time of the winning start demonstration) in the processing during the closing of the large winning opening, the next round game is in what round as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify the presence (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and the recommended firing position during the hit game (in the assumed pachinko machine, the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game board) Send information (right-handed command) to instruct.

Then, the status of the special electric accessory is decremented and updated to "1: Special electric accessory is operating" or "4: Small hit special electric is operating", and the number of winning balls to the large winning opening P751 during the round game Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the time value related to the first opening (or closing immediately after the start of the round game) of the large winning opening P751 during the round game is set, and the operation pattern data of the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set. Then, the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to a player in response to a prize of a game ball for a prize opening arranged on the game board P5. The processing content is configured to execute the following three submodule processing. (Step 2030)

<< Payout data reception monitoring process >>
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence or absence of a control command related to the execution of the prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (memorizing) the transmitted command. .. The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). The register 1 is called a status register and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information is normally transmitted. Has been done. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on control contents related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is not abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. Store in the area.

《Payout command request processing》
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning opening that stores the winning number data of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed, and the presence or absence of unpaid winnings is confirmed. The confirmation process is confirmed in a predetermined order for each winning opening, and when it is determined that the data of the winning counter is not "0" for one winning opening, the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning opening is determined. , Performs a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of the game ball to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for the plurality of winning openings is not "0", the payout control command transmitted to the payout control board P43 with one interrupt is limited to one.

<< Payout command control processing >>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received information on the number of payouts, and it is determined whether the command is normally received in this process or a communication error occurs due to some abnormality. It will be. Until the command reception status is confirmed in the payout command control process (whether the reception is completed normally or an error is determined), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is the payout command request process. And is suspended by the flag data that is set to be on / off in the issue command control process.

(Abnormality detection processing)
The abnormality detection process is a process for confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality from the information of the sensor provided for fraud detection in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, an abnormality occurs based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). It is a process to judge whether or not the situation is occurring. In addition to various sensors, harnesses for electrical connection have been removed, and short circuits on wiring are also detected.

Then, when abnormal data exists for any of the judgment information, a command for notifying the error information is set as an effect control command for the effect control board P41 after storing the error data by turning on the corresponding error flag. To do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection judgment process, the period during which the sensor or switch is continuously detected is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is the process of establishing the flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection judgment process, when the level data of the detection data information of the target sensor or switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not the start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the switch to be monitored is no longer on-data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, when the winning opening detection switch provided in the winning opening continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that a ball clogging has occurred, and the error state is controlled to produce an effect. As a control command, a process of setting command information for causing an error notification to the effect control board P41, and a generation and output request of signal data for notifying an external device (hall computer or the like) of an error are performed.

The switch to be detected in this process includes a touch sensor switch provided on the handle P204 and a switch for fraud detection, in order to determine whether it is due to human operation or electrical noise. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game status display processing)
The game status display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information on the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, the output of the display content to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by the LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating an error state, and a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) that displays the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery. P61, special figure 2 hold indicator light P62), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 that displays the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery, etc. Lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and used as data output by LED output processing. Store.

In the game status display process, when a blinking display is required for the LED indicator lamp whose lighting is controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern switching process is performed by comparing the counter value and the threshold value. Will be done. For example, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery can be held up to four, but the special symbol holding indicator light is configured by two LED indicators (special figure 1 holding indicator light P61). , Special figure 2 Hold indicator light P62 is equipped with two LEDs each), so if there are three or more holds, at least one LED will display a blinking display instead of a continuous lighting display. It is a specification to do.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to the game operation to the electric accessory which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, the payout control board P43, and the like. (Step 2038)

More specifically, when the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory or the special electric accessory is set during the normal symbol control process or the special electric accessory control process, the process during the output port output process causes the ordinary electric accessory. Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory driving means P71 and the special electric accessory driving means P72 (solenoid in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine).

Further, a control signal (launch permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the launch of the game ball based on the handle operation of the player is generated and output to the payout control board P43 by the output port output process. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the communication status with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence status of an error requiring game stop.

(Direction control command transmission processing)
The effect control command transmission process is a process of outputting an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the effect control command is sent to the effect control board P41 only in the effect control command transmission process. It is a specification to be transmitted (step 2040). Regarding the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, uses a storage area called a ring buffer that circularly refers to a storage destination as an area for storing untransmitted effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next processing called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (set) the effect control command and reading (transmitting) the effect control command. The specifications are such that the writing and reading of the effect control command are executed using the information for calculating the address of the storage area for writing the command and the address of the storage area for reading the command.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the structure of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

We will return to the explanation of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing and explain it. In the effect control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned write pointer and read pointer information match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no effect control command to be transmitted, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the data of the write pointer and the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the read pointer data, and each is temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next processing.

As the effect control command, the MODE data and the EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are sequentially transmitted to the effect control board P41. First, the MODE data is set in the effect command output port, which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform the reading operation is output. The main control board P40 subsequently outputs EVENT data, but after performing a process with a waiting time of 26 μs in order to secure a sufficient period for the effect control board P41 to receive the MODE data, the MODE data. As in the case of transmission, the EVENT data is set to the output port and the strobe signal is output. When the effect control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates an effect control command reception interrupt and receives the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
In the external information output processing, information on the game status and security information such as the occurrence of an error are output as signals from the external information output terminal 77 to the external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. This is the process to be performed (step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set in the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, a pulse signal that is on potential for a certain period is transmitted. Some of them continue to output the on-potential until the condition that the signal output ends is satisfied.

In the external information output process, first, a signal related to the game state is generated. In order to make it possible to identify the type of specific gaming state as a signal related to the gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, has the operating state (probability state) of the probability fluctuation function and the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function. With reference to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big hit or small hit), if the game state is controlled, the external output data is transmitted so that the corresponding data is transmitted. Update. In addition to the ones exemplified here, depending on the specifications of the game machine, an output signal is generated based on the information indicating the presence / absence of the fluctuation time shortening function and the information indicating that the case is a specific type of jackpot. There may be cases.

Further, as the output signal output by the external information output processing, not only the signal related to the game state but also the information based on the occurrence of the predetermined game result is output. For example, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed symbol signal") transmitted each time a special symbol variation display is executed and a stop display is displayed, or a start port switch (special figure 1 start port switch P712, special figure 2 start port switch). Every time a game ball is detected in various winning openings such as 722) and the large winning opening switch P752, or the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning balls in various winning openings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Every time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal transmitted to an external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and one signal is transmitted as a pulse signal in which an on-potential of 128 ms continues. However, when a plurality of game results are continuously generated, one signal is transmitted. After the output of the pulse signal is completed, the off-potential output for a certain period is inserted, and then the pulse signal is output again.

Further, in the external signal output processing, the data in the storage area in which the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the above-mentioned abnormality detection processing (step 2032) is stored and the comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. If it is determined that it is necessary to output a security signal by calculating and comparing with, the output data set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal of the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the progress status and the game state of the game. (Step 2044)

The LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol hold indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), and the second. Special symbol hold indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol hold indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator (total) It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

The state indicator P55 collectively represents a plurality of indicator lights related to the game state, and in detail, a special figure probability change indicator light indicating whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated, and an operation of the normal symbol probability change function. It refers to indicators such as a normal figure probability change indicator that indicates the presence / absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is operating) and an error indicator that indicates an error status.

In the LED output processing, the lighting data of the display unit in the main control display device is set in the output port by one byte for each interrupt processing, and the main control display device P50 is lit, and is updated every interrupt processing. Based on the value of the digit counter, select the LED of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interrupt, select the lighting pattern data according to the game situation, set it as display data, and control the lighting of each LED. It has become like.

That is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the main control display device P50 is set to the main control display device P50 by a dynamic lighting method that outputs lighting data to 32 LEDs in order by using at least four interrupt processes. I'm in control.

Further, in the LED output processing, in addition to the LED display that the player should visually recognize as the main control display device P50, the lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, or the unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, if a flag indicating some game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. During the setting change, setting confirmation, and unrecoverable error, all the LEDs constituting the main control display device are off. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, the light emission display may be performed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be displayed during the period when the setting is being changed. It may be configured so that all the LEDs constituting the above are turned on.

(Outside control processing)
The out-of-area control process is related to the test signal output process (process for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine) for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine and the display of the performance display device. It is composed of a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" indicates that the process is executed by the program of the storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area specified in the rules of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the test signal output process, processing is performed in which information related to the game result and the game state for output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko gaming machine P to an external test device is set in the output port. In the performance display processing, the game state is confirmed, the number of out balls, the ratio (base) of the number of out balls to the number of prize balls is calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery".

(Win / Fail lottery)
The "win / fail lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not the special electric accessory P755 is operated based on the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed. More simply, the lottery result of the special symbol , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" is a lottery to decide. Depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine P, there are some that do not have a "small hit" as a lottery result of the winning / losing lottery. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have a "small hit" as a lottery result of the winning / failing lottery for one special symbol, the lottery result of the other winning / failing lottery is "small". It may be configured so as not to have a "hit".

The win / fail lottery uses a random number called a "win / fail random number" among the random numbers acquired and stored when the game ball enters the start opening (first start winning opening P711, second start winning opening P721, etc.). And draw lots. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the range of random numbers (random number range) that can be taken by the winning / failing random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When the winning / failing lottery is performed, the result of the winning / failing lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with the lottery table used for the winning / failing lottery according to the game state and the set value (referred to as the "winning / failing lottery table"). Perform processing.

FIG. 10 illustrates some lottery tables used for the winning / failing lottery. FIG. 10A shows a winning / losing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a low probability state, and FIG. 10B shows a winning / losing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 show a winning / losing lottery table in a low probability state and a high probability state when the set value is “6”, respectively.

For example, in the situation where the winning / failing lottery is executed using the winning / failing lottery table of FIG. 10A, the winning / failing random number in the special symbol lottery this time is a random number corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) and is random. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the winning / failing lottery will be described.

First, it is determined whether or not the result of the first winning / failing lottery belongs to the big hit random number range (“0” to “327”). Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number range "328" of the jackpot to be determined is performed from the random number value "1500" of the hit / fail random number this time. At this time, since the subtraction result is "1172" and does not become a negative value, it is determined that the winning / failing random number this time does not belong to the random number value range of the jackpot.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous jackpot determination is compared with the outlier random number value range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area of the subsequent winning / failing lottery result of the winning / failing lottery table. .. More specifically, the random number value range "65043" that is out of the judgment target is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the winning / failing random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, the information corresponding to the result of "missing" is stored as the winning / losing lottery result.

If a special symbol lottery is performed for the winning / failing random number "1500" this time in a high probability state, the winning / failing lottery table shown in FIG. 10 (B) will be drawn, and the random number value of the first big hit will be drawn. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the range ("0" to "1639"). At this time, since the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the winning / failing random number and the random number value range is a negative value, the winning / failing lottery result is determined to be a “big hit”.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, a method of determining the lottery result is adopted by a method of sequentially comparing the data acquired as the random value and the random value range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning symbol lottery and the variable pattern lottery, which will be described later. The lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the value matches the big hit random value with the acquired random value may be adopted, and the lottery method differs depending on the lottery content. May be adopted.

(Winning pattern lottery)
In the "winning symbol lottery", the control content related to the subsequent operation of the special electric accessory P755 and the lottery table for the variable pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14) are obtained in response to the winning / failing lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above. ) Is a process for determining the stop display symbol of the special symbol as a lottery result required for switching.

FIG. 11 shows the jackpot symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (A)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is “big hit”, and when the winning / failing lottery result is “small hit”. , The small hit symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery (see FIG. 11 (B)), and the losing symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is "missing" (Fig. 11 (Fig. 11 (B)). C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used in the winning symbol lottery has a random number range of "1000" ("0" to "999"), and when expressed in 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is " The data is represented by "0" to "3" and the lower 1 byte is represented by "0" to "255".

Explaining the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning / failing lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (upper byte is "1", lower byte is "144"). In the case of a winning symbol lottery for a symbol, the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. 11 (A) is used, and "5R (5 rounds) probability variation 2" corresponding to the lower bytes "128" to "191" is used. Is obtained as a lottery result, and in the variable display of the special symbol, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device) as the stop display symbol. The stop is displayed on P52).

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, there are cases where "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device and cases where "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol, and each of the five rounds of jackpot games The contents of the round game (opening pattern, opening time, etc. of the big winning opening P751) may be different based on the stop display symbol, and the control contents in the specific game state transitioned after the big hit game may be controlled to be different. It is possible. The allocation of controls in these jackpot games and specific game states is appropriately determined in order to realize gameability according to the specifications (specs) of each pachinko gaming machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is described that the symbols summarized for each type of jackpot are displayed by the lottery shown in FIG. 11 (A). For example, in the previous example, the lottery result " After determining the type of jackpot called "5R Probability Change 2", the type of jackpot is determined so that the stop display symbol that will execute the jackpot of the corresponding type is determined by performing another lottery from multiple patterns. , The stop display symbol may be determined and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two stages.

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in FIG. 11A, in the case of determining the big hit symbol by the winning symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The types of winning symbols that can be determined are configured to be different. More specifically, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there is an increasing possibility that "10R probability variation 5" or "10R probability variation 8" will be determined in the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big hit with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easy to win a big hit that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11 (B) illustrates a small hit symbol lottery table. The small hit symbol lottery table is a table that is referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "small hit", and the lottery method is the time of the above-mentioned big hit symbol lottery table. Is similar to.

In the small hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11 (B), most of them win the "small hit 1" symbol, and when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing lottery is "small hit". "Small hit 2" can be determined in a part of. The small hit symbol may be of one type, or three or more types of symbols may be determinably configured.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small hit symbols like the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game. In order to separate the small hit game that makes it easy to win a V in a specific area and the small hit game that makes it difficult to win a V in a pachinko gaming machine P that uses a small hit V as a game machine specification (spec), for example. The purpose of the game is to differentiate the small hit symbols or to make the small hit symbols different in order to distinguish the types of specific games to be transferred after the big hit game after the V prize is executed.

FIG. 11C illustrates an out-of-design lottery table. The missed symbol lottery table is a table that is referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "missing", and the lottery method is the jackpot symbol lottery described above for the first special symbol. It is the same as the case of the table, and the method is different for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11C shows only the out-of-design lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the out-of-symbol symbol lottery table is the first special symbol. Only in the case, the lottery process is performed, and either "missing 1" or "missing 2" is determined as the stop display symbol as the stop display symbol.

The "missing 2" symbol is a missing symbol that is won with a probability of about 6.4% when the first special symbol is missed, and if "missing 2" is won, it is likely to reach in the variable pattern lottery. It is configured to facilitate the determination of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) with reference to a special lottery table (not shown). Therefore, "out of reach 2" may be referred to as "out of reach symbol".

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, does not have a lottery table for the second special symbol, and the symbol random number of 1 is determined regardless of the random number of the symbol. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and the missing symbol of 1 is stored. In addition, the lottery table that always wins one symbol may be used to win the out-of-order symbol.

(Variable pattern lottery)
The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining the variable display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed by lottery. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is used as the production time required to notify the effect of whether or not the effect display device P80 is a big hit and what kind of big hit is the type of the big hit. The fluctuation display time of is determined by using the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In FIG. 12, a game ball is launched into the left region P501L of the game board mainly in the normal game state (low probability / low base medium) and low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the presupposed pachinko game machine P. Represents the "low base medium fluctuation pattern lottery table" in the recommended state.

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of performing the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the ID is won. A typical example of the mode of effect of fluctuation is shown. The "variable time" is a variable display time value of the special symbol in the result of the target variable pattern lottery (variable pattern ID), and represents the time from the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display.

“Temporary 1 fluctuation” to “Take 4 fluctuation” in FIG. 12 indicate the number of holdings in the situation where the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied, the result of the winning / failing lottery is “missing”, and the target special symbol (here). Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of the “holding N fluctuation”. That is, the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state is configured so that the variation pattern table used differs depending on the number of reservations. If a game ball enters the starting winning opening in a state where there is no hold, it is temporarily stored as a hold for processing, so a change pattern lottery is executed using the change pattern table of "Holding 1 fluctuation". To.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variable pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of holdings, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of holdings. Although not shown, if "out of reach 2 (out of reach symbol)" is determined as a result of the symbol lottery, even in the first special symbol variation pattern lottery, the variation of 1 does not depend on the number of holdings. It is configured to perform a variable pattern lottery using a pattern table (variable pattern table for outlier 2).

“10R probability variation”, “5R probability variation”, “10R normal”, and “5R normal” in FIG. 12 indicate a variation pattern table used for a variation pattern lottery at the time of a big hit in a low base state, and the result of the lottery. Is a "big hit", indicating that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting a variable pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the main player of the game in the low base state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form that does not depend on the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol is also expressed. , There may be a plurality of patterns depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern random number is "30000" and the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation is three (the number of reserved balls is two after the start of fluctuation). The situation in which the result of the winning / failing lottery and the winning symbol lottery are "missing 1" will be described.

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "holding 3 fluctuation" is used. Similar to the lottery process in the winning / losing lottery described above, the lottery process compares (subtracts) the variable pattern random number and the random number value range corresponding to the variable pattern ID of each lottery result, and determines whether or not the random number belongs to the same range. To do. By performing this process, the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number value range at the timing of the normal fluctuation B of ID "2" becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery. After the fluctuation display of 7 seconds is performed as the fluctuation display of the symbol, the misaligned symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state is symmetrical to the fluctuation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. 12, and the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation, which depends on the number of holds for the second special symbol. It is configured to have a table and a table for each jackpot symbol at the time of jackpot. In addition, although it is configured in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and it is determined in the low base state and the high base state. It is possible to configure the variation patterns to have very few overlaps or no overlaps at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the lottery result of the "hold 3 fluctuation" and "hold 4 fluctuation" of the second special symbol at the time of loss is the shortest fluctuation time of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. The 2-second fluctuation (variation pattern ID "12") can be determined.

Further, as a feature point of the fluctuation pattern in the high base state, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern ID "4" for 10 seconds is always determined. The reason why the first special symbol is composed of a fluctuation of 10 seconds is that the player profits when a jackpot is hit at the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11 are large (the expected value of winning balls is high due to many execution rounds). This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot symbols that shift to the probability fluctuation state as a specific game state), and by giving priority to a large number of variation displays corresponding to the second special symbol, a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. The purpose is to make it possible to acquire. Further, even when there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage of the jackpot game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is based on the adoption of the second special symbol priority digestion control. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the specific game state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, avoiding variable display, and the second in the high base state. It is also an object to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the hold of the first special symbol in a low base state with respect to the amount of game balls used to generate the hold of the special symbol.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table in a limited period, and represents a special variation pattern table referred to in a specific period. FIG. 14 comprehensively describes a special fluctuation pattern table for three periods as an example of a special fluctuation pattern table provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

More specifically, in FIG. 14, the period from the first fluctuation to the fourth fluctuation after the big hit (the so-called "holding ream" (reserved inner ream) in which four holdings existing at the time of the big hit become a big hit is called. It is easy to select the reach fluctuation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the "Holding Inner Renso Table" (for IDs "51" and "71") referred to in (Period) and the nth to mth fluctuations after the big hit. It is referred to by the high frequency reach table (for IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the final fluctuation display in the high base state, and the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that the "result fluctuation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") to be used is provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

Such a special fluctuation pattern table referred to in a limited period is referred to as a "special fluctuation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to in a predetermined period after the big hit game (operation of the special electric accessory, in other words, operation of the accessory continuous operation device). are doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to make different references depending on the type of jackpot (big hit symbol), and in a specific period after the operation of the special electric accessory based on the small hit game, the reference period can be set. It can also be configured to be different. What kind of special fluctuation pattern table is referred to in what situation can be appropriately set for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the illustrated one, and the details should be explained separately if necessary. And.

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that controls the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, will be described. The operation control of the effect control board P41 has few restrictions on the type test of the game machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40. Therefore, it will be described below. It is not limited to processing only, and the timing at which processing is performed can be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board-main loop processing]
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the power-on process (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41. Here, the details of the power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started on the effect control board P41 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, the initial setting process related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process appropriately sets the settings necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and details thereof are omitted. However, regarding the effect that was executed in the state where the power was cut off last time, the main control board P40 Since there is a time lag between the completion of the power-on process (FIG. 7) and the power-on process (FIG. 15) of the effect control board, if the effect is restored to the effect before the power failure after the power is restored, the operation of the main control board P40 will occur. Since there is a risk of deviation, in the initial processing when the effect control board P41 recovers from the power failure, the effect information and the like are often initialized so that the effect that was executed before the power failure is not executed (“effect”. Control board reset ", called" sub reset ").

(Main loop of production control board)
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the process shifts to the main loop process after the initial setting process. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the time of the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image on the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is such that the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to about 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is configured to be performed once in a cycle of 16 ms, which is about half of the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop process of the effect control board P41, first, a watchdog timer clear process for detecting a runaway CPU is performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, the input port monitoring process is executed (step 4008). The premise of the pachinko game machine P is such that the input port is monitored even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later. However, the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is a 16 ms cycle monitoring. Therefore, the monitoring of the input of the switch or the like, which is a monitoring target necessary for the system, is limited, and the monitoring of the input of the sensors or the like necessary for the production control of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modified example, the sensors to be monitored in the production may be confirmed by the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

Similar to the input port confirmation process on the main control board, the content to be executed in the input port monitoring process is the process of generating and storing level data from the input data of various sensors and storing the rising (falling) data. Will be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs the effect device control process (step 4010), and executes control related to the effect operation other than the effect display device P80 (image display). Examples of the effect device controlled in this process include a lamp P82 (“board lamp (P550)” and “frame lamp (P350)”), a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), and an effect movable accessory P560. For these effect devices, an effect operation command corresponding to the effect content determined to be executed by a process such as an effect control process (step 4012) described later is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

This is because the output of the effect operation command to the various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , The image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 has received a signal transmitted to the effect control board P41 at regular intervals and a signal for forcibly synchronizing (the above-mentioned input port monitoring process). (Received in) as an opportunity to synchronize with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and output an effect operation command to various effect devices.

Regarding the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 in the effect device, since it is necessary to control the driving means of the effect movable accessory P560 in a shorter cycle, the effect set in this process is used. Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, the sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41 described later.

Next, the effect control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop process of the effect control board P41 will be described. The effect control process includes a flag established based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process described later, and information on the received effect control command itself (lottery result ID of special symbol lottery, etc.). ), Input port monitoring process (step 4008), interrupt process (FIG. 16), and other processes that are determined by drawing or selecting the effect content to be executed by various effect devices. Is.

The effect control process selects the effect decision process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the submodule process for the corresponding effect decision. As an example of the effect content determined here, the process of determining the variation effect corresponding to one change of the special symbol based on the commands (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery. (Processing to determine the content of the notice and reach, the decorative pattern to be stopped, etc.) and the look-ahead effect for the newly generated hold based on the hold number information and the pre-judgment information sent when the hold occurs (" The pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute the "pre-judgment effect" and the content of the effect during the special game are determined based on the information sent as the effect control command when the special game (big hit or small hit) is executed. There is a special game production content determination process to be performed.

Further, the effect control process is not only a process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also a process for determining the error display content when an error is detected on the effect control board P41 (an error transmitted from the main control board). (Including the process of determining the error display content based on the information), adjusting the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the input operation of the effect button P381, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81, by the player, and the lamp P82. It also executes the determination of the effect content such as the adjustment of the amount of light for changing the emission brightness of the and the customization of the effect content and the effect determination tendency.

It should be noted that, as for the process of determining various effect contents performed in the sub-module process called in the effect control process, specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used, so the description is omitted and the subject of the invention is provided. When the processing having a feature is executed in the pachinko gaming machine P, the details will be described in the description of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis process (step 4014) will be described as the final process of the main loop process.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the information corresponding to the effect control command to be used for determining the effect content in the above-mentioned effect control process. And set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing content according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the MODE data and EVENT data which are the effect control commands, and the processing content is determined according to the effect control command. Processing is executed.

As for the effect control command, one command (MODE data and Event data) may be transmitted for each interrupt process (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, uses the effect control. Until the main loop processing cycle (16 ms) of the substrate P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as much as possible (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. The interrupt processing on the effect control board P41 is different from the interrupt processing on the main control board, and has a plurality of interrupt processes started at different execution triggers (see FIGS. 16A and 16B). Priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and when an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher interrupt process is executed even while the interrupt process is being executed. Is controlled by. In this description, the effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16 (A)) and the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) will be described as representatives.

(Effect control timer interrupt processing)
The effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16A) is an interrupt process executed in a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

The port input / output process (step 5002) is performed by inputting a sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 or another sensor (input sensor of the effect operation means P81) from the input port of the effect control board P41. The process of generating and storing level data and rising data from the output port, and the output port are used to drive the effect movable accessory P560 drive means (solar, stepping motor, etc.) according to the operation pattern set in the effect device control process. The process of outputting a signal is executed. When data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update process for each timer is completed, a comparison operation with the comparison value is performed to determine whether or not a switching condition for the effect operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the effect content in the effect control process (step 4012). Performs the process of storing the flag in the storage area.

In the sensor monitoring process (step 5006), sensor detection information related to switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the effect operation switching condition of the effect movable accessory P560 is satisfied, is obtained from the sensor detection data generated by the port input / output process. Is performed, a process of switching the table of the operation pattern is performed, and a process of setting a condition flag for determining the effect content is performed in the effect control process (step 4012).

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process of determining whether or not the effect switching condition is satisfied based on the input of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device and the rise data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous off to the current on) generated in the port input / output process (step 5002) are used for the effect. It is determined whether or not there is an operation on the operation means P81 and the operation mode.

For example, when the rising data is generated as the input information for the effect operation means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. .. If the input is judged only by the rising data, it may be erroneously detected due to electrical noise and the effect operation may be switched. Therefore, after the rising data is generated, the level data (on-data) is input multiple times. It may be determined that the player operation (may be expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") for the effect operation means P81 triggered by the continuation.

Further, when the on-input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operating means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined that the operation is a "long press (long press)" operation. It is configured to be treated as a special operation. Note that the fall data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous on to the current off) may be electrically detected as noise when determining whether or not to perform the "long press (long press)" operation and whether to continue. In this case as well, as with the measures to prevent false positives described above, after the fall data is detected, the input of the "long press (long press)" operation is input based on the detection of multiple level data (off data) inputs. It may be used to judge the end.

Then, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means once at regular intervals (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the process of assuming that there was a "single push (single pull)" input operation on P81, and in this way, with a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation as an opportunity, It is called an "automatic continuous hit" operation that the repeated processing is executed assuming that the "single push" operation has been performed. The "automatic continuous striking" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but can be performed by simultaneously operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 or by operating an on / off operation such as a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button. It is also possible to adopt a method in which it is considered that the "automatic continuous hitting" operation is executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

The input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as an effective operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

The multitasking process (step 5010) is the effect control generated this time according to the value of the task counter (updated between the values "0" and "15") that is updated every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed. This is a process performed by different processing contents to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate in a cycle of 16 ms, and the process at each counter value is executed so as to be substantially synchronized with one cycle of the main loop process. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on a signal transmitted from the image control board P42 (input information is generated by port input / output processing), and an image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operating status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) includes an image control command (“inter-sub command”) so that the CPU of the image control board P42 executes an image display according to the effect content determined in the effect control process P41. This is a process of transmitting (sometimes called) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the effect control board P41 may be composed of the same board, they are described as the image control board P42 in the present specification for convenience.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the effect control board P41 is composed of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying a pattern of display content on the image control board P42. It is configured to send.

The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, is configured to transmit image control commands by the effect control timer interrupt process. However, regarding the transmission and reception of commands between the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42, the command is separately transmitted and received. It is also possible to provide interrupt processing to perform transmission and reception.

(Direction control command reception interrupt)
The effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) outputs a strobe signal in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) during the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and outputs the strobe signal to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process generated when P41 receives the command.

When the effect control board P41 starts the effect control command reception interrupt, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step). 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data is completed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the effect control command (combination of MODE data and EVENT data) of 1 is completed (step 5506). In the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, specific bits of the 1-byte data are composed of "1" and "0".

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, a process of storing the contents of the effect control command received this time is usually performed in the lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if it is indicated that a specific bit part of the lower 1 byte of the storage area of the current temporary buffer data is MODE data before the update, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1 byte storage area. After the data is stored, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of the completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not the specific bit of the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is the data indicating the EVENT data, and it is determined that the data is the EVENT data. In that case, the process proceeds to the next process assuming that the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506YES), and when it is determined that the data is MODE data (step 5506NO), the EVENT data is transmitted from the main control board P40. Until the strobe signal based on the above is received, the effect control command reception interrupt is exited, other processing is performed, and the process waits.

When it is determined in step 5506 that the reception of the effect control command is completed, it is determined whether or not the sent effect control command is normal (step 5508). This process is determined based on, for example, whether or not there is matching data in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in the storage area for storing the received effect control command so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process. In case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic production of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base), and FIG. 18 is a reach effect with a high expectation of being a big hit. It is a figure showing the situation. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during the operation of the electric chew support function in a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). It is a figure.

(Example of production display in normal game state)
《Decorative design》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in a manner that can be clearly confirmed by the player. These three symbols are called "decorative symbols (P801)" (also called "designation"), and are dramatic display objects displayed in response to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation of the special symbols. It is displayed in a variable manner according to the display. Although it is represented only by numbers in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decorative image such as a character image. In addition, when each number is configured to be displayed with a decorative image, the decorative image and the display mode of each number may be different depending on the game state. With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the current gaming state.

In the decorative symbol P801, the variable display as one effect is performed for each variation display of the special symbol (one special symbol lottery) except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative symbol P801 is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (transparently displayed or hidden in some cases) at high speed, and the image of the animation or effect is displayed. A production called "notice" will be used to raise expectations for the acquisition of rights to jackpot games.

The decorative symbol P801 shown in FIG. 17 is scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left symbol (P801a), the right symbol (P801c), and the middle symbol (P801b) are displayed in this order. The stop display symbol determined by the effect control board P41 is stopped and displayed for each symbol row. Generally, when three decorative symbols P801 are stopped and displayed in the same mode (doublet), it is provided to inform that it is a big hit. Further, a state in which one symbol is displayed in a variable manner while another symbol is displayed, for example, the left symbol before the middle symbol P801b, which is the last stopped symbol (also referred to as “final stop symbol”), stops. The state in which the right symbol is displayed with the same symbol (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the variable display mode is not limited to the vertical direction, but is used in the horizontal direction and the depth to the front and back (). The scroll display operation may be performed in the (diagonal) direction, or the rotation operation may be performed on the spot without scrolling and the display may be switched in order.

Further, the decorative symbol P801 has a case where the stop display is performed a plurality of times during the variable display of one special symbol. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display indicating the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same time as the stop display symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The stop display at a timing other than is called "temporary stop (display)". In addition, the stop display at the same time as the stop display of the special symbol may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display (main stop) of the symbol, and the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped to the extent that it is not recognized as fixed. It is configured to move, move in a direction such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "sway fluctuation" in addition to the temporary stop.

After the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped, the variation display may be repeated again. Generally, the re-variation from the state in which the symbols other than the jackpot symbol are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-variation (pseudo-ream)" effect. , The re-variation in which the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped may be changed is called "promotion (variation)" effect. When the promotion effect is executed, it may be configured not to be changed to a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot symbol, or may be configured not to be changed to a lost symbol.

In addition, when the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative symbol that is not displayed during the normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804) ”(special symbol). Each special design has a meaning, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot is executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect is performed, or a specific reach effect (reach mode). Examples include those suggesting that the advance notice effect displayed in the case is executed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) that is temporarily stopped at the end, or one of the left symbol P801a, the middle symbol P801b, and the right symbol P801c are all substituted. A special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol.

《Simple drawing (mini drawing)》
At the upper right of the screen, three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol P801 are displayed. This symbol is also called "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and like the above-mentioned "decorative design", the lottery result of the special design is shown according to the variable display of the special design. It is displayed as a display object.

The simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design" in that the special design showing the result of the special lottery is a special design even when the decorative design P801 is not stopped and displayed. In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, the stop display is always performed once for each special symbol lottery.

Further, the variable display of the simplified design P802 may be configured to form the same reach mode when the above-mentioned decorative symbol P801 is in the reach mode, or the result of the special symbol lottery is notified. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, even if a simple variable display method is adopted, such as a constant display switching is performed until the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the decorative symbol P801. Good.

<< Hold display area >>
A hold display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the hold display area P810, the hold object P811 corresponding to the hold (random value) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the right of the special symbol lottery acquired by the player. In the example of FIG. 17, three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the special symbol lottery is executed (that is, the hold that occurred earlier), the closer to the center of the screen, the closer to the center, and the hold display area P810. The display position of the hold object located on the far right side of is called "Ho 1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, "Ho 2 (display area)", "Ho 3 (display area)", and "Ho 4 (Ho 4) Display area) ".

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the hold display area P810, an object having substantially the same mode as the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 is displayed at a higher position than the hold object P811. This display area continuously displays the hold display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the start of the current special symbol change display from the hold display area, and is referred to as "the change object display area (P812)". .. Further, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is referred to as "the variable object (P813)", but may be referred to as "the pending display" or the like, and is differentiated from the reserved object P811 in the reserved display area P810. Therefore, the acronym "corresponding" is added.

The display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the reserved object P811, and the reserved display accompanying the start of the fluctuation is moved and displayed in the variable object display area P812. At that time, the shape may change or disappear (hide). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same manner as the hold display in the hold change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at a timing during the change display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially center position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of holdings of the first special symbol and the number of holdings of the second special symbol, and are called "simple hold display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. ..

(Look-ahead production)
《Pending change look-ahead》
Further, in FIG. 17, the hold object P811 in the hold 3 display area in the hold display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the hold object P811 in the hold 2 and hold 1 display areas. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, is configured so that the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 3 is more likely to be a big hit than the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 2. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold object P811 and displaying it for a specific hold is called "hold change (look-ahead)".

It should be noted that the mode is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 17, and has a plurality of types of change modes, each of which is configured so that the possibility of a big hit (expectation degree) can be different, and the reserved object P811 is stepwise The display mode of the object may be changed.

Further, not limited to "hold change (look-ahead)", when the random value stored as hold is determined as the execution target of the effect, the variation display corresponding to the hold that is the execution target of the effect is started. A production that suggests that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit on hold, which is the target of the production, is called a "look-ahead effect" (sometimes called a "pre-judgment effect"). I'm out.

Then, when the "look-ahead effect" is executed, the hold determined as the hold for which the effect is executed may be referred to as "look-ahead target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", or the like. , The change display of the special symbol based on the look-ahead target hold is called "look-ahead target change", "trigger change", "criminal change" and the like.

Here, as a "look-ahead effect", some typical ones that can be adopted in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be illustrated.

《Chance look ahead》
In "chance pre-reading", in the variation display of the decorative symbol P801 until the fluctuation of the pre-reading target fluctuation is started, the stop display symbol of the decorative symbol P801 according to a predetermined rule is stopped display (or temporary stop display). It is a production to be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative symbol P801 that is predetermined as a chance eye, (a) when the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of only the symbols having the same number part of the decorative symbol, (b). When the stop symbols of decorative symbols such as "1", "2", "3", "5", "4", and "3" are displayed in a regular stop display mode such as in order (forward order, reverse order). (C) When a special number such as "7" or a symbol different from the number such as "destination" is stopped and displayed as a stop display symbol of the middle symbol.

《Direction movable character look-ahead》
"Pre-reading the effect movable accessory" reads ahead the effect movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). It is an effect of making a lively operation from the start of the fluctuation according to the effect operation pattern, straddling the fluctuation until the fluctuation display of the target fluctuation is started or the pre-reading target fluctuation.

《Zone transition look-ahead》
"Zone shift look-ahead" shifts to a special effect mode (called "zone") in the change display of the special symbol before the look-ahead target change starts, and is special until the change display that becomes the look-ahead target change. It is a look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a different effect mode. For example, "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading->jackpot" or "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading-> stop off symbol and return to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach production)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach production with a high degree of expectation, which is a big hit, is being performed. As described above, the "reach effect" is a situation in which decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than one decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more symbol is displayed. It refers to the production in a state where it is notified that a big hit will occur if the game is stopped in the same mode.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, in many cases, the specifications are such that the three decorative symbols P801 have the same stop display mode via the reach effect to notify the jackpot.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c of the decorative symbol are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the symbols of the changing medium symbol row. The situation is such that the "4" symbol vibrates violently, and if it switches to "5", it will be a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the left symbol and the right symbol “5” of the decorative symbol are displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of the stop display of FIG. 17, and the middle symbol in the variable display is displayed. The decorative symbol P801b in the column is displayed larger than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of stop display and is highlighted. At this time, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c may be referred to as "evacuation symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In the reach effect, in addition to the illustrated example, it is notified whether or not the animation of the notice effect (reach effect) displayed along with the variable display of the decorative pattern will be a big hit depending on the end. In some cases, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c that have already been temporarily stopped are displayed (or hidden) in a smaller size than the retracted symbol P803 to enhance the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to. ing.

Further, a game machine in which the number of decorative symbols P801 displayed is not three is known, and there is also a multi-line reach that forms a reach mode of a plurality of rows at the same time, but a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the reach effect, there is a reach effect called "full rotation reach" in which all three decorative symbols P801 are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization in the same manner. What is the standard of reach production, "a state in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same mode, and a state in which it is notified that a big hit will occur if one more symbol stops in the same mode". Although the situation is different, full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

Further, in FIG. 18, the “effect setting display area (P850)” is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, the volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The effect setting display area P850 includes a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the game machine P, a light amount adjustment function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decorative lamp P82 of the game machine P, and an effect mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and the change status of the effect mode change function for changing the type of the notice effect to be generated and the frequency of occurrence of the notice effect.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, and is temporarily displayed when the player executes the operations related to the various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function) described above. It is displayed, and for example, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 18 by operating the cross key P383 in the left-right direction. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the right button of the cross key P383 is further operated by the player, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value starts from "3". It is supposed to change to "4".

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when adjusting the amount of light, the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the vertical direction, and the effect mode change function is configured according to the operation of the effect button. An example is given in which the production modes are switched in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of the effect during the game, and can be appropriately adopted in addition to the illustrated setting changing method.

Further, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and a period during which the player's effect setting operation is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is invalidated.

(Example of production display during big hit game)
Subsequently, based on FIG. 19, a display mode of the effect in a state where the jackpot game is being executed on the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described.

<< Production display showing the type of jackpot >>
At the lower left of the screen and the upper right of the screen of FIG. 19, the decorative symbol P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. At the lower left of the screen, as in the case of executing the reach effect described above, the decorative symbol P801 (also referred to as "big hit design (P805)") of 1 is displayed in a display mode smaller than the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, and the upper right of the screen. Continues to display the simplified drawing P802 displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is completed.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the type of jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of decorative symbol P801 that triggered the occurrence of the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurs). It suggests the degree of expectation of the game and the game state (normal game state) after the big hit. Therefore, by displaying the decorative symbols (big hit design P805, simple symbol P802) that triggered the execution of the jackpot in this way, the type of jackpot and the number of game balls expected to be acquired can be determined even during the jackpot game. It is possible to suggest.

Further, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"), and an icon. The word "MAX" is written in the center of P821. The icon P821 in the figure is a jackpot suggested by the character string “MAX”, and indicates that the jackpot game of the maximum round of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "big hit icon" or a "ream villa (display) icon", and each time a specific game state and a big hit game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively side by side, so-called "ream villa". It is an effect display that notifies the player how many times and what kind of jackpot has been won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, "○○ bonus!" (Notifies the maximum round jackpot) and "○○ bonus!" In the "big hit start demo production" of the production display executed during the jackpot start demo period. By displaying "△△ chance" (suggesting a big hit that is not the maximum round), an effect of notifying the player of the type of big hit is executed.

In addition, even if it is suggested that the jackpot is a jackpot such as "△△ chance" where the number of rounds to be executed is small, the jackpot execution round is set as "extra bonus! + ○ round" during the jackpot round. In fact, it is also possible to perform a "big hit promotion effect" such as notifying that it is a big hit in the maximum round.

The "big hit promotion effect" is also used when it is suggested that a big hit game that shifts to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified type of big hit is being executed. There are times. For example, from the production of a jackpot game (called "non-probability variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot") that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game, the jackpot game in which the probability fluctuation function operates after the jackpot ("" There is a production display such that the production display is switched to the production of "probability change jackpot" or "specific jackpot").

<< Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game >>
Next, when the jackpot game is executed, the effect display showing the progress of the jackpot game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing the effect display of the big hit, the character string display of "round display (P820)" executed by the character string display of "ROUND_〇" in the upper left of the screen and the character string display of "TOTAL_〇〇pt" in the lower right of the screen. Examples include the "acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in, and the "count display (P825)" displayed by 10 circular image objects in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed in addition to these displays during the big hit game.

《Round display》
The “round display (P820)” is a display indicating the number of rounds of the running round game (unit game) during the jackpot game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which a round game of the sixth round is being executed.

The "round display (p820)" does not necessarily have to be synchronized with the number of execution rounds during the actual jackpot game. For example, in the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications, the small hit game may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the big hit game executed after winning the V may be treated as the second round. Further, in another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with the transition to the easy entry state for a short time, the value of the "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening is not updated. Only when the opening pattern of is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball for a long time, it may be treated as a substantially executed round "substantial round".

《Display the number of acquired balls》
The "number of acquired balls display (P822)" sandwiches the specific game with the "display of the number of acquired balls (P823 * not shown)" that displays the number of game balls accumulated in one big hit game being executed. There is a type such as "cumulative acquired ball number display (824)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in a plurality of big hits. FIG. 19 shows an example in which the “cumulative number of acquired balls display (P824)”, which is a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, is displayed. The "big hit acquired ball number display (P823)" and the "cumulative acquired ball number display (P824)" may be displayed simultaneously in parallel.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls entered into the big prize opening P751 during the big hit game is displayed for the “display of the number of acquired balls (P822)”. However, as the cumulative target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payout based on the winning balls to the general winning opening P731 and the second starting winning opening P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 is cumulatively added. You may.

Further, as another modification, the display period of the "acquired ball number display (P822)" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the execution of the specific game, or the "acquired ball number display (P822)". The period for adding the cumulative number of prize balls paid out may be extended not only during the big hit game but also during the specific game or the small hit game.

In addition, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in addition to the "number of acquired balls displayed (P822)", the accumulated number of prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in special situations such as when the number of payouts is reached, it is possible to execute the "separated number of acquired balls display" effect in addition to the "acquired ball number display" to notify the player (for example, "GET 10000! ! ”).

《Count display》
The "count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the large winning opening P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. It is a display indicating whether or not the ball has entered the large winning opening P751. The former is displayed as a shaded circular object in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object as a two-row object display at a substantially center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the game of the sixth round, 5 balls have already been entered into the large winning opening (displayed as a white circular object), and 5 more balls can be entered (with a shaded circular object). Display) is indicated by the count display P825. The display of the count display P825 is reset to the initial mode each time a new round is started.

During the round game of the big hit game, the number of game balls exceeds the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 in succession to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 depending on the flow condition of the game balls. Winning may occur, and winning more than the number of game balls above such closing conditions is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over prize" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, or a special light emission of the effect lamp P82 or a special sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83. It may be notified by such means. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned number of acquired balls display P822, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning that is "over winning" may be added or excluded.

<< Other production display during big hit game >>
Next, another effect display in which the effect display is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at substantially the center position on the left side of the screen are the above-mentioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decorative design (big hit design P805) at the lower left of the screen is "selected music display (P854)" indicating the title of the music being played during the current big hit game. .. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played by operating the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 during the first and second rounds during the jackpot game. Has specifications. Regarding the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image "can be changed with the (up) (down) keys" is displayed in the vicinity of the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the selection of the effect during the big hit game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round effect and select the effect (effect mode) during the specific game after the big hit game (collectively). (Called "Production Customized Display (P853)"), detailed explanations of them are omitted.

Finally, the "right-handed" and right-hand arrow symbols displayed at the bottom of the simplified drawing P802 at the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "separate notification (P830)" (also called "recommended launch position notification"). Is. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, since it is recommended to launch a game ball into the right area P501R of the game area during the big hit game, "right-handed notification (P832)" ("right-handed") (Display of the character string and the right arrow symbol) is being executed.

The "separate notification" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state is switched (occurrence / end of a big hit or occurrence / end of a specific game state), a display of a larger size is easier for the player to recognize than the separate notification P830 shown in FIG. Is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen or the like to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next gaming state.

In the "separate notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first separate notification image" ("right-handed large display (P831)", " Left-handed large display (P833) "), and the recommended firing position in the game state during the big hit game or the specific game state is displayed for almost the entire period during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "notification image" ("right-handed small display (P832)", "left-handed small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "striking notification (P830)", when a situation in which a game ball is launched at a position other than the recommended launch position is detected, for example, the left area of the game area during a big hit. "Left-handed warning notice" ("Right-handed warning (P835)" that alerts the player that the game ball should be fired in the right area P501R of the game area when the game ball is fired in P501L. ) To display a message such as "Please hit right". In a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, the “right-handed warning notification” (“left-handed warning notification (P936)”) is executed.

(Example of effect display during a specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). Although a wide variety of production displays are shown in the figure, the explanations for those explained in the above explanations are omitted, and the production displays that have not been explained so far and the differences from the above explanations. The effect display having the above will be described.

First, as the effect display that has not been explained so far, the "effect mode display (P840)" and the "remaining game count display (P841)" will be described as the effect display in the specific game state.

《Production mode display》
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display indicating the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is drawn by the state information called the effect mode. .. When the effect mode display is different, the type of advance notice effect visually recognized by the player is generally made so that the impression given to the appearance is significantly different, although there is a common advance notice effect. .. In FIG. 20, the display "RUSH_MODE" is made, and the display indicating that the gaming state in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" (high probability / high base state) is displayed. ing.

The "effect mode display (P840)" may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state) in addition to notifying the effect mode in the specific game state, or one game. When a plurality of effect modes are provided in the state, the display may be temporarily performed each time the condition for switching the effect mode is satisfied, or may be continuously performed until the effect mode ends.

《Display the number of remaining games》
The "remaining game count display (P841)" is a display of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the specific game state (the number of times of the special symbol lottery) and the variation display of the special symbol until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display of "remaining_56" is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" is performed until 56 more special symbol lottery is executed. Notify the person.

Next, in the effect display example of the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, a display different from the effect display example in the other game states described above will be described.

<< Decorative design (specific game state) >>
In the center of the screen of FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed. In the effect display example of the decorative symbol P801 in the specific game state of FIG. 20, the display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed smaller than that of the decorative symbol P801 of the effect display example in the normal game state of FIG. 20.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining number of games display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed at the lower part of the screen. P854 and P824 for displaying the number of acquired balls are performed. In the specific game state, such an additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state) is performed. Therefore, if the decorative symbol P801 is displayed in the same size as the normal game state, the stop display is displayed. At this time, the display of some symbols may overlap with a part of each display, which may cause a problem that the visibility of the stop display symbol is lowered. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, such a problem occurs. The display of the decorative design P801 is made small and simplified so that Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative symbol P801, in addition to reducing the size, it is also possible to adopt a method of not displaying a character image or the like attached to a number indicating the symbol.

<< Hold display area (specific game state) >>
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen of FIG. 20, as the display of the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 of the specific game state, from the front side of the screen toward the depth direction, from "hold 1" to " A display area for the reserved object of "Maintenance 4" is provided. The display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the effect mode state of "RUSH_MODE".

When the variation display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new variation starts in the state, the display of the hold object P811 located at the bottom of FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the hold object P811 lined up in the back moves to the front. The display is controlled so that the display becomes large.

In addition, although not shown, the "result display effect", which is an important effect as an effect displayed during a specific game, will be described.

《Result display production》
In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the "result display effect", the game is mainly performed when the final change of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold generated during the specific game state disappears. It is a production performed at the timing when a person recognizes that the "renso" state has ended, and information on how many jackpot games have been won in the so-called "renso" state and how many game balls in total It is a production that notifies the player whether or not it has been acquired (corresponding to the display of the number of acquired balls).

[First Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technology. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technique will be described with the same reference numerals.

(Explanation of the housing (slot machine 1))
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The appearance of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is shown in FIG. The slot machine 1 is roughly divided into front panel 2 side and cabinet 3 side, respectively, and necessary parts and boards are attached. Each side surface side of the front panel 2 and the cabinet 3 of the slot machine 1 is joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and a lock key is inserted into the locking device provided on the front panel 2 and rotated in a specific direction. The locking device side can be opened.

The components on the front panel 2 side of the slot machine 1 will be described below.

(Front panel 2)
The front panel 2 is composed of a plate member with a design, and has a display window 4, an operation instruction lamp 24, a bet number display lamp 25, a credit number display 26, and a winning number display 27 on the front side (player side). , Operation panel 11, lower panel 5, upper or both side effect lamps, etc. are provided, and a medal selector 34 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "selector"), a display device 32, a sub control board unit 42, etc. Setting display LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as setting value display LED, setting display, setting value display, setting display device, setting value display device) are provided for various substrates and the like.

(Display window 4)
The display window 4 is printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel tape fixed to each reel rim portion of the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c which are rotatably provided in the vertical direction with the front panel 2 closed. The design is configured to be visible from the front side (player side) through the display window 4. Then, when the reel is stopped, 3 consecutive symbols out of 21 (21 in this embodiment, but 20 or 16 may be freely designed according to the specifications). Two symbols are visible. That is, 3 [designs] x 3 [reels] = a total of nine symbols are stopped in the display window 4. Here, of the stop positions where the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c each stop the three symbols, the uppermost stop position is the upper stage, the center stop position is the middle stage, and the lowermost stop position is the lower stage. And.

(Valid line)
The effective line is a symbol combination line that is the target of the winning determination process (described later) when the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are stopped. The effective line in the present embodiment is composed of a symbol combination line (middle stage horizontal line) passing through the middle stage of each reel in the display window 4. When it is determined by the winning determination process that the symbol combination stopped on the valid line corresponds to any of the winning combinations, the processing according to the stopped symbol combination is performed. As an example, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell has stopped, the payout process of the game medal (hereinafter, may be referred to as a medal, the game medium, or the game value) or the credit addition process is executed, and the replay is performed. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped, the automatic betting process is executed.

Depending on the slot machine 1, the effective lines may be set to 5 lines: upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, lower horizontal line, right-up line, and right-down line, or a substantially chevron shape (left reel 8a lower, middle reel 8b) that is not straight. Includes upper row, right reel 8c lower row), horizontal valley type (left reel 8a upper row, middle reel 8b lower row, right reel 8c upper row), approximately L-shaped (left reel 8a upper row, middle reel 8b lower row, right reel 8c lower row) 6 lines or more can be set, the effective lines can be set to change depending on the number of bets, and the slot machine 1 can be freely designed according to the specifications. In addition, a straight line other than the valid line may be referred to as an invalid line.

(Operation instruction lamp 24)
The operation instruction lamp 24 is provided around the display window 4, and when the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are rotating, the player can operate the stop switch 13 (described later). It indicates the order. That is, the left stop switch 13a is turned on when the left operation instruction lamp 24a is lit, the middle stop switch 13b is turned on when the middle operation instruction lamp 24b is lit, and the right stop switch 13c is turned on when the right operation instruction lamp 24c is lit. It indicates that each should be operated.

(Bet number indicator lamp 25)
The bet number (number of bets) display lamp 25 is provided on the operation panel 11 and has a function of displaying the number of bets operated by the player. Further, it is composed of a 1-bet number display lamp 25a (not shown), a 2-bet number display lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3-bet number display lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the one bet number indicator lamp 25a lights up, when two medals are bet in total, the two bet number indicator lamp 25b lights up, and when three medals are bet in total, three bets are made. The number indicator lamp 25c is lit. Further, although not shown, after the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed, when the automatic bet processing is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay is won is turned on. At the same time, the replay lamp is turned on. The lighting timing of the bet number display lamp 25 and the lighting timing of the replay lamp may be the same, or one of them may be lit first.

(Credit number display 26)
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). The segment display 26a (not shown), 7 which mainly displays the upper digit of the credit number. It is composed of a segment and a dot point (DP). It is mainly composed of a segment display 26b (not shown) that displays the lower digit of the number of credits. The number of credits means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine 1. In addition, when a normal game cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

(Acquired number display 27)
The acquired number display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of seven segments and dot points (DP), and is mainly a segment display 27a (not shown) that displays the upper digit of the acquired number. It is composed of a segment display 27b (not shown) that mainly displays the lower digits of the number of acquired sheets, which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). The number of acquired medals means the number of medals paid out to the player (including storage in the credit number display 26) according to the result of the game in the slot machine 1. In addition, when a normal game cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired number display 27 display their respective information on the segment indicators 26a, 26b, 27a, 27c, and depending on whether the DP is lit or not, the information on the number of credits and the information on the number of acquired numbers are It is also possible to display different information. For example, information indicating that the player is staying in an advantageous section (described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output can be notified by turning on the DP of any of the segment indicators. Can be mentioned. Further, it may have a performance of performing push order notification by using the display unit of the upper digit and the display unit of the lower digit of the acquired number display 27. When the push order notification is performed using the acquired number display 27, the acquired number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

(Operation panel 11)
The operation panel 11 is provided at a substantially central portion of the front panel 2. The operation panel 11 is configured substantially horizontally, and includes a start switch 12, a stop switch 13, a medal slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, and a sub cross key, which will be described later. A switch 21, an eject switch 22, and a settlement switch (described later) are provided.

(Start switch 12)
The start switch 12 (also referred to as a start lever) is provided on the operation panel 11. It consists of a lever-shaped operation unit, and the start switch sensor is turned on when not in operation, and the start switch sensor is turned off during operation, so that it is determined that the start switch has been operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes effective when the number of bets reaches a predetermined number, and when the operation is performed, the internal lottery process (described later), the AT lottery process (described later), the reel rotation process (described later), and the like are started. Further, in the present embodiment, since the input signal is low-active, the start switch input signal is turned off when the start switch sensor is turned on during non-operation, and the start switch sensor is turned from ON to OFF during operation. When it becomes, the start switch input signal is configured to be ON. Not limited to this, the start switch input signal may be turned on when the start switch sensor is turned on.

Hereinafter, when the term "start switch is ON" or "start switch is operated" is simply referred to, it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON. Indicates that it has become.

(Stop switch 13)
The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In the case of the present embodiment, the left reel 8a corresponds to the left stop switch 13a, the middle reel 8b corresponds to the middle stop switch 13b, and the right reel 8c corresponds to the right stop switch 13c. Further, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it is suggested that the stop switch 13 is effective by changing the color of the lamp provided in the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamp around the lamp. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red.

(Medal slot 17)
The medal insertion slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion slot, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Although a plurality of types of medal insertion ports 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of a plurality of types of medals, the mounting standards for the various medal insertion ports 17 can be commonly attached to the operation panel 11. Are the same.

Regarding the insertion of the game medium, the game medium is not limited to the one by inserting the above-mentioned medal, and is stored in, for example, a medium for inserting a game ball used for pachinko (so-called parrot) or an electric storage medium such as a magnetic card or a flash memory. The game machine reads the game medium number information, and the game medium number information of the electrical storage medium is set for the number of bets, updated and saved at the timing of paying out the prize, etc., and is changed as necessary for each game machine. obtain.

(Bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19))
The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated when there is a stored medal in the credit, the bet number setting process equivalent to the act of inserting the medal into the medal insertion slot 17 is performed (bet number setting means 158). However, even if the bet switch is operated when there is no stored medal in the credit, it will be invalid (not accepted). Further, it is composed of a MAX bet switch 18 capable of betting the maximum number of sheets set for each slot machine 1 and a 1-bet switch 19 capable of betting one bet, and the 1-bet switch 19 is operated a plurality of times. It is possible to bet the same number of bets as the number of operations within the range of the maximum bet number. Further, if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated while the maximum number of betting media is bet, the state may shift to the state in which one bet is bet, or the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is invalidated (1 bet). Does not move to the bet state). The maximum number of bets in this embodiment is three. The maximum number of bets may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned bet switch, it is conceivable to provide an n-bet switch capable of betting arbitrarily set n (n is a positive integer) in one operation. Further, the MAX bet switch 18 is invalid (not accepted) even if the MAX bet switch is operated when the currently set number of bets is three. Also, when the current number of stored medals for credits and the currently set number of bets are less than 3, and the sum of the current number of stored credit medals and the currently set number of bets is less than 3. Is invalid (not accepted) even if the MAX bet switch is operated, or the number of bets that can be set as the number of bets is set as the number of bets.

(Sub switch 20)
The sub switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11. This switch is mainly operated according to an instruction screen displayed on the display device 32 described later. In addition to the sub switch 20, the sub switch 20 (sub cross key up switch, sub cross key down switch, sub cross key left switch, sub cross key right switch) and production switch (instructed during the game) are used as input means. A switch) that can be operated using is provided. Further, the sub switch 20 can also function as an opportunity to activate the interlocking system with the mobile terminal described later. Although the sub switch 20 is divided into the menu display function and the effect switch for operation during the game, it may be a common switch.

(Payment switch)
The checkout switch is provided on the operation panel 11. By being operated after the game is completed, the process of paying out (settling) the number of bet game media and the number of game media stored in the credit to the player is executed. In addition. In the present embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where the bet is placed and the game medium is stored in the credit, the bet game medium is paid out first and then stored in the credit. The game medium is configured to be paid out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of paying out the game medium stored in the credit may be executed only when the number of bet game media is 0. That is, when the settlement switch is operated in the betting situation, only the bet game medium is paid out, and then when the settlement switch is operated again, the game medium stored in the credit is paid out. You may.

(Lower panel 5)
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel 2. Two transparent resins are combined to form a design sheet sandwiched between the combined resins, and the design sheet is printed to represent the special color of each slot machine 1.

(Medal payment exit 43)
The medal payout outlet 43 is provided below the lower panel 5. This is an exit for discharging medals paid out from the hopper 44 (also referred to as a hopper), which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine 1 (receiver 28). It also serves as a return port for discharging medals excluded from the medal selector 34, which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine 1.

(Sink 28)
The saucer 28 is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a substantially concave structure so that medals released from the medal payout outlet 43 can be received and stored, and is provided so as to project toward the player so that the stored medals can be confirmed by the player.

In addition, the saucer 28 accommodates a cigarette ashtray 29 and a resin sheet to which a union license sticker, a patent certificate sticker, and a model sticker are attached as other functions, and has an opening to be displayed on the player side. A storage unit 30 is also provided.

(Speaker S)
The speaker S is provided above and below the front panel 2. It is connected to the sub-control board unit 42 by a harness (not shown), and the speaker S outputs an error sound or a warning sound informing that an error has occurred, in addition to a sound effect according to the effect.

(Display device 32)
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel 2. It is a device capable of displaying an image, and various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board unit 42, and displays various effect images, a game instruction image instructing the pressing order of the stop switch 13 and the eye pressing position during the game, an error image when an error occurs, and the like. Further, depending on the model, there is also a slot machine 1 in which the display device 32 is not mounted.

(Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories)
Other effect devices such as a dot display and a movable accessory are provided at arbitrary positions on the front panel 2 such as around the display window 4 and the upper and lower panel portions. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board unit 42, and in addition to various effect images and effect operations, a game instruction image and operation that instruct the pressing order and eye pressing position of the stop switch 13 during the game, and an error image when an error occurs. Display and operate. Other production devices such as a dot display and a movable accessory are arbitrarily mounted according to the model of the slot machine 1. Further, various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used as other production devices. In particular, in a game machine provided with a liquid crystal as an auxiliary effect device, the display device 32 may be referred to as a main display device, and the liquid crystal as another effect device may be referred to as a sub display device. In this case, the main display device has a larger display area than the sub display device.

(Medal selector 34)
The medal selector 34 is located inside the game machine on the back surface of the front panel 2 and is provided in the flow passage below the medal insertion slot 17. In addition to the medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player with a sensor provided on the flow passage, guides the inserted nonstandard medals out of the flow passage and eliminates them outside the slot machine 1. A medal exclusion function is generally provided. In addition, an eject function that eliminates medals stuck in the medal selector 34 by operating a switch provided on the front surface of the front panel 2 and a blocking member that electrically drives medals inserted other than when the medals are received. It has a blocker function that removes foreign matter from the flow passage and a foreign matter detection function that physically detects foreign matter that has entered the medal passage 35. If the medals inserted at the time of receiving the medals are normal, they are discharged to the hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors in the medal selector are composed of a passage sensor, a throw-in sensor 1, a throw-in sensor 2, and a shoot sensor. The passage sensor is a sensor that first detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. The throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and the blocker, and are used to determine the passing time of the medal passing through the throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 to determine normal passage or abnormal passage. It is provided. The closing sensor 2 is located downstream of the closing sensor 1. The shoot sensor is located downstream of the insertion sensor 2 and is provided to count the number of insertion medals and ejection medals. May be provided only either for passage sensor and chute sensor is functioning duplicate.

The components on the cabinet 3 side in the slot machine 1 will be described below.

(Cabinet 3)
The cabinet 3 is formed in a square box shape having an opening on one side, and has a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, and a reset / setting switch 38 (hereinafter, simply "reset switch"). , Or may be referred to as a "setting switch"), a power supply device 39, a main control board unit 41, an external output terminal board 47, and the like are provided.

(Main control board unit 41)
The main control board unit 41 is composed of a main control board case base, a main control board case cover, and a main control board 100. The main control board 100 is housed in the main control board case body and the main control board case cover, and cannot be easily opened and closed by caulking (sealed). The main control board unit 41 is fixed to the main control board case bracket in the cabinet 3.

The main control board 100 is arranged with a main IC for controlling the functions of a main CPU, a main ROM, and a main RAM (hereinafter, also referred to as a main RWM). Based on the control of the main IC, general games (combination lottery processing, reel control processing, payout processing, etc.) described later are realized.

(Reel unit 6)
The reel unit 6 is mainly composed of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to the reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet 3 and fixed by a locking member (described later).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) have reel tapes on which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer circumference, and each reel has a different symbol arrangement. When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the rotation is started and acceleration is performed to a speed of about 80 rotations / minute (acceleration processing). Then, after reaching a constant speed, after maintaining a constant speed rotation state in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interruption (constant speed rotation), each operation of each reel is performed according to the operation of the stop switch 13 by the player. The reel is moved at a constant speed to the stop position determined by the reception position, and after moving to the stop symbol position, the brake is applied (4-phase excitation is applied) to stop the rotation of the reel.

Further, an index is provided on each reel, and an index sensor provided on the spoke portion of each reel detects the index to determine which symbol is passing during rotation. The number of steps of the stepping motor, which is the drive source of the reel in the present embodiment, is 336 steps, and the rotation failure detection counter is incremented every two interrupt processes during constant speed rotation to counter the rotation failure detection counter. When is 180, it is determined that the rotation is poor. The rotation defect detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the rotation defect detection counter becomes 0 before reaching 180.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided inside each reel, and it is lit to emphasize the symbol that stopped after the reel stopped, or to improve the visibility of the symbol while the reel is rotating. are doing.

(Hopper 44)
The hopper 44 is mounted in engagement with a rail structure provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet 3, and can be slid back and forth along the rail structure. The hopper 44 has a storage tank unit that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 to the inside of the game machine, and one medal stored by driving the hopper motor by the hopper motor driving means 156 and rotating the turntable. It is composed of a medal payout unit 45 provided with a medal alignment mechanism for aligning medals for discharging to the saucer 28 and a discharge mechanism for discharging medals to the saucer 28 through the medal payout outlet 43.

(Auxiliary tank 46)
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be capable of storing medals, and the medals stored in the storage tank portion are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 through a downwardly inclined rail portion provided in the storage tank portion. .. The auxiliary tank 46 has a square box structure, and when installed in the cabinet 3, the auxiliary tank has two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet 3 through through holes provided on at least one side surface. It is provided so as to be exposed inside the 46, and when a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are stored, the two full detection electrodes are energized via the medals, and the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. Judge that. The number of full detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of full detection electrodes may be changed, such as providing three. Further, the method of full detection is not limited to the method of using the full detection electrode, and a sensor provided at a predetermined position may be configured to enable full detection by detecting a medal.

(Setting key switch 37)
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit provided inside the slot machine 1 and having an opening / closing door on the front surface. After opening the front panel 2, access is possible by opening the opening / closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on while medals can be accepted, the current set value can be confirmed, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is on in the power-on process when the power is turned on, the setting change process (described later) is performed. Execute.

(Power supply device 39)
The power supply device 39 is provided at the lower left side of the front view of the cabinet 3. It is configured in a square box shape, a power switch 40 is provided on the outside, and a power supply board for generating a voltage is provided inside. It is individually connected to the rotating cylinder device board and the sub control board unit 42 via a harness (not shown), and is further connected from the rotating body device board to the main control board unit 41 via a harness to supply power. ing.

When the switch is turned on, the power supply device 39 takes in electric power from the outside of the slot machine 1 and then generates a predetermined voltage for each of the main control board unit 41 and the sub control board unit 42. It is configured to take in power, and when the switch is turned off, it is configured not to take in power from the outside of the slot machine 1.

(External output terminal board 47)
The external output terminal board 47 is generally mounted inside the cabinet 3 of the slot machine 1, and converts the game result signal output from the main control board unit 41 into a predetermined format signal for the slot machine 1. Send to the outside of. The contents of the result of the game include the number of inputs, the number of payouts, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), the door opening signal, and the like. Other conditions for transmitting signals to the outside are controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the AT state is reached, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, or when the value of the counter related to the game reaches a predetermined value. Can be set based on predetermined information.

(Functional block diagram)
The electrical schematic configuration of the slot machine will be described with reference to the functional block diagram shown in FIG. 25 of the present embodiment.

<Main control board>
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control board 100 (also referred to as a main control board), a sub control board 1000 (also referred to as a sub control board), and a door relay board (also referred to as a central display board) that control the flow of a general game. Data communication is possible by being electrically connected to the rotating cylinder device board, the reset / setting switch 38, the setting key switch, and the like. However, the main control board and the sub control board cannot perform bidirectional communication, and data communication is possible by one-way communication from the main control board to the sub control board. The main control chip is mounted on the main control board. In the main control chip, a main control CPU, a main control ROM, a main control RAM, and the like enable data communication with each other by a bus. By controlling the main control chip, data communication such as winning combination lottery (also referred to as internal lottery), reel drive control (also referred to as reel control), payout control, etc. is appropriately performed to various substrates. In addition, for the sub-control board, as a result of the internal lottery, a selection combination (also referred to as an AT combination, an AT target combination, a push order combination, a push combination, and an operation procedure combination including both the push order combination and the push order combination). When the main control means side notifies the information (pushing order, operation timing) related to the selection combination display, the selection combination information (selection group information, selection combination information) can also be notified on the sub control means side. By transmitting the information related to the display), it is possible for the sub-control means side to notify the information related to the display of the alternative combination. In addition, it may be referred to as a process related to (related to) the instruction function including all processes related to AT such as transition to AT, extension of the number of AT games, and push order notification. The push order combination is a condition device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medal given to the player differ depending on the order of the reels to be stopped (push order), and the push order combination is an operation of the stop button. This is a conditional device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medal given to the player differ depending on the timing of accepting.

<Sub-control board>
A sub-control chip is mounted on the sub-control board. On the sub-control chip, a sub-control CPU, a sub-control ROM, a sub-control RAM, and the like enable data communication with each other by a bus. The sub-control board is capable of bidirectional communication with the effect control board, and transmits data specifying the effect to be output to the speaker S, the LED lamp, the sub switch 20, and the like. The information to the display device 32 transmits the data to the image control board. In addition, power is directly supplied to the sub-control board from the power supply board.

<Circulation device board>
The reeling device board is a relay board that performs data communication between a reel motor, a reel sensor, a door switch, a payout sensor, an external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as an external centralized terminal board), and the main control board. The reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the rotating cylinder device substrate when a protruding piece (also referred to as an index) passes through the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether or not the front door has been opened. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether a medal is properly passed when it is paid out from the hopper. The external centralized terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the game machine. Further, power is directly supplied to the rotating cylinder device board from the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board has various sensor information (input sensor 1, input sensor 2, passage sensor, shoot sensor) in the selector, bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information as input information, and outputs information. There are blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board is a selector, bet switch, stop switch, checkout switch, credit number indicator 26, payout number indicator, replay lamp, 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, 3-bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion lamp, It is electrically connected to the advantageous section ramp.

<Production control board>
The effect control board includes a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an effect switch, a speaker S, a back lamp, an LED lamp provided on the front panel 2, an image control board that controls the display contents of the display device 32, and electricity. Connected to.

<Image control board>
The image control board is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, and the like for concretely displaying the effect contents on the display device 32.

<Power supply board>
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment supplies electric power from the power supply board to the rotating cylinder device board and the sub control board based on the operation of the power switch. The electric power supplied to the rotating cylinder device substrate supplies electric power to the main control substrate and the door relay substrate. Then, the supplied electric power is supplied to each component to be electrically connected. The electric power supplied to the sub control board supplies electric power to the effect control board and then supplies electric power to the image control board. The supplied electric power is electrically connected by being supplied to each component.

The control of the main board that controls the game of the game machine will be explained.
(Main memory)
The main CPU 105 has a built-in ROM and a RAM, and the built-in RAM that is cleared by the clearing process will be described. The RAM storage area includes an on / off of the stop selector switch 60, a storage area of a switch status flag indicating the on / off state of the automatic settlement switch 62, and a setting indicating any of the values 1 to 6 to be set. A storage area for value information, a storage area for RT state information indicating which RT state is among a plurality of RT states, a storage area for a specific condition device indicating a winning state of a specific condition device such as a bonus, and other games. A storage area for game information that stores information necessary for progress, an unused storage area that is not used, a storage area for a stack area that stores data saved from registers, and a temporary stack that is set when the power is turned on. There is a storage area for the area.

(Interrupt processing)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a non-maskable interrupt and a masqueradable interrupt are provided as interrupt processing. The non-maskable interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when a signal is input to a specific terminal (NMI terminal) of the main CPU 105, and is executed with priority over the non-maskable interrupt.

When a non-maskable interrupt occurs, the process for turning off the power is executed. Unlike non-maskable interrupts, masqueradable interrupts are processes that are executed periodically (2.235 milliseconds), and when a masqueradable interrupt occurs, processing such as checking the input of the operation switch and measuring the timer is executed. In the following description, interrupts not specifically explained are masqueradable interrupts.

(RAM initialization process)
The trigger for initializing the RAM is the setting change process by the setting change means 112, the power off / return process, and the start of each game, and the initialization range of the RAM storage area to be initialized differs depending on each case. ..

During the setting change process, if the power cannot be turned off and on normally, or if the state cannot be restored, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area excluding the storage area of the switch status flag. That is, the only thing that inherits the state before the setting change is the switch state flag, for example, the RT state and the condition device flag are cleared and are not inherited.

In addition, the storage area of the switch status flag is either when the power is turned off and restored normally during the setting change process, or when it is not in the unrecoverable state, that is, when the setting change process is performed normally. , Data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the storage area of the set value information, the storage area of the RT state information, and the storage area of the specific condition device. That is, the RT state, the set value data, and the condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the set value after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. Since the set value data inherits the information before the setting change and a new setting value is set in the subsequent setting change process, it is used in the sub control board 1000 to determine whether the setting has been changed.

Furthermore, during the power off / return process, data is stored in the unused storage area of the RAM area at the start of each game, and in the storage area of the stack area excluding the maximum used area at the time of power off / return and RAM initialization during the power off / return process. Set to 0.

(Power off / off, power on)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off, such as when the power switch 40 is turned off or the operating voltage for operating the slot machine 1 cannot be maintained due to a power failure or the like, it is stored in the RAM. Data is retained by the backup power supply. Then, when the power is turned on next time, the main control board 100 determines whether or not the data in the retained RAM is normal, and if it is determined to be normal, that is, the process when the power is turned off is normally performed. In that case, it is controlled to return to the state before the power is turned off based on the data stored in the RAM.

If the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the state before the power is turned off is not restored, only a part of the information is retained, and the state is restored as another state (initialization). It should be noted that although some information is retained when the setting is changed, all the information may not be retained.

(Power cutoff interrupt processing)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operating voltage of the slot machine 1 drops due to an event in which the power supply is cut off, and when the operating voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, the power cutoff is detected and the power supply cutoff is detected. When is detected, power off interrupt processing is executed. When the voltage monitoring circuit 110 detects a power failure, a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU 105, a non-maskable interrupt is generated, and the power disconnect interrupt process is executed by the non-maskable interrupt.

In the power-off interrupt process, the output port is cleared, the interrupt is stopped, and the data is stored in the register as a process for maintaining the state at the time of processing execution and returning to the state before the power-off when the power is turned on again. Saves the existing data, saves the interrupt state and stack pointer, calculates and saves RAM checksum data, disables RAM write, waits for reset, and so on. It should be noted that, without using non-maskable interrupts, it is determined whether a power cutoff signal from the voltage monitoring circuit 110 is input each time interrupt processing is executed periodically, and the signal is detected by continuous interrupt processing. If the signal is detected twice in one interrupt process, it may be determined that the power supply is cut off and the power supply cutoff process (power supply cutoff interrupt process) may be executed.

(Recoverable error handling)
The recoverable error is an error related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), an error related to the hopper (hopper error, hopper empty error), a door opening error, a harness disconnection error, etc. If you accept the operation of the reset switch after removing it, you can return to the game without turning on the power again. During the recoverable error, information on the error occurring in the display device 32, the payout number display, and various lamps is displayed in order to notify the player in which the error has occurred. By stopping the progress of the game even during the returnable error, it is possible to suppress the damage to the manager of the game field even if an illegal operation is performed. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error may be other than accepting the operation of the reset switch after removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered without turning on the power again is called a recoverable error.

(Unrecoverable error handling)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the progress of the game is restricted by clearing the output of the output port, and the credit number display 26 displays a display according to the type of error. Notifies that the state cannot be restored.

Also, when a recoverable error is set, the error is cleared when the reset switch (not shown) is accepted, but once the resettable error is set, the reset switch operation is accepted and the power supply is restarted. The irreversible error is not cleared just by throwing it in. In this case, the non-recoverable error is cleared by performing the setting change process. When the power is turned on again at the time of an unrecoverable error, it is controlled not to execute the subsequent game processing by repeatedly executing the unrecoverable error display after executing a part of the power-on processing.

As non-recoverable errors, if the number of bets is out of the specified number at the time of winning combination lottery, if the value is not within the normal range in the set value error check, it is determined that the power-off process is not performed normally at the time of power-off recovery. In this case, when it is determined that the random number is abnormal such that the frequency abnormality of the crystal oscillator 114 is shown, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the effective line may be stopped in the winning determination processing.

(Game method, game flow)
In order to play a game on the slot machine 1, it is predetermined that medals are first inserted from the medal insertion slot 17 or the medals stored in advance are bet (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Set the number of medals bet. In this embodiment, three sheets are set as the specified number of sheets. By setting the number of medals bet, the effective line is effectively set and the game becomes possible.

If a medal is inserted from a new medal slot when the number of medals bet is set to the upper limit, the game medal (game value) stored in the credit increases. The maximum number of cards that can be stored in credits is 50. If a medal that exceeds the upper limit of the number of bets (3) and the upper limit of the stored amount (50) is inserted from the medal slot (54th), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (the medal is inserted into the game machine). It is designed to be returned to the saucer. That is, the blocker is turned off when the number of bets is the upper limit and the number of credits stored is the upper limit.

The situation in which medals are inserted and the number of bets or the amount of medals that can be stored is when the sum of the number of bets (3) and the stored amount (50) is less than 53, and the game is waiting (from the end of the game to the next game). The period until the start). For example, the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed, and the requirement that medals can be inserted even during the game waiting after the automatic bet processing is executed is satisfied.

Next, when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, the winning combination lottery process is executed, and as a result of the winning combination lottery process, one winning combination lottery result (also referred to as a conditional device number) is determined, and then the reel starts rotating. The reel rotates in the display window 4 from top to bottom, accelerates until the rotation speed of the reel reaches a predetermined speed (about 80 rotations / minute), and then rotates while maintaining the speed (constant speed rotation). ).

Next, when the operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the winning combination lottery result and the timing at which the stop operation is accepted are received. The reel corresponding to the stopped switch 13 operated by the operation is stopped. When all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not each stopped symbol determined at the time of accepting the stop of each reel is not abnormal, and if it is not abnormal, which symbol combination is the stopped symbol combination is searched, and the search result is used. Depending on the applicable symbol combination, medal payout (including addition to credit), replay setting (automatic bet processing), bonus state setting, bonus state end, RT state setting, RT state end, etc. Perform processing.

(Freeze processing)
Freeze processing (also referred to as freeze effect) that delays the progress of the game by suspending it for a predetermined period includes, for example, acceptance of a game medium and acceptance of a bet switch operation for determining the number of bets on a pre-credited game medium. , Accepting the operation of the start switch 12 for starting the game, or suspending the function related to accepting the reel stop operation. The freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board.

As the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game described above may be paused, or only some functions may be paused.

As a mode for suspending the progress of the game, control processing based on the operation of the player (input detection processing of the game medium by the passing sensor, bet number setting processing based on the operation of the bet switch, operation of the start switch 12). Reel rotation processing or winning combination lottery processing based on the reel stop processing, reel stop processing based on the operation of the reel stop switch) may not be performed.

If an input signal based on the player's operation is emitted during the period in which the progress of the game is suspended due to the freeze effect, the control process based on the input signal is not performed, the input signal is not accepted, or the input signal By performing processing such as delaying the transmission until a predetermined period elapses, the end timing in one game is delayed as compared with the case where the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reel is not rotated for a predetermined period and the reel is rotated after the predetermined period elapses, or the start switch 12 is operated. When the winning combination lottery and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period when is operated, the winning combination lottery and reel rotation are performed after the lapse of a predetermined period, or when the start switch 12 is operated, the winning combination lottery is performed for a predetermined period. However, if the reel is rotated after a predetermined period has elapsed without rotating the reel, or if a predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated and the winning combination lottery is performed, the reel is rotated or stopped during the predetermined period. There are cases where

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, as a result of the freeze effect performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the operation of the stop switch 13, a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel. In the freeze effect performed based on the freeze effect, the control process of the freeze effect is different.

The freeze effect control process performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 includes not performing the stop control process of the rotating reel. As a result, the player cannot stop the spinning reel in the predetermined period, but since the stop control process after the acceptance process of the operation of the stop switch 13 is performed after the predetermined period elapses, the reel is released from the stop acceptance. The timing until the stop can be delayed.

As a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, the control process of the freeze effect performed based on the fact that the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel is the operation of the stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13 to display the specific symbol on the reel. When the stop display is displayed, the stop control of the stop switch 13 that stops next is not performed, and when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel by the last operation of the stop switch 13, the next game is started. It is possible not to perform the bet number setting process based on the operation of the bet switch, the input detection process of the game medium by the passing sensor, or the control process based on the automatic bet process performed when the replay stops on the effective line.

During a predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily stopped, but the game machine operation regardless of the progress of the game can be executed. For example, the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, but the rotation mode of the reel can be arbitrarily set.

As the rotation mode of the reels in a predetermined period, the reels are rotated in the direction opposite to the normal rotation, the reels are rotated by a predetermined number of symbols to stop a specific symbol combination, and a predetermined reel among a plurality of reels is stopped. It is possible to change the rotation speed of the other reels, change the rotation speed of the reels, or change the operation of the reels due to the operation of the player.

The predetermined period for performing the freeze effect can be changed according to predetermined conditions (player's operation, lottery, etc.). Here, the predetermined conditions include a signal detection based on an operation by the player (start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, settlement switch) and a predetermined result by lottery. In addition, changing means shortening or lengthening the suspension period.

As a control process for shortening the suspension period, forcible termination of the suspension period or rewriting to a period shorter than the suspension period can be mentioned. Then, as a control process for lengthening the suspension period, adding another period after the suspension period or rewriting to a period longer than the suspension period can be mentioned. Further, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not have a maximum time, and may be continued until a certain result is obtained based on the operation of the player.

The pause period for performing the freeze effect may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set including the wait period. If the weight period is included, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect ends during the weight period, and if it ends, the mode of setting the freeze effect period after the weight period or the remaining weight period after the freeze effect ends. The mode of restarting can be mentioned. Alternatively, it is possible to omit such a determination process by providing a freeze effect period longer than the weight period in advance.

As a freeze effect, it is possible to perform a pseudo game freeze effect as if a normal game is in progress. In the pseudo game freeze effect, a freeze effect period is set between the start switch 12 acceptance process and the reel rotation start process based on the operation of the start switch 12, and during the freeze effect period, the game starts like a normal game. Reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the switch 12, and reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13. However, the winning combination lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12 and the winning determination process or the payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In the pseudo game freeze effect, the movement of swinging up and down may be performed at the timing when the stop switch 13 is operated, the timing when a specific reel is rotated, or the timing when all the reels are stopped. This makes it possible to suggest whether the game is a normal game or a pseudo game freeze effect.

(Setting changing means 112)
The setting changing means 112 monitors whether or not it is in the setting changing mode, and determines one of the setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6 on the display) in the setting changing mode. As a means, a winning combination lottery table is provided in which the winning probability of the winning combination is different for each set value. After determining any of the set values, the winning probability winning combination lottery table corresponding to the determined set value is continuously set until the set value is changed by the setting changing means 112 next time.

In the setting changing means 112, when the power of the slot machine 1 is not turned on, the setting key used for changing the setting is rotated by the manager of the game hall, and the setting key is set at the rotation position where the setting key switch signal is turned on. When the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on in the held state, the setting key switch signal is turned on when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. In the present embodiment, turning on the setting key switch signal means turning on the rising edge (turning off → on), and if the setting key is turned on before the power is cut off, after the power is turned on, Since the rising on is not detected, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode, but even if the setting key switch signal is turned on at the level and turned on before the power is cut off. If the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, the mode may be changed to the setting change mode.

When the setting changing means 112 determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting changeable flag is on, the setting value of the slot machine 1 can be changed. Invoke change mode.

The setting changeable flag switches on and off according to the game status. For example, when a bonus game or RT game is started, or when the start switch 12 is operated and it becomes impossible to accept medals, the setting changeable flag is turned off and the bonus game or RT game is ended. At that time, or when it becomes possible to accept medals, turn on the setting changeable flag.

In the present embodiment, the setting changeable flag is turned off at the start of the bonus game, but the setting changeable flag may be kept on even at the start of the bonus game, or a specific bonus game is started. The setting changeable flag may be kept on only when the setting is changed.

When the setting change mode is activated, the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off so that the game cannot be started by inserting medals. There are 6 levels of setting values that can be changed in the setting change mode: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Each higher the setting value, the more advantageous it is for the player. Set up a lottery table. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the ratio (proportion rate) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals bet on the entire game becomes the winning combination lottery table, which is advantageous for the player.

After activating the setting change mode, the current setting value is determined. Therefore, if it is determined that the current set value is within the normal range, the set value is set, and if it is determined that the current set value is outside the normal range, a value of "1" is set as the set value.

After activating the setting change mode, the segment display 64 and the LED are turned on to notify that the setting change mode is in effect. Then, the set value display data for displaying the set set value is set and arranged on the credit number display 26 arranged on the front surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and on the back surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1. The setting display LED (not shown) is turned on to display the set value. When the set value data is set to 6 levels from 0 to 5, "1" is displayed for the set value display when the set value data is "0", and "1" is displayed when the set value data is "1". Displays "2", the setting value display when the setting value data is "2" displays "3", and the setting value display when the setting value data is "3" displays "4". When the set value data is "4", the set value display displays "5", and when the set value data is "5", the set value display displays "6".

After activating the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether or not the start switch 12 sensor signal is on, and when it is determined that the start switch 12 is operated and the start switch 12 sensor signal is turned on, the set value. Is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal is turned on without determining that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on, the setting switch rising data is cleared and the current setting value is the maximum setting value ( It is determined whether or not the set value data is "6") or more, and when it is determined that the current set value is equal to or greater than the maximum set value (set value data "6"), the set value data is cleared (set value). When the data is set to "1") and it is determined that the current set value is less than the maximum set value (set values "1" to "5"), the data is incremented to the current set value. As the processing of the setting change mode when the setting value data is set to 6 stages of 0 to 5, it is determined whether or not the current setting value is equal to or more than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"). When it is determined that the current set value is equal to or greater than the maximum set value (set value data "5"), the set value data is cleared (the set value data is set to "0") and the current set value is set to the maximum. When it is determined that the value is less than the value (set value "0" to "4"), it may be incremented to the current set value.

After that, the set value display data for displaying the set set value data is set again and arranged on the credit number display 26 arranged on the front surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and on the back surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1. The setting display LED is turned on to display the current setting value.

When it is determined that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on and the set value is determined, it is continuously determined whether or not the set key switch signal is turned off by rotating the setting key. Then, when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the determined setting value is saved in the main RAM 56, the acquired number display 27 and the setting display LED are turned off, and the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on. Set to exit the setting change mode.

Even if the setting key is rotated and the setting key switch signal is turned off without determining that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on after the setting change mode is activated, the setting is changed without ending the setting change mode. Keep the mode. When it is determined that the start switch 12 signal is on in this state, an unrecoverable error process is performed.

When the setting key is rotated, the setting key switch signal is turned off, and the setting switch is operated in this state without determining that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on after the setting change mode is activated. Performs normal setting value change processing. After that, the setting key is rotated before the start switch 12 signal is turned on, the setting key switch signal is turned on, and when the start switch 12 signal is turned on, the normal setting change mode end processing is performed.

If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on when the door open signal is off, it may be due to a malfunction of the slot machine 1 or fraud by a malicious third party. When determining the value, the game is played by changing the set value from the set value after the change operation to "1" ("0" when the set value data is in 6 stages of 0 to 5) and setting the set value. Set the most disadvantageous role lottery table for the person. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on when the door open signal is off, non-recoverable error processing may be performed.

The most disadvantageous combination lottery table is preferably the most disadvantageous combination lottery table among the set values that can be set, but it may be a special setting value that is not normally set. In the combination lottery table with the special set value at that time, the combination lottery table that does not shift to an advantageous state (does not shift to the bonus game state) such as setting the winning probability of the bonus to 0, and the number of payouts are smaller than usual. Examples include a winning combination lottery table set for the number of sheets.

In the present embodiment, in order to activate the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn on the setting key when the power is not supplied, but even if the setting change mode is activated without interrupting the power off. Good. In this case, it is conceivable that the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on, the door open signal is turned on, and the reset / setting switch 38 is turned on. Not limited to this example, the setting key switch may be turned on under the condition that the power is turned on and a predetermined switch that can be operated only when the door is opened is turned on. This is because the slot machine 1 is rarely in the open door state during business hours in the amusement park, and it is unlikely that the setting key switch inside the slot machine 1 will be turned on when the door is closed. By adding an inoperable switch on as a condition, the purpose is to prevent accidental transition to the setting change mode or unauthorized transition during the opening of the amusement park.

(Role lottery means 120)
The winning combination lottery means 120 is a means for performing a winning combination lottery to determine a winning combination or a loss as a lottery result from the winning combination lottery table using random numbers. A winning combination lottery is performed using the random numbers generated by the random number generator 122, and a flag corresponding to the winning combination determined in the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is set.

(Type of role)
The types of roles provided in the slot machine 1 are roughly classified into bonuses, small roles, and replays.

Bonus means an accessory that operates when predetermined. Generally, it operates when the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" or "7, 7, bar" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display window 4. Depending on the operation of the bonus-related accessory, the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number may change, or the conditional device operation probability for the symbol combination related to winning for each specified number may change.

<RB>
RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus and is also called a first-class special character. The RB is generally set on the condition that 8 small wins or 12 game results are obtained, and during the RB, the winning probability of the small win is set higher than that of the normal win lottery table. The winning combination is drawn using the lottery table.

<BB>
BB is an abbreviation for big bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device related to a first-class special accessory. In BB, payout of more than 285 game medals related to small winning combination is set as an end condition, and during BB, the winning probability of small winning combination (described later) is set higher than that of the normal winning combination lottery table. The role lottery is performed using. It is not necessary to provide a BB middle-ranking lottery table during BB. For example, a table in which the RB middle-ranking lottery table described later is continuously operated until the BB end condition is satisfied may be referred to as a BB middle-ranking lottery table.

<CB>
CB is an abbreviation for Challenge Bonus, and is also called a Type 2 Special Character. The CB can be set to a state in which at least all small wins have been won regardless of the result of the lottery. Further, during CB, stop control different from normal stop control is performed with respect to a predetermined reel. For example, it is conceivable to control the left reel 8a so as to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds.

<Control of PB ≠ 1 in CB>
As described above, the CB may be configured so that at least all the small winning combinations are in a winning state, so that the symbol combinations that can be displayed according to the operation procedure cannot be displayed (also referred to as missing). For example, during CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 190 ms to 75 ms, if it stops within 190 ms, a specific symbol is placed on the effective line at any operation timing. Although it could be displayed, there may be a case where a specific symbol cannot be displayed at a specific operation timing when the device is stopped within 75 milliseconds.

<MB>
MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory. The MB is set with the payout of more than 153 medals related to the small winning combination, the winning of the RB, or the winning of the SB described later as the termination condition.

<SB>
SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called an ordinary character. The end condition is set in SB that the result of one game can be obtained. During the SB, the winning probability of the small role is passed through the lottery table for the king role.

The BB in the present embodiment is supposed to perform the winning combination lottery using the BB middle winning combination lottery table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the normal winning combination lottery table and the small winning combination is set to the same probability during the BB. At the same time, the game may be performed using the BB general winning combination lottery table in which the winning probability of the RB is increased and the RB middle winning combination lottery table in which the winning probability of the small winning combination is set higher than that of the normal winning combination lottery table. Even in this case, the BB still sets the payout of more than 285 medals related to the small winning combination as the end condition. In addition, those that control the control of these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means 151.

The small winning combination is a combination in which the symbol combination based on the winning small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and when the winning determination means 140 (described later) determines that the prize is won, the medal is paid out based on the stopped and displayed symbol combination. Is.

The replay is a role in which the symbol combination based on the winning replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and when the winning determination means 140 determines that the winning is won, the next game can be performed without inserting a medal.

If none of the bonus, small win, and replay wins are won in the lottery result of the lottery, the result will be lost and the winning process described later will not be performed. If there is a loss, the symbol combination that does not play any role is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Of the roles that are drawn by lottery, if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the valid line in the winning game for BB, RB, and MB, the winning flag may be carried over to the next game or later. Yes (special role carry-over means 146). While the winning flag is being carried over, the winning combination lottery may be performed using the winning combination lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the winning combination lottery may be performed using the carry-over middle role lottery table according to the winning flag. When the carry-over middle role lottery table is used, if the winning symbol combination based on BB, RB, or MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, it is judged that the transition condition of the combination lottery table is satisfied, and the carry-over middle role The lottery table shifts to the winning combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

(Role lottery table)
In the winning combination lottery table, winning probabilities for a plurality of types of winning combinations are determined, and a plurality of types of winning combination lottery tables are provided according to the gaming state. For example, a BB middle-ranking lottery table used during BB, an MB middle-ranking lottery table used during MB, and the like are applicable.

In the combination lottery table, a single winning combination in which one type of symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, or a duplicate winning combination in which multiple symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on one or multiple effective lines are drawn in the combination lottery. Set according to the result.

For a plurality of symbol combinations set as duplicate winning combinations, one winning combination may be set to be stop-displayable, or some symbol combinations cannot be stopped-displayed, depending on the operation mode. May be set to. Among the duplicate winning combinations, the combination corresponding to some combinations of symbols that cannot be stopped and displayed may be referred to as a control combination.

As for the role of the control combination, even if the same symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line as a result of multiple combination lottery, the stop display is performed according to the type of the control combination set as the duplicate winning combination. It plays a role of being able to control the effective lines to be different.

(Winning flag control means 148)
The winning flag control means 148 turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination when any combination is won in the lottery result of the combination lottery. Then, all the stop switches 13 are operated by the player, and when the winning process related to the winning combination is completed, the flag corresponding to the winning combination is turned off.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but the symbol combination of the winning BB, RB, or MB when all the stop switches 13 are operated is an effective line. If the stop display is not displayed above, carry over with the flag turned on after the next game, set the carry-over middle role lottery table described above, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is stopped and displayed and won. By completing the winning process related to the winning combination, the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

(RT)
In addition, an RT combination lottery table will be provided in the combination lottery table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, which is a game state in which the winning probability of replay in the role lottery is different from that of the normal role lottery table.

As a specific example of using RT, the lost area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a replay to increase the winning probability of the replay, or the replay area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a lost area to replay. You may try to reduce the winning probability of.
Further, although the normal combination lottery table and the replay area are the same, the type of replay to be won may be different within the replay area.
The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of RT combination lottery tables, each of which is configured to shift to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT combination lottery table can be as follows.
1: When a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed 2: When the bonus is won 3: When BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends 4: Specific symbol combination When the specified number of games are exhausted after (RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed 5: When the specified number of games are exhausted after the end of BB, RB, or MB 5: Transition conditions of these RT combination lottery tables Can be set as appropriate according to the playability.

In this embodiment, there are a total of 5 RTs (non-RT and RTs 1-3, bonus operation: see FIG. 42). Non-RT, RT1 and RT2 can stay in the state where the bonus is not carried over (MB flag is off), and RT3 can stay in the state where the bonus is carried over (MB flag is on) and the bonus is activated. The inside is when the MB flag is on, and it is possible to stay when the symbol combination related to MB is displayed. Hereinafter, the states of non-RT, RT1 and RT2 are inside non-internal (also referred to as inside bonus non-internal, 2 types BB non-internal, or MB non-internal), and the state of RT3 is internal (inside bonus, 2 types BB). (Also referred to as inside the inside or inside the MB), the state in which the bonus is operating is described as a bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other cases may be provided. In the present embodiment, a process of changing the bonus or RT state during the period from when the trunk is stopped all times to when the next game is started is described, but the process is not limited to this, and the state is switched during the game. It may be. In other words, there may be a case where the bonus is directly transferred without going through the inside. Further, when the type 1 BB is provided, the above-mentioned internal inside may be referred to as the inside of the bonus, the inside of the BB, or the inside of the type 1 BB. It may also be referred to as internal or non-internal type 1 BB. In addition, the state inside the bonus does not necessarily have to shift the RT, and the RT state in which the bonus is won may be continued. Below, unless otherwise specified, the inside of the bonus will be described as an expression that accompanies RT transition.

Each RT state can be changed by satisfying any of the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 5.
For example, when the pattern symbol 01 (1, FIG. 50 in FIG. 42) is stopped and displayed in the non-RT and RT2 states, it is controlled to shift to RT1, and the replay 05 (2 in FIG. 42, FIG. 42) is controlled in the RT1 and RT2 states. When 46) is stopped and displayed, it is controlled to shift to non-RT, and when replay 06 (3 in FIG. 42, FIG. 46) is stopped and displayed in the RT1 state, it is controlled to shift to RT2, and non-RT. , RT1, RT2 state, when the lottery result is MB and the symbol combination related to MB is not displayed (4 in FIG. 42, FIG. 46), it is controlled to shift to RT3, and the symbol combination related to MB is displayed. When this is done (5 in FIG. 42, FIG. 46), it is controlled to shift to the bonus operating state, and the payout exceeds the predetermined number of payouts (9 in this case) in the bonus operation state (FIG. 4). Control to shift to non-RT in 6) of 42.

Further, not limited to the conditions 1 to 6, it may be controlled to shift to non-RT by turning off the MB flag stored in the main memory, or MB during power off processing or setting change processing. The flag may be turned off or a combination of these may be used.

(Number)
FIG. 44 will be described with respect to the number of lottery placed by the combination lottery means 120.
The conditions under which the number of lottery slots can be changed include the case where the number of bets is different, the set value is changed, and the bonus game is in progress. The difference in the number of bets refers to the time of a 3-card game and the time of a 2-card game, and all the lottery numbers can be changed according to the number of bets. Regarding the set value, the hall manager sets the expected total medal payout value determined by the business policy, and is mainly provided in 6 stages of 1 to 6 (value of the set value display data). .. During the bonus game, the number of lottery slots can be changed by shifting to the bonus game. In addition, about (*) described in RT2 of FIG. 44, since MB and the replay-A condition device are simultaneously elected, it is described as (*) in this embodiment, but MB is also described in RT2. There is no change in the winning probability of. It is stated that the MB and the re-game-A condition device are simultaneously won during RT2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the condition devices (15 to 34) related to winning may be simultaneously won, or alone. You may try to win.

(Change the number of replays)
Regarding the number of lottery placements, the number of lottery placements can be changed only for the number of lottery placements related to replay when the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 5 are satisfied. For example, the replay probabilities of non-RT and RT1 are set to 1 / 7.3, while the replay probabilities of RT2 and RT3 are set to 1 / 1.5. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in medals by playing a game with a high replay probability, and to give interest to the game.

(Reel control means 130)
The reel control means 130 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels that are stopped when the start switch 12 is operated (rotation control means 132), or is operated by the stop switch 13. When this is done, all the rotating reels are controlled to be stopped (stop control means 134). Further, after the lottery result is determined by the winning combination lottery means 120, the stop table corresponding to the symbol control number is selected with reference to the symbol control number corresponding to the lottery result of the game, and the operation timing of the stop switch 13 is set. By determining the stop position of the corresponding reel and driving and controlling the stepping motor 66, each reel is stopped and controlled at the determined stop position. Further, when the start switch 12 of the game is operated before the predetermined time (4.1 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses from immediately before the start of rotation of the reel of the previous game, the reel control means 130 elapses the predetermined time. Later, the reel is rotated by controlling the drive of the stepping motor 66.

(Acceleration processing)
The acceleration process is a process executed from the state where the reel rotation is stopped until the constant speed rotation process is performed. In the constant speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interrupt process, but if the constant speed rotation process is suddenly executed while the reel is stopped, there is a possibility of step-out due to insufficient torque. It gets higher. Therefore, acceleration processing is required to gradually rotate the reel. In the acceleration processing in the present embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved by one step after 50 interrupt processing, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after 30 interrupt processing, and then stepping is performed after 10 interrupt processing. The motor is moved by one step, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after five interrupt processes, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after two interrupt processes, and then the stepping motor is moved after one interrupt process. Move one step. After that, it is connected to a constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interrupt process.

(Constant speed rotation, stop control operation time)
The reel control means 130 performs a constant speed rotation process for maintaining the rotation speed of the reel at a constant speed, and performs a deceleration preparation process (also referred to as slip control) for moving the reel to the stop symbol position when the stop switch 13 is operated. By performing the deceleration control when the reel is moved to the stop symbol position, the reel is stopped at a predetermined stop position. In the present embodiment, the time for the reel to rotate at a constant speed is set to 80 rotations per minute, and the reel is controlled to be stopped within 190 milliseconds from the operation of the stop switch 13. In the present embodiment, it is possible to pull in up to four symbols including the symbols existing in the display window 4 area when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received. For example, if the 3rd replay symbol is displayed on the effective line corresponding to the 1st main reel, the 6th watermelon symbol including the 3rd replay symbol is included when the left stop button is stopped. Can be stopped.

(Slip control, kicking, pulling in)
The slip control is a control for rotating the reel to a stop position predetermined by a symbol control number based on the winning combination and the operation timing when the stop switch 13 does not stop at the operation timing. Slip control includes kicking control and pull-in control. Kicking control is different from the symbol related to the winning combination if there is a symbol on the effective line when the stop switch 13 is accepted to stop, which is not based on the winning combination. It is a control to rotate the reel so that a symbol different from the winning combination does not stop on the effective line because it requires payout. For example, there is a winning combination that is confirmed only by the stop display of the symbol attached to the left reel 8a, and when the winning combination is not won, when the stop reception is performed on the valid line depending on the stop reception position, it is on the valid line. It means to control so that the symbol is not stopped and displayed. The pull-in control is when there is no symbol on the valid line associated with winning based on the winning combination at the time of receiving the stop of the stop switch 13, and when it is possible to stop and display the symbol related to the winning combination on the valid line, the winning combination is won. It refers to the control to rotate the symbol related to the combination to a predetermined stop position. For example, there is a winning combination that is confirmed only by the stop display of the symbol attached to the left reel 8a, and when the winning combination is won, the symbol related to the winning combination exists outside the display window 4 and is valid from the stop reception position. When it is possible to display the stop on the line, control is performed so that the stop is displayed on the effective line. In addition. The rotation speed of the reel during the slip control is the same as that during the constant speed rotation process, and the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interrupt process.

(Design combination that does not require technical intervention)
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means that even if the stop switch 13 is operated at an arbitrary timing while the reel is rotating, the symbol combination of the winning combination is always stopped and displayed on the effective line. It means that it is possible. For example, if there is always a symbol related to the winning combination within the pull-in range, the symbol related to the winning combination can always be stopped and displayed on the effective line even if the stop switch 13 is operated at an arbitrary timing. It can be said that the symbol combination consisting of the symbols related to the winning combination is a symbol combination that does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, the attraction rate that does not require technical intervention is referred to as PB = 1. For example, replays and bells are arranged at intervals of 3 frames for each symbol, so they can always be drawn on the effective line.

PB ≠ 1 means that when the stop switch 13 is operated at an appropriate timing while the reel is rotating, it is possible to always stop and control the symbol combination of the winning combination on the effective line. means. For example, if there is a place in the pull-in range where the symbol related to the winning combination does not exist, the symbol related to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line unless the stop switch 13 is operated at an appropriate timing. It can be said that the attraction rate of the symbols related to the winning combination is PB ≠ 1. That is, if the symbols related to the winning combination are separated from a maximum of 4 symbols including the symbol in the display window 4 after the stop switch 13 is operated, the drawing cannot be performed. For example, if watermelons and cherries are not arranged at intervals of three frames, they cannot be pulled in, so that they cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

(Small role priority control, bonus priority control)
Priority control is to control so that when a plurality of condition device flags are on in the game, the symbol related to the predetermined condition device flag is given priority and stopped and displayed on the effective line. Types include small role priority control and bonus priority control.

The small role priority control is when the condition device flag for the small role that cannot be carried over to the next game and the condition device flag for the bonus that can be carried over to the next game are on by the special role carry-over means 146. When it is possible to draw both the symbol related to the bonus and the symbol related to the small winning combination on the effective line at the stop operation timing, the symbol related to the small winning combination is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Bonus priority control is stopped when the condition device flag for a small role that cannot be carried over to the next game and the condition device flag for a bonus that can be carried over to the next game are on by the special role carry-over means 146. When it is possible to draw both the symbol related to the bonus and the symbol related to the small winning combination on the effective line at the operation timing, the symbol related to the bonus is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effective line. For example, when the conditional device flag related to the small winning combination of PB = 1 and the conditional device flag related to the bonus of PB ≠ 1 are in the ON state, if the stop operation timing is the timing to pull in the symbol related to the bonus, the symbol combination related to the bonus is valid. Control to display a stop on the line.

Priority control is defined as follows as the relationship of stop priority when the condition device flags of replay and small win, replay and bonus, or replay and small win and bonus are turned on at the same time. It is also possible to do.
Replay ＞ Small role ≧ Bonus (small role priority control)
Replay ＞ Bonus ≧ Small role (bonus priority control)
In this embodiment, since the small winning combination priority control is adopted, when the small winning combination (winning-A1 to C6 condition device) is won in the bonus, the symbol combination related to the small winning combination is preferentially displayed. However, if the winning A1-condition device is won inside the bonus, and if the left stop switch 13a is first stopped at the position where the bell or BAR can be pulled in, the symbol combination BAR related to the small winning combination and the bonus will be displayed. By controlling to pull in, even if the game is operated in the correct operation order, it is possible to pull in either the bonus or the winning combination according to the operation timing, so the game can proceed without getting bored. Can be made to. This is because the number of payouts of the symbol combination including the bell and the symbol combination including the BAR is the same, so that the priority of the small winning combination is the same.
Not limited to this, even if the bonus and the small winning combination are won at the same time, the symbol combination related to the small winning combination may be displayed with priority.

(Stop position determination table)
The stop position determination table is provided corresponding to a symbol control number determined by the result of the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery means 120, and the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13 is predetermined. .. The stop position determination table corresponds to the BB winning stop position determination table, the RB winning stop position determination table, the SB stop position determination table, the small winning combination winning stop position determination table, and the replay winning stop position determination table.

The stop position determination table at the time of winning the BB is a condition device related to the BB when the winning combination is won and only the condition device flag related to the BB is on, or when the winning combination is won by the result of the winning combination before the game. When the flag is carried over in the on state, and when the result of the winning combination lottery is not won in the game, the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the symbol related to BB can be stopped on the valid line. , The stop position is predetermined so that the symbol related to BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Then, when the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the symbol related to BB cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, the stop position is determined in advance so as to stop the symbol suggesting that the BB has been won. (BB reach eyes). In addition, if the result of the role lottery is won in the BB before the game and the condition device flag related to the BB is carried over in the ON state, and the result of the role lottery in the game is a small winning combination or a replay winning, the small winning combination Alternatively, the small winning combination or replay is drawn in by the replay priority control, but the stop result suggesting the BB winning can be stopped and displayed by performing the small winning combination or replay pull-in control different from the time when the BB is not won.

The stop position determination table at the time of RB winning is when the RB is won as a result of the winning combination and only the condition device flag related to the RB is on, or when the winning combination is won and the condition device related to the RB is won before the game. When the flag is carried over in the on state, and when the result of the winning combination lottery is not won in the game, the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the symbol related to RB can be stopped on the valid line. , The stop position is determined in advance so that the symbol related to RB is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Then, when the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the symbol related to the RB cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, the stop position is determined in advance so as to stop and display the symbol suggesting that the RB has been won. Has been (RB reach). In addition, if the result of the role lottery is won in the RB before the game and the condition device flag related to the RB is carried over in the ON state, and the result of the role lottery in the game is a small winning combination or a replay winning, the small winning combination Alternatively, the small winning combination or replay is drawn in by the replay priority control, but by performing the small winning combination or replay pulling-in control different from the time when the BB is not won, the stop result suggesting the RB winning can be stopped and displayed.

The stop position determination table at the time of winning a small winning combination is used when a small winning combination is won as a result of a winning combination lottery, and the stop position is determined in advance so that a symbol related to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, when the symbol related to the small winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, stop control (small winning combination spilled eye) is performed to suggest that the small winning combination has been won.

The stop position determination table at the time of winning the replay is used when the replay is won as a result of the winning combination lottery, and the stop position is determined in advance so that the symbol related to the replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

(Operation order detecting means 138)
The operation order detecting means 138 is managed by the main control board 100 and detects which of the plurality of stop switches 13 operated by the player is operated in which operation order, and is operated by the main control board 100. By transmitting the detected operation order of the stop switch 13 to the sub control board 1000, the sub outputs the corresponding image or sound. Specifically, the input port is checked in the interrupt processing of a predetermined cycle, and when the operation of the predetermined stop switch 13 is detected during the check of the input port, the detection result is transmitted to the main control board 100 or the sub control board 1000. The main control board 100 or the sub control board 1000 detects the operation order according to the order in which the detection results related to the operation switches are received. The "operation order" is synonymous with the "push order".

(Operation order control)
The operation order control is predetermined according to the winning combination, and the stop position of the symbol is changed according to the operation order of the stop switch 13, so that the symbol combination for which the stop display is displayed on the set effective line is different. To control. As a pattern of the stop operation order, there are six operation order combinations for the three stop switches 13 (left middle right, left and right middle, middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left). It is also possible to control the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed differently according to the winning combination and the operation order. As will be described later, when duplicate winnings are made, it is possible to change the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the effective line according to the operation order (number priority control, number priority control). It is also possible to make the number of game media paid out different according to the order of stop operations.

(About small role pull-in priority control)
If a small winning combination that pays out medals by winning a prize is elected independently and the symbol related to the small winning combination can be drawn in, control is performed to draw in the symbol related to the small winning combination. If the small winning combination is duplicated, the symbol combinations corresponding to all the winning winning combinations are stopped and displayed on the valid line, and if it is possible, the symbol combinations corresponding to all the winning combinations are displayed. However, when the small winning combination and the bonus winning combination are won in duplicate, priority control is used to prioritize and stop either the small winning combination or the bonus winning combination, and both are on the effective line at the same time. Control so that the stop display is not displayed.
(Winning determination means 140)
The winning determination means 140 is a means for executing a determination process (also referred to as a winning determination process) as to whether or not the symbol combination constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. It is a means for determining whether or not the stop symbol determined when the operation of the stop switch is accepted is abnormal, and it is not determined by the symbol combination actually stopped on the effective line. After it is determined by the winning determination means 140 that there is no abnormality, the winning process is performed based on the symbol combination displayed as stopped. Perform processing based on.

The winning process is a process of giving a privilege to the player based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the valid line. The winning process when the symbol combination based on the small winning combination is stopped and displayed is a process of paying out medals based on the stopped display symbol combination (payout means 142) and a process of shifting the game state based on the stopped display symbol combination. , The winning process when the symbol combination based on the replay is stopped and displayed is the process of giving the right of replay and shifting the game state based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination based on the bonus is stopped and displayed. The winning process at the time of winning is a process of shifting the game state based on the symbol combination displayed as stopped.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the result of the winning determination means 140 is lost, a winning process based on the loss may be performed, and as a result of the winning process, the player may not be given a privilege. Further, as a winning process based on the loss, the game state may be changed according to the operation mode when the loss occurs. For example, when all the stop switches 13 are operated according to a predetermined operation order when a loss occurs, the game shifts to a game state in which the freeze winning probability is different. Further, even in the case of an apparent loss due to a small role being missed, it is possible to perform a winning process such as controlling the transition of the gaming state such as the transition of the RT state without paying out. Further, as a winning process based on the bonus, it may be added to give the right to pay out medals (payout means 142) or replay based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed.

The process of shifting the game state is to set the winning combination lottery table according to the game state to be transferred, to set the reel control according to the game state to be transferred, and to set the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transferred. To do, or a combination of these.

When the winning symbol combination 140 determines the winning symbol combination, the winning symbol combination information (stopped roll information) stopped and displayed on the valid line and the winning combination lottery result information are transmitted to the sub control board 1000. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives these information, it can output the winning symbol combination information and the effect according to the winning combination lottery result information by using the display device 32, the lamp, or the speaker S.

(Payout means 142)
The payout means 142 is a means for paying out a predetermined medal according to the winning small winning combination when the winning small winning combination 140 determines that the small winning combination has won.

The winning determination means 140 determines winning on all valid lines, and as a result of the determination, when a plurality of symbol combinations based on duplicate winning combinations are stopped and displayed on the plurality of valid lines, the plurality of symbol combinations displayed as stopped are displayed. Winning process is performed for each of.

For example, when a small winning combination set as 2 payouts and a small winning combination set as 10 payouts are stopped and displayed on a plurality of valid lines, the small winning combination set as 2 is set as the winning process. The number of payouts based on the above and the number of payouts based on the set small winning combination of 10 are added up to pay out 12 pieces.

Then, an upper limit is set for the number of payouts at one time, and when the symbol combination based on a plurality of small wins is stopped and displayed on the effective line and the upper limit of the number of payouts is exceeded, the upper limit is paid out. ..

For example, when the upper limit of the number of payouts is set to 15 and the small winning combination set to 12 as the payout number and the small winning combination set as 10 as the payout number are stopped and displayed on a plurality of effective lines. As a winning process, when the total value of the small winning combination set to 12 and the small winning combination set to 10 exceeds the upper limit, 15 cards, which is the upper limit, are paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only to small wins, but medals for the number of bets may be paid out as a winning process based on replay, or set in advance as a winning process based on a bonus. You may pay out the number of medals you are playing.

(Program start processing flow)
The program start process executed on the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 makes initial settings related to the operation of the game machine. Specifically, it performs interrupt mode setting, main CPU function setting, and RAM check processing for creating power off / recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether or not the checksums of all the RAMs are normal. If the conditions are met, the power off / return data is determined to be normal, and if the conditions are not satisfied, the power off / return data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the states of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal are checked, and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

When the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, the setting changeable flag indicating the transition to the setting change state is set to on. Next, it is determined whether or not the power off / returning data is normal or can be restored. When the power-off / recovery data is normal or recoverable, it is determined whether or not the setting changeable flag indicating whether or not the setting can be changed is turned on. If the setting changeable flag is on, the process proceeds to the setting change process shown in FIG. Also, if the power off / restore data is abnormal or cannot be restored, the setting change process is similarly performed. Then, after the setting change process, the process shifts to the game progress main of FIG. 29.

When the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on, or when the setting changeable flag is off, it is determined whether or not the power off / returning data created by the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off / recovery data is abnormal, an error notification is sent and the process shifts to the non-recoverable error processing that stops the progress of the game of the slot machine 1. On the other hand, when the power supply cutoff / recovery data is normal, the process proceeds to the power supply cutoff / recovery process of FIG. 28. Then, after the power off / returning process, the process proceeds to the game progress main of FIG. 29. It should be noted that after the power off / return process, the process is not always executed from the beginning of the game progress main because the state before the power off occurs is resumed.

In the non-recoverable error processing, interrupts are prohibited and the output of the output port (output of sub-control command, output of excitation signal to stepping motor 66, etc.) is cleared. Then, the error display (notification) is repeated on the acquired number display 27.

(Explanation of power off processing)
The power supply cutoff process executed on the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the power off processing, the output port is cleared, the occurrence of interrupts that are executed regularly is prohibited, and the interrupt prohibition / permission state when the power is turned off is saved. Next, save the used register and save the stack pointer. When saved, the power off processing flag indicating that the power off processing has been performed is saved on, and the checksum data of all RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, writing to the RAM is prohibited, and a reset is awaited. The address range of the stack pointer to be saved, the presence / absence of the power off processing flag, and whether or not the checksum of all RAM areas is normal are determined by appropriate power interruption processing by the power interruption means 144 during the power on processing. Check to determine if it was broken.

(Explanation of interrupt)
Interrupt processing that occurs periodically on the main control board 100 (for example, every 2.235 milliseconds) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

When interrupt processing is started, the necessary data stored in the register is compared, and when a power off detection signal is received, power off processing is executed to read the input port that determines the input of various sensors and operation switches. Then, various timers (timer for measuring freeze period, timer for measuring weight period, etc.) are measured, and as reel drive control, each reel is accelerating, constant speed, deceleration starting, decelerating, or stopped. Controls and updates the drive state according to the drive state. Next, data to be output for each output port (excitation signal to the stepping motor 66, drive signal of the hopper, etc.) is created and output, and port output processing is performed to check whether various abnormalities have occurred. Examples of various abnormalities include whether or not the current set value is a normal value, and whether or not the operation pattern of the input / payout sensor is normal. Next, an external signal is output that sets (controls on / off) an external signal such as a bonus signal, an ART signal, a security signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal to be output to an external system such as a hall computer (S304).

Next, in the control command transmission process, if there is a set sub-control command, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000 to control the lighting of various LEDs, and sub-control such as the stop switch operation sound and medal insertion sound. The interrupt processing is completed by outputting the notification data to be transmitted to the board, outputting the signal related to the performance test, restoring the register, and saving the interrupt enable flag on.

(Explanation of power off / recovery process)
The power supply cutoff / recovery process executed on the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the power off / recovery process, the stack pointer is restored, and the output data related to the sub control command transmitted to the sub control board 1000 is restored. After that, it is determined whether or not the set value data is within the normal range. As a result of the judgment, if there is an abnormality (outside the specified range), the process shifts to the non-recoverable error processing. On the other hand, if it is normal (within the specified range), the unused RAM area is initialized, an interrupt that is executed periodically is activated, and the input port is read. After that, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared, the used register is restored, the interrupt prohibition / permission state is restored when the power is turned off, and the power-off / restoration processing is completed. When the power off / return process is completed, the state before the power off occurs is restored, and if it does not return (when the setting is changed), the control process of the game progress main is performed from the beginning.

In the above embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing in the power supply cutoff / recovery process, but the interrupt may be activated in the program start process.

(Explanation of the main game progress)
The control process of the game progress main executed on the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number saved before the previous game, and if the saved freeze effect number corresponds to the number to execute the freeze effect, the freeze effect is executed and saved. If the freeze effect number does not correspond to the number on which the freeze effect should be executed, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. When the freeze effect is not executed, the freeze effect number may be configured not to be saved. In that case, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect number is saved, and if it is not saved, the process proceeds to the next process. It may be configured.

Next, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game medal insertion process). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of bets that enable the game to be bet has been bet, and if it is determined that the bet has been made, it is determined whether or not the start lever has been operated, and it is determined that the bet has not been made. Waits for the insertion of the game medal, or if it is stored in the credit, the operation reception of the bet switch (in the case where it is stored in the credit). If the number of bets that enable the game is bet and the start lever is operated (it is determined that the start switch signal is on), the internal lottery process is performed and the start lever is not operated (start switch). If the signal is not determined to be on), wait for the start lever to be operated.

In the internal lottery process, a predetermined arithmetic process is executed using the random number value for the internal lottery obtained by generating the random number for the internal lottery, and the winning combination (condition device number) is determined. After the winning combination is decided, the stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and the stop control is executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after the stop switch operation acceptance after the reel rotation is permitted. Be prepared to be possible.

Next, it is checked whether the minimum game time (corresponding to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has elapsed. When it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed (when it is determined that the value of the minimum game time timer is 0), the minimum game time is newly set and it is not determined that the minimum game time has elapsed (when it is determined that the minimum game time has not passed). If it is not determined that the value of the minimum game time timer is 0), it is checked whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed after decrementing the value of the minimum game time timer. This minimum game time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, and other processes are executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum game time and the process of newly setting the minimum game time. It is configured not to. As a result, since the minimum game time is not extended by other processing, the player's game time can be quickly enabled. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed without making the player wait.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processes may be executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum game time and the process of newly setting the minimum game time. Other processes in this case may be a process of clearing the RWM address, a process of storing other data in the RWM, or another instruction having a short processing time. Since the processing time of these processes is extremely short, the user cannot experience the extension of the minimum game time. After newly setting the minimum game time, the reel rotation start preparation process is executed.

In the reel rotation start preparation process, the data related to the rotation cylinder stop saved in the previous game is initialized, the stop table used in this game is set, the output of the rotation start of all reels is requested, and the reel rotation start is started. Set the indicated sub-control command (reel rotation start command).

After the reel rotation start preparation process is completed, the process related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel effect before the reel rotation) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reel is moved a little or the reel is rotated in the reverse direction, which is mainly performed to suggest the expectation of the winning combination.

When the freeze effect is not executed, or after the freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect is completed, the process of rotating the reel is executed. There are four states of rotation of the reel: an acceleration state, a constant speed state, a stop preparation state, and a stop state. When the reel is rotated, the acceleration state is set. In the accelerated state, the stepping motor is gradually rotated by interrupt processing.

As described above, if the constant speed rotation process is suddenly executed while the reel is stopped, the torque is insufficient and the possibility of step-out is high. Therefore, acceleration processing is required to gradually rotate the reel. In the acceleration processing in the present embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved by one step after 50 interrupt processing, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after 30 interrupt processing, and then stepping is performed after 10 interrupt processing. The motor is moved by one step, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after five interrupt processes, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after two interrupt processes, and then the stepping motor is moved after one interrupt process. Move one step. After that, it is connected to a constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interrupt process.

When the constant speed processing is being executed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented for each interrupt processing to detect the rotation failure. Since the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, it is incremented for each interrupt process. However, when the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is decremented for each interrupt process. , It may be determined that the rotation failure is detected at the timing when it becomes 0. In the constant speed state, the stop switch is allowed to be stopped and the stop switch is waited for operation. When the stop acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, the lamp of the stop switch is lit in blue to notify the player that the stop switch is effective (when the stop acceptance of the stop switch is not permitted, it is lit in red). Regarding the lighting control of the stop switch lamp, it may be the processing of the main control means or the processing of the sub control means. Further, as the lighting control of the lamp of the stop switch, when the push order navigation is executed, the lamp of the stop switch may be blinked so that the player can easily recognize the stop switch to be stopped. ..

Further, a command indicating that the reel has started to rotate is transmitted to the sub control means, and when the sub control means receives the command, a reel rotation time measurement timer for measuring the rotation time of the reel is set and counting is started. .. Then, when the value of the reel rotation time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (time equivalent to 3 minutes), "Please stop the reel" (reel stop warning image) is displayed on the liquid crystal, and the player is notified of the reel. Prompt rotation. The reel rotation time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the operation of the stop switch is accepted), and counts again if there is a reel that is still rotating. In this way, the reel rotation time measurement timer is continuously updated until all the reels are stopped. If the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it is displayed in front of the push order navigation, so that even if the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, the reels are displayed. The visibility of the stop warning image is ensured, and the player can be clearly prompted to operate the stop switch. Also, at this time, the push order navigation becomes difficult to see and there is a risk that it will not be known which reel to stop, so the reel stop warning image is erased (or the reel stop warning image is made smaller by operating the sub switch. Alternatively, the push order navigation may be recognized (or moved).

After enabling the operation reception of the stop switch in the game progress main process, the determination process of the operation reception of the stop switch (reel stop reception check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop switches has been operated, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. The reel corresponding to the stop switch operated at this time shifts from the constant speed state to the stop preparation state, and rotates the reel to the target stop position while maintaining the constant speed rotation. Then, when the target stop position is reached, the state shifts to the stop state, all four-phase excitation is turned on, and the brake is applied. Here, the target stop position is determined by whether or not the currently passing symbol number and the symbol number saved as the stop position match, and if it is determined that they match, the target stop position is determined. Turn on all 4-phase excitation as the position. In addition, the symbol number currently passing is the initial symbol when the initial symbol number is set at the moment when the above-mentioned index sensor detects the index (at the rising edge of the index signal) and is moved by one symbol by interrupt processing from there. Judgment is made by setting the symbol number next to the number. That is, when a rotation failure occurs for a predetermined reel during reel rotation, then a stop operation for the predetermined reel is executed, and the rotation failure is not detected (for example, when the index sensor stops before detecting the index). May be judged that the symbol number currently passing and the symbol number saved as the stop position match, in which case the symbol combination on the reel display window is out of alignment (inconsistent). It may stop. However, even in this case, since the winning judgment is executed using the symbol number saved at the time of receiving the stop instead of the symbol that was actually stopped in the winning judgment processing, the result of the game may differ from the lottery result. It is configured not to.

After executing the reel stop reception check process, it is checked whether all reels are stopped. If all reels are stopped, the process shifts to the winning process, and if all reels are not stopped, the process of waiting for the stop operation acceptance of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is executed. Then, after all the reels have stopped, the display contents of the status display monitor are updated, and the process shifts to the advantageous section clear counter management process. Then, a game end check process for updating the RT state and the like is performed, and a series of flow of the game progress main is completed. Note that the soft random number may be updated during the period from the start of reel rotation to the reception of the stop operation.

(Setting change processing)
The setting change process executed on the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting change mode is activated, it is determined whether the current setting value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, the current setting value is acquired, and if it is outside the normal range, it is set as the setting value. Save "1" and get the set value "1".

After acquiring the set value, the set value display data is saved (S1405). After saving the set value display data, lighting control is performed by referring to the set value display data every 5 interrupts by dynamic lighting control which is an interrupt process.

After that, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 is turned from off to on. When it is determined that the start switch 12 is not turned on from off, it is determined whether or not the setting switch is turned on from off.

Here, when it is determined that the setting switch is not turned on from off, it is determined again whether or not the start switch 12 is turned from off to on, and when it is determined that the setting switch is turned from off to on, it is determined. It is determined whether or not the set value is equal to or greater than the maximum set value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the process of incrementing to the current set value is performed, and if the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the initial value (0) is saved in the current set value and further incremented. Do. After incrementing the set value, the process returns to S1404 and the updated set value is displayed.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 is turned on from off, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting key switch waits until it is determined that the setting key switch is turned on and off. When it is determined that is turned from on to off, the set value is saved.

(Advantageous section clear counter management process)
Among the processes executed mainly in the game progress, the advantageous section clear counter management process related to the management of the advantageous section will be described.

First, the value of the current advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is 0. When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, it is next determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is 1. The advantageous section flag corresponds to the gaming state, and when the advantageous section flag is 1, it is an advantageous section, and when the advantageous section flag is 0, it is a normal section. When it is determined that the advantageous section flag is 1, it indicates that it has been decided to shift from the game to the advantageous section this time, so 1500 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. The 1500 stored in the advantageous section clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of games that can execute the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is executed at most 1500 games, the normal section is set from the next game. This is to prevent immersiveness, and suppresses the situation where the number of medals keeps increasing all day long, so as not to significantly arouse gambling. The timing for setting the advantageous section flag to 1 is executed by the advantageous section transition lottery process between the time when the start switch is received and the time when the reel rotation starts. The advantageous section transition lottery process is a process that passes when the condition device number to be the target of the lottery is selected. If the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the advantageous section flag is set to 1 and the advantageous section transition lottery is not won. If so, the advantageous section flag is set to 0 (normal section). In the present embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is a process executed only in the normal section. It is also conceivable to execute the advantageous section transition lottery during the advantageous section. In this case, if the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the advantageous section flag is set to 1, but if the advantageous section transition lottery is not won, the current flag is maintained (1 if the advantageous section flag is 1, advantageous). If the interval flag is 0, it is maintained at 0). When updating the advantageous section flag from 1 to 0, it is updated by the parameter initialization process when shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section.

When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the advantageous section flag is not 1, the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated because it is in the normal section.

When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 after subtraction. When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is not 0, it means that it is in the advantageous section (other than the final game), so the MY counter is displayed as IN (bet on the game) from the number of OUT (payout of the game). The difference in the number of sheets is added to the MY counter. If the value of the MY counter after addition becomes a negative value, the initial value (0) is saved. Here, the MY counter counts the value that has increased starting from the state in which the number of medals is decreasing most in the advantageous section, and is always 0 while the number of medals is decreasing in the advantageous section. (For example, when the MY counter value is 0 and the game is played with a bet of 3 medals and a loss occurs, the counter value becomes -3, but when the counter value becomes a negative value, the counter value becomes -3. Correct to 0). Also, even if a small win happens to win and the MY counter becomes 10 (10 small wins), the value of the MY counter becomes 0 if the gap between 5 games (3 cards are inserted per game) continues. There is. Then, when the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400 (it does not end when it is exactly 2400), the process of ending the advantageous section is executed even if the advantageous section clear counter is not 0. When the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, all the parameters affecting the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the gaming state related to AT. Then, by updating the advantageous section flag to 0, the process shifts to a normal section that is not an advantageous section, and this process ends. When the value of the MY counter is 2400 or less, this process ends while maintaining the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, when the replay is won during the advantageous section, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the determination process of whether or not the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of replay, OUT-IN is always 0 because the same number as the number of inserted sheets is automatically bet. However, since the value of the MY counter may be updated at a timing different from the original processing due to noise or fraudulent activity, it is determined whether or not the upper limit value of the MY counter has been reached even during replay.

In addition, the end opportunity of the advantageous section can be ended at any timing for each game machine other than the progress of 1500 games or exceeding MY2400. For example, it corresponds to the case where the end lottery when the predetermined combination is won is won, or the case where an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games) is executed. In this way, when the advantageous section is terminated at an arbitrary end trigger, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to 1 before the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed (preferably, the process related to AT executed after all reels are stopped). By setting, when the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed, the value before the subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 1 and the value after the subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0. Can be terminated. That is, by setting the value of the advantageous section clear counter to 1 and then subtracting the counter value by 1, the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0 and the advantageous section can be terminated. As a result, when an arbitrary end condition is achieved, processing can be performed in the same module without using another advantageous section end module.

Further, the advantageous section clear counter subtraction process in the advantageous section clear counter management process is configured to be executed in any number of bets (when a plurality of specified numbers are set as game machines) and in any game state. There is.

(Direction)
The sub-control means 1101 is provided with the effect control means 1110 and the like, and the effect control means 1110 controls the output of the effect via the display device 32 and the like described above. The effect control means 1110 selects and outputs an effect by lottery using software random numbers based on the result of the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 120 performed by the operation of the start switch 12 for each game. In addition, the winning combination may be used as an opportunity to perform a related production across a plurality of games, which is called a continuous production.

The effect control means 1110 selects the effect content based on the result of the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 120. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect contents are provided in advance, and the effect control means 1110 uses a software random number after a lottery of a combination is performed by the combination lottery means 120 at the start of a game or the like. Select the production content by.

In addition, a plurality of types of production contents are provided according to not only the result of the winning combination lottery but also the result of the freeze lottery and the game state (RT state, freeze state) and the like. Specifically, a plurality of types of production contents are provided for each of the bonus winning, the small role winning, the replay winning, the non-winning, and the like.

As for the content of the production, at what timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) and what kind of production is output (how to turn on the lamp, how to turn on the lamp, etc.) as the game progresses. It defines whether to blink or turn off, what kind of sound is output from the speaker S, what kind of image is displayed on the display device 32, and the like).
Then, the effect control means 1110 is controlled by the effect output control means 1002 so as to output the effect from the effect output device at a predetermined timing according to the selected effect content.
Further, in order to make the symbol attached to the reel easy to see, BL substrates 1018a, b, and c that control the illumination of the lamp from the back surface of the symbol are provided.

(Direction by the player's operation)
It is also possible to generate the effect output by the effect control means 1110 in response to an operation by the player. For example, the main control board 100 receives an operation signal such as a start switch 12, a stop switch 13, a medal insertion slot 17, a bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), and a checkout switch. It is conceivable that the effect control means 1110 of the sub control board 1000 generates an effect based on the sub control command transmitted from the control board 100, and the sub switch 20 and the sub cross that input the operation signal to the sub control board 1000. It is also conceivable to directly generate the effect from the sub control board 1000 according to the sub input switch operating means 1008 such as the key switch 21.

(Movable object 72)
The game machine includes a movable object control means 1010 that controls a movable accessory in addition to the effect output by the display device 32, the lamp, and the speaker S. Specifically, a shutter is arranged in front of the display device 32, and the shutter operates to play a role of enlivening the game. Another example is that the lamp or the speaker S is movable.

(AT)
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, also referred to as a notification period, and is a period for facilitating the winning of a winning combination by a player by a combination lottery (hereinafter, notification). Generally, the means for notifying during AT includes the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, the operation timing and the operation order, and are also referred to as an operation procedure or an operation mode (hereinafter, referred to as an operation procedure). The target of the notification is generally a symbol combination that can give a favorable result to the player among a plurality of symbol combinations included in the winning combination. For example, it is possible to win a symbol combination that wins the most medals in a small role, and a symbol combination that is more advantageous than the current role lottery table (high probability of winning a replay) in a replay.

(Mainly manage AT)
In the past, when AT was managed on the sub side, fraudulent activities (illegal access to the harness that electrically connects the main and sub, unauthorized access to electronic components on the sub side, etc.) were rampant, so security on the sub side Although the design was devised by the mechanism to improve the performance, the development cost was inflated. By managing the AT on the main side, the cost can be suppressed and the security can be improved.

(Instruction monitor)
During AT, when notifying information about the operation procedure of the push order combination, the operation procedure information may be notified by using the acquired number display. Specifically, in the case of push order A (correct answer in the left middle right), "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order B (correct answer in the left and right middle), "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of push order C (correct answer in middle left and right), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order D (correct answer in middle right and left), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and push order E (right and left). In the case of (middle correct answer), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order F (right, middle, left correct answer), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With such a configuration, the player can know the order of pressing the correct answer by checking the instruction monitor. Further, since the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, even if the sub control board is tampered with, the pressing order can be accurately notified.

Further, when the instruction monitor is also used as the acquired number display, the above-mentioned numbers (1 to 6) may be displayed in the lower digit and "=" may be displayed as the identifier in the upper digit. In this case, since it is possible to determine whether the acquired number display is displaying the acquired number or the pressing order by the identifier, it is possible to prevent the player's recognition from being hindered.

Further, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a 3-digit 7-segment display may be used. The reason for making it three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of push order A (correct answer in the left middle right), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order B (correct answer in the left and right middle), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of C (correct answer in middle left and right), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order D (correct answer in middle right and left), "312" is displayed in the instruction monitor, and push order E (correct answer in right and left middle). In the case of, "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the push order F (right, middle, left, correct answer), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to intuitively grasp the pressing order of the instruction monitor, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the display of the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is one of the advantageous sections from the time when the push order combination is won by the internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch until the stop switch becomes operable. It is preferable to use the timing of. With such a configuration, since the player can notify the pressing order before operating the stop switch, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the stop operation in the incorrect pressing order.

(Grouping of alternatives)
Due to the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, it is conceivable to classify the information to be transmitted from the main to the sub at the time of winning the selection, so that the operation procedure information is not illegally acquired even during the AT. Specifically, when the elected combination is won during non-AT, group information (also referred to as a production group number) indicating that the selected combination has been won is transmitted, and during AT, operation procedure information is transmitted in addition to the group information. As a result, it is unclear on the sub side which operation procedure is used to display the symbol combination advantageous to the player during non-AT, and the operation procedure information is transmitted during AT. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device and operation on the sub side The operation procedure can be notified by the indicator lamp. As a result, the player can easily recognize the operation procedure combination by checking the liquid crystal display device, and can prevent the operation procedure information from being illegally acquired during non-AT.

(Normal section)
The normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When the push order combination is won in the normal section, a process of transmitting information (effect group number) masking which push order is won is executed to the sub control means. In addition, when the push order combination is won in the normal section, the notification of the push order (both the correct answer push order and the incorrect answer push order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, even if the push order combination is won in both the main control means and the sub control means, the push order is not notified. Therefore, even if the push order combination is won in the normal section, it is not always known whether the answer is correct or incorrect. It has become.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed. The advantageous section is provided in order to suppress excessive medal acquisition by AT. If you win the advantageous section transition lottery that is executed in the normal section, you can shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to AT can be performed, but in order to suppress the excessive medal acquisition mentioned above, the advantageous section is designed to end based on certain conditions and shift to the normal section. ing.
In particular,
1) When 1500 games have been consumed from the next game that has shifted to one advantageous section 2) When 2400 or more medals have been won from the next game that has shifted to one advantageous section 3) When any conditions are met Can be mentioned. As a result, excessive medal acquisition can be suppressed. The arbitrary condition of 3) includes, for example, when one AT ends, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, and the like.

(Advantageous section ramp)
An advantageous section ramp is provided as information indicating that the main side is staying in the advantageous section. As a result, when the player confirms whether or not he / she is staying in the advantageous section, he / she can easily judge by turning on / off the advantageous section lamp. Specifically, when the DP of the credit number indicator 26 is lit, it indicates that the person is staying in the advantageous section, and when the DP of the credit number indicator 26 is not lit, the person is not staying in the advantageous section. It is shown that. The timing of lighting the advantageous section lamp is after all reels are stopped, after all reels are stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal is detected by maintenance, or when the second medal is maintained. This includes after the insertion, after the third medal has been carefully inserted, after the start switch has been accepted, and after the winning combination has been won by an internal lottery. In addition, as a condition to be sure to turn on, when the player is staying in an advantageous section and the operation procedure information of the alternative combination is notified, and the ball output rate (maximum ball output rate) of the notified game exceeds 1. If it increases). In addition, it is configured to turn on the advantageous section lamp even when notifying the RT transition push order to RT with a high replay probability, although the ball output rate does not exceed 1 because the push order small combination is not installed in the specifications. ing. This is to teach the player that the state is advantageous to the player with the advantageous section lamp, and the purpose is to prevent the player from suffering damage due to not knowing the specifications of the game machine.

If the above-mentioned condition for always turning on the advantageous section lamp is not satisfied, the timing for turning on the advantageous section lamp after newly shifting to the advantageous section may be arbitrary.

When the advantageous section lamp is turned on once, it is kept lit until the advantageous section ends, and before the start switch operation of the next game after the advantageous section ends is accepted (after all reels are stopped or). , After accepting the bet switch operation, when detecting the medal inserted in the maintenance that will be the first bet, when detecting the medal inserted in the maintenance that will be the second bet, or when the third bet Turn off the advantageous section lamp when the medal inserted in the care is detected. With this configuration, the advantageous section may be in the advantageous section even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, and the player is expected to execute the process related to the instruction function even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit. Can be given to. As a result, in the past, if it was a normal section, the game was only waiting to shift to an advantageous section, but if it is the game machine of this embodiment, it is possible that an AT transition lottery or the like is performed even in the normal section. Because of its nature, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the game.

Further, when the advantageous section flag is 1, it is not always the advantageous section. This is a normal section (advantageous section flag is 0), and in a game in which the advantageous section flag is 1 by winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section flag is 1, but before the transition to the advantageous section. This is because the game state is a normal section. When executing the process for transmitting the advantageous section or the normal section as the test signal, if the advantageous section flag is referred to, the signal of the advantageous section will be transmitted even though it is the normal section as described above. It sends a signal that is different from the original state. In order to prevent this situation, when transmitting the advantageous section or the normal section as the test signal, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is referred to. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, the process for outputting a test signal indicating that it is a normal section is executed, and the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 (the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 1 to 1500). ), The process for outputting a test signal indicating that the section is advantageous is executed. With this configuration, as the process for outputting the test signal, the state can be accurately specified only by determining whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, so that the pressure on the program capacity is eliminated. Moreover, the program execution speed can be improved. In addition, even when the advantageous section is terminated under an arbitrary end condition, as described above, 1 is entered in the value of the advantageous section clear counter. Therefore, in the process for outputting the test signal, the advantageous section is also used in the game in which the advantageous section ends. Can be output accurately.

(Processing related to instruction function)
The processing related to the instruction function is not only the lottery related to AT such as AT transition lottery, AT addition lottery, update of AT end condition (addition / subtraction of AT game number, addition / subtraction of AT execution notification number), but also management of AT state. It is a concept that includes processing related to. The process related to this instruction function can be executed with a predetermined number of bets for each game state, and when a plurality of bets are set as a specified number in a certain game state, only when any one bet is used. It is configured to perform processing. For example, if two bets and three bets are possible in the inside of the bonus, the process related to the instruction function can be executed only in the game with three bets, and the process related to the instruction function is possible in the game with two bets. Is infeasible. That is, in the game with two bets, the AT lottery is not carried out even if the winning combination of the AT lottery is won, or the number of AT games is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if the SB or CB that ends in one game is dedicated to the two-card bet game, and the game after the SB or CB ends is a two-card bet or a three-card bet, the replay is won by the SB or CB. If the number of sheets automatically bet is two, the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game after the end of SB or CB (the process related to the instruction function can be executed with three bets). ) Therefore, the number of bets that are automatically inserted when the replay is won in SB or CB is set to 3. By doing so, the process related to the instruction function can be executed even in the game after the replay is won in SB or CB, so that the game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. As described above, the processing related to the advantageous section is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

(Status display monitor)
Hall managers can easily check whether medals have been illegally obtained from game machines due to the above-mentioned fraudulent activities, or whether games are being played by modified game machines that have different performance from those that have passed the performance test by the Security Communications Association. A status display monitor is provided on the main control board. The information displayed on the status display monitor is
1) Performance display of advantageous section of the game machine (identifier: 7P. Or 7U.)
2) Continuous character ratio in 6000 games (identifier: 6Y.)
3) Character ratio in 6000 games (identifier: 7Y.)
4) Ratio of continuous characters in the total number of games (identifier: 6A.)
5) Character ratio in total number of games (identifier: 7A.)
Can be mentioned. Seven segments are used as a means for displaying.

Regarding 1), there are two types of display patterns, the first is information indicating the operation of bonuses and other accessories, and the ratio of the number of medals easily won by the player through AT (“7P” type). The second is information on one of the information (referred to as "7U" type) indicating the ratio of the number of games staying in the advantageous section to the total number of games staying in the normal section and the advantageous section. Is displayed.

Regarding 2) to 3), it is information indicating the ratio calculated at an arbitrary timing (also referred to as round slice calculation) of 6000 consecutive games out of the total number of games described above.

Items 5) to 6) are information indicating the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio from the game played by the game machine to the final game.

When the hall manager checks the status ratio monitor, the order in which they are displayed is set so that they can be easily checked. Specifically, the display is switched at predetermined intervals such as 1) identifier ⇒ 1) ratio ⇒ 2) identifier ⇒ 2) ratio ⇒… ⇒ 6) ratio ⇒ 1) identifier ⇒…. Further, depending on the specifications of the monitor to be displayed, the following may be considered, such as 1) ⇒ 2) ⇒ ... 6) ⇒ 1) ⇒ ....

In addition to the above display contents, the ratio of the number of staying games during bonus and the number of staying games during non-bonus is calculated.

<Exception notification of display contents of status display monitor>
To check if the status display monitor is operating normally
1) Predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after turning on the power and starting the setting change process
2) Setting is being changed and setting is being confirmed. 3) In at least one or more of the RAM error errors, the contents different from the above-mentioned display contents may be displayed exceptionally. It is desirable that the display content is a pattern that is not displayed on a normal status display monitor, such as "0-.", "0-0-.", "8888.", And high-speed blinking.

(Interlocking system between slot machine 1 and mobile terminal)
By using the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment and interlocking the mobile terminal owned by the player with the slot machine 1, the sub-control board 1000 can output an effect peculiar to the player, or can be output in the slot machine 1. It is possible to perform an interlocking system between the slot machine 1 and the mobile terminal, such as managing the produced production information on a dedicated server.

The sub-control board 1000 is provided with an effect generation flag that manages the output of predetermined effect information according to the progress of the game by the player, and a game number flag that manages that a specific number of games is satisfied. When various flag information managed in advance by the machine 1 is satisfied by the player, the flag information is retained, and the flag information is output and output so that the player can receive the information at an arbitrary timing on the mobile terminal. By receiving the information from a mobile terminal that can connect to the Internet, it communicates with a dedicated server and manages various flag information on the server.

More specifically, it starts to retain various flag information based on the opportunity described later, and for example, it contradicts the predetermined conditions such as "winning BB", "playing 10000 games", and "winning small winning combination". The sub-control board 1000 holds various generation flags according to the effects and game information generated in the progress of the slot machine 1 such as "appearing a small role suggestion effect", and the sub-button operation by the player triggers the movement. Various flag information held in the slot machine 1 is output to the outside via a QR code (registered trademark of Denso Wave Co., Ltd.) or infrared rays, and the player outputs it to a mobile terminal (mobile phone including smartphone, mobile PC, etc.). When it is received by an electronic device capable of connecting to the Internet, it is automatically connected to a dedicated server, and the information is managed based on the player's personal information registered in advance in the server.

When the player plays a game from the next time onward, by connecting to a dedicated server with a mobile terminal, the player's personal information managed on the server is issued to the mobile terminal as a password, and the player will be issued from the next time onward. By inputting the password issued at the time of starting the game into the slot machine 1, various flag information managed by the server up to now is reflected in the slot machine 1.

The sub-control board 1000 is controlled so as to start holding various flag information when the password is input by the player and to erase the held flags when the various flag information is output. To do.

In addition, when the player inputs the password to the slot machine 1, by inputting the password including specific information, for example, the character's clothes can be changed to any clothes selected by the player, or output during the BB. It is possible to change the sound source to be played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the password input by the player is mentioned as an opportunity for the slot machine 1 to hold various flags, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sub control board 1000 temporarily holds various flags by operating the sub button when the player starts the game, and the player "sees a special effect" depending on the progress of the game. If you want to manage the various flags that have been generated for some reason, you can operate the sub button in the same way as before to read the information such as the QR code output from the slot machine 1 with the mobile terminal to read the sub control board 1000. A specification that erases various flags held in is also conceivable. In this specification, if the player temporarily holds various flags but leaves the game after finishing the game without outputting information from the slot machine 1, the various flags will be set to the next power cut processing or It can be retained until the setting change process is performed, or it can be automatically deleted when the game is not performed for a predetermined time.

Further, as the information output from the slot machine 1, not only the above-mentioned information but also, for example, game history information can be output at the same time, and the history information can be entered by the player by entering a password (or by operating a sub button). "Number of games", "Number of BB / RB", "Number of AT / ART", "Difference in medals" from the time when various flags are temporarily turned on) to the time when various flags are deleted due to external output of information, etc. Not only information such as "number of medals" but also information such as "how many games (from the end of BB) won the BB" and "type, number of times and probability of winning small wins" are variously managed by the slot machine 1. Information can be output.

At that time, if one data is not enough for the QR code output from the slot machine 1, it is possible to divide the QR code into a plurality of data and output the data, and the communication means is not limited to the issuance of infrared rays or the QR code. It is also possible to appropriately adopt general communication technologies that are actually used in various fields such as wired and wireless LAN.

<First Embodiment>
A configuration in which the end condition of the advantageous section is changed according to the gaming state in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won, which is applicable to the first embodiment, will be described below.

First, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement in the first embodiment, and FIGS. 33 to 35 are diagrams showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the winning combination lottery in the first embodiment. There are, FIGS. 36 to 38 are diagrams showing a list of symbol combinations configured by each winning combination, and FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the number of placements for each winning combination. In the first embodiment, detailed description of FIGS. 32 to 39 will be omitted.

The transition condition of the RT state and the winning probability of the replay will be described with reference to FIG. 40. RT0 is a state that is set when the number of game medals paid out exceeds 210 after the main RWM is initialized, such as at the time of shipment from the factory, or during the operation of Type 1 BB, and from RT0 when the Type 1 BB is won. Move to RT1. RT1 is a state that is set when the 1st class BB is won (sometimes referred to as inside the 1st class BB), and is based on the fact that the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is displayed on the effective line. And shift from RT1 to BB in general.

BB general is one of the states during the operation of the 1st class BB, the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is displayed, the transition to the 1st class BB operation, and the 1st class BB operation and the RB non-winning state. It is the state set in the case. Based on winning the RB in the general BB, the transition from the general BB to the inside of the RB (shifts when the symbol combination related to the RB is not stopped and displayed). The inside of the RB is a state set when the type 1 BB is in operation and the RB is in the winning state, and the transition from the inside of the RB to the operation of the RB is performed based on the display of the symbol combination related to the RB. RB operating is a state set when Type 1 BB is operating and RB is operating, and shifts from RB operating to BB general based on 12 games or 8 winnings during RB operating. To do.

As described above, there are three states that can be set during BB operation: BB in general, RB inside, and RB in operation. In addition to the above conditions, if the number of game medals paid out during the operation of Type 1 BB exceeds 210 during the operation of the BB, the process shifts to RT0.

The total of the replay winning probabilities in RT0, RT1, and RB is set to 9188/65536, and the types of replays to be won are also set to be the same. In general BB, the total of the replay winning probabilities during RB operation is set to 0/65536. In other words, the replay does not win.

In the first embodiment, the winning probabilities of replays during RT0, RT1, BB general, RB internal, and RB operation are described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay winning probabilities are designed to be different in each state. May be good. For example, it is conceivable that the sum of the replay winning probabilities is 9188 for RT0, 8978 for RT1, 4, 4 for BB in general, 9187 for RB inside, and 0 for RB operation. You may try to make them different.

Next, the L mode number will be described. The L mode number is a number stored (stored) in a predetermined storage area controlled by the main control board, and the value stored differs depending on the RT state when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, and is stored. The performance during the stay in the advantageous section can be different depending on the value. Specifically, there is no change in the L mode number (maintains 0) when the advantageous section transition lottery is won during the stay at RT0.

When 0 is stored (stored) as the L mode number, the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, and the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 1400 games. That is, when the non-AT period is continuously digested for 1400 games, the AT period can be entered, and then the AT period of up to 100 games can be executed.

When the advantage section transition lottery is won during the RT1 stay, 1 is saved as the L mode number, and when 1 is saved in the L mode number, the maximum number of stay games in the advantage section is set to 1500 games, and non- The maximum number of games during the AT period will be set to 500 games. That is, when the non-AT period is digested for 500 games in a row, the AT period can be entered, and then the AT period of up to 1000 games can be executed.

If you win the advantageous section transition lottery while staying inside the RB, 2 is saved as the L mode number, and if 2 is saved in the L mode number, the maximum number of games staying in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games. , The maximum number of games during the non-AT period will be set to 500 games. When 2 is stored in the L mode number, it is configured to shift to the normal section when the non-AT period is continuously digested for 500 games.

If you win the advantageous section transition lottery during BB general or while staying during RB operation, 3 is saved as the L mode number, and if 3 is saved in the L mode number, the maximum number of games to stay in the advantageous section is set. 1500 games will be set, and the maximum number of games during the non-AT period will be set to 1200 games. That is, when the non-AT period is continuously digested for 1200 games, the AT period can be entered, and then the AT period of up to 300 games can be executed.

As described above, in this example, the substantial ceiling is set when 0, 1, and 3 are stored in the L mode number, in other words, when the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is exhausted, the game shifts to the AT period. On the other hand, if the L mode number 2 is set, the actual ceiling is not set, in other words, when the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is exhausted, the normal section is started.

The stored L mode number is set to 0 at the timing when (1) the advantageous section ends (shifts to the normal section), and then corresponds to the gaming state of staying at the timing when the advantageous section shifts. Set the L mode number, (2) Keep the saved L mode number at the timing when the advantageous section ends (shift to the normal section), and then enter the gaming state where you are staying at the timing when you shift to the advantageous section. It may be configured to set the corresponding L mode number.

Next, the start condition and the end condition of the advantageous section will be described. The start condition of the advantageous section is configured so that the advantageous section transition lottery is performed when a small winning combination with a game medal payout is won during the normal section in RT0, RT1, BB general, or inside the RB. , The advantageous section transition lottery is not performed for the small winning combination that is won during the RB operation. In addition, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is carried out, the transition to the advantageous section is made at 100%, but this is just an example, and the transition may be made with a probability of less than 100%.

When L mode number 0, L mode number 1, and L mode number 3 are set, the end condition of the advantageous section is determined to shift to the non-AT period during the AT period after shifting to the AT period. Then, the advantageous section ends at the timing when the non-AT period shifts. Further, when the L mode number 2 is set, as described above, when the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is exhausted, the game shifts to the normal section (ends the advantageous section). These are just examples, and there is no problem with changing them. For example, when L mode number 2 is set and it is configured so that the game can be shifted to the AT period before the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is exhausted, if the end condition of the AT period is satisfied, the normal section It may be configured to be able to migrate to.

Next, the relationship between the game characteristics and the setting of the L mode number during the non-AT period and the AT period will be described. During the non-AT period, the player plays a game at RT0 or RT1, and when he / she acquires the right to the AT period, he / she displays a type 1 BB symbol combination and plays the game while the BB is operating during the AT period. In particular, since the replay probability is higher inside the RB than during the general BB and during the operation of the RB, it is advantageous for the player to digest the AT period inside the RB. During the AT period, 30 games of AT can be executed per set, and by the end of the AT period of the first set,
(1): Winning the AT continuation lottery (2): 30 The right for the second set of AT period can be obtained by satisfying any of the conditions of ending the BB operation before the game is exhausted.

"(1): Winning the AT continuous lottery" means that the lottery is drawn according to the result of the lottery for each game during 30 games, and there is a 1% probability of winning from winning-A1 to winning-B12. Winning-C1 to Winning-C3 is 5%, Winning-C4 is 30%, Winning-E1 to Winning-E6 is 6%, Winning-F and Winning-G have a 50% chance of winning the AT continuation lottery. To do.

"(2): End the BB operation before the game is exhausted" means that the end condition during the BB operation ends when 210 game medals are paid out. Therefore, during the general BB, inside the RB. If 210 game medals are paid out before 30 games are exhausted while staying in either the middle or RB operation, the AT continuation lottery will be won.

As described above, it is possible to change the performance of the advantageous section according to the game state (set L mode number) won in the advantageous section transition lottery, and the player can appropriately select the game method. It is possible to expand the playability. In the present embodiment, it is optimal for the player to play the game at RT1 during the non-AT period and inside the RB during the AT period. That is, during the non-AT period, when the 1st class BB is won, the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB is not stopped and displayed, and the game is advanced by staying at RT1, and during the AT period, the RB is won. If this is the case, it is preferable to let the symbol combination related to the RB stay inside the RB without stopping and displaying it to proceed with the game.

As mentioned above, the timing at which the right for the AT period can be acquired (the timing at which the AT continuous lottery can be won) is the lottery result according to the role lottery result between 30 games, and whether the BB operation is terminated before the 30 games are exhausted. Although described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made by the AT continuation lottery at the time when 30 games are exhausted.

As mentioned above, the timing of acquiring the right for the AT period has been described. Advantageous section transition If the lottery timing shifts to the advantageous section when RT1 (L mode number is 1), the non-AT period is digested up to 500 games to shift to the AT period, and inside the RB (L mode number 2). When shifting to the advantageous section at this time, the non-AT period is exhausted by a maximum of 500 games and the section shifts to the normal section.

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the AT continuation lottery is not won during the AT period and inside the RB, the transition to the non-AT period and the normal section is performed within the RB. As an example of the action when the lottery for acquiring the right of the AT period executed in each game is not won, 2 is saved as the L mode number when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the normal section inside the RB. Will be done. After that, when the end condition during BB operation is satisfied, the game shifts to RT0, and by winning the 1st class BB and not stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the 1st class BB, the game shifts to RT1 and the L mode number is saved in 2. If 500 games are digested in the situation (500 games are digested by combining RT0 and RT1), the game shifts to the normal section during RT1, and by winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the L mode number 1 is saved, and then the maximum. By digesting 500 games, it shifts to the AT period. That is, as a player, 500 games in a state where 2 is stored as an L mode number, about 1 game until the transition from a normal section to an advantageous section, and a state in which 1 is stored as an L mode number. By digesting the normal state (non-AT period) of about 1000 games with 500 games in the above, it is possible to shift to the AT period and recognize that the so-called ceiling has been reached.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, a total of about 2000 games including about 1000 games in the non-AT period and about 1000 games in the AT period. A series of game progressions can be designed.

Next, an example of a method for storing the L mode number according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 41. The process in the figure is the process executed by the main control board.

First, it is determined whether or not it is in non-RT. If it is non-RT (YES), this process ends without saving the L mode number. That is, the L mode number is maintained at 0. If it is not non-RT (NO), it is determined whether or not it is in RT1. If RT1 is in progress (YES), 1 is saved as the L mode number and the present process is terminated. If it is not in RT1 (NO), it is determined whether or not the RB condition device has been activated by the previous game, in other words, whether or not it is inside the RB. If it is inside the RB (YES), 2 is saved as the L mode number and the present process is terminated. If it is not inside the RB (NO), 3 is saved as the L mode number and the present process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the L mode number to be saved differs depending on the gaming state at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but the state in which the L mode number 1 is saved is saved as the "second advantageous section" and the L mode number 2 is saved. The state in which it is stored is the "first advantageous section", the state in which the L mode number 3 is stored is the "third advantageous section", and the state in which the L mode number 0 is stored is the "fourth advantageous section". Also called.

Regarding the transition to the AT period, it was explained that the non-AT period is shifted to the AT period by digesting the number of games according to the L mode number, but not limited to this, for each set value according to the L mode number. , The transition probability to the AT period may be changed for each combination lottery result. For example, the AT period transition lottery probability when the set value 1 is the L mode number 2 may be lower than the AT period transition lottery probability when the set value 6 is the L mode number 2. AT period transition lottery probability when 0 and L mode number 3 are common, the AT period transition probability may be the lowest in common, or it may be changed for each set value and each combination lottery result, but L It is desirable that the AT period transition lottery probability is lower than that of mode number 1 and L mode number 2.

<Second Embodiment>
The configuration relating to the reel unit (sometimes referred to simply as a reel) applicable to the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

The reel unit of the second embodiment is composed of a reel base and a reel sheet wound around the reel base.

Further, the reel sheet is composed of three regions: a silver-stopping region, which is a non-transmissive region, a white region having a higher transmittance than the silver-stopping region, and a non-stop region having a higher transmittance than the white region.

The upper part of FIG. 42 is a view showing the inside of the lamp house in which the LEDL, LEDC, and LEDR in the reel are housed, and the lower part of FIG. 42 is a view showing a state in which the reel sheet is attached.

FIG. 43 shows a region where the reel sheet is attached to the sheet attachment surface, and shows a reel sheet surface structure having a design region and a background region.

FIG. 43 shows a general reel sheet back surface structure showing a region that is transmitted and a region that is reflected when light is irradiated from each LED. Of the back surface of the reel sheet, the background area corresponds to the silver stop area, and the design area corresponds to the white stop area. The light from each LED is emitted toward the reel sheet, but when the light is applied to the silver stop area, the light is totally reflected and the light is not transmitted from the silver stop area. Further, when the whitening region is irradiated with light, unlike the silver blocking region, total reflection is not performed, and the brightness of the irradiated light becomes small and passes through the whitening region.

Since the background area corresponds to the silver stop area and the pattern area corresponds to the white stop area, the light emitted from each LED can emphasize and brighten only the design area. However, in the case of a general reel sheet, the brightness of the light emitted from each LED may be weakened by passing through the whitening area.

It is also conceivable to arrange LEDs in the space between the reel and the display window so that the reel can be easily seen so that the player can easily see the pattern (picture) attached to the reel sheet. This makes it possible to brighten the entire reel from the outside. The larger the number of LEDs to be arranged, the brighter the LED becomes. For example, it is conceivable to arrange the LEDs in two places, the upper part and the lower part. At that time, it is desirable that the LED is arranged at a position closer to the reel side than the display window side. If the reel is directly irradiated with light by arranging it at a position close to the display window side, the light is reflected and appears white to the player, which may make it difficult to visually recognize a specific symbol during the game.

Instead of the reel structure described above, it is conceivable to make the background area correspond to the white stop area and the design area correspond to the silver stop area. By doing so, the ratio of the background area to the reel sheet is larger, and the background area is arranged so as to cover the design area, so that the brightness of the entire reel can be maintained high.

However, by making the background area a whitening area, the partition between the reels (in other words, the sheet attachment surface) is also a whitening area, but it is a sheet attachment surface, and the light from each LED does not reach. From the player's point of view, dark lines will appear. As a result, when the player tries to stop the symbol attached to the reel seat in order to stop the rotating reel, the black line is floating, which may discourage the player from playing. It may upset the overall balance of the design attached to the sheet.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43A, a new non-stop (pattern) region different from the white stop (design) region and the silver stop (background) region is provided on the reel sheet. .. Note that FIGS. 43 (a), 43 (b), and 43 (c) are merely examples.

The non-stop area is an area on the back surface of the reel sheet that is not silver-stopped or white-stopped. By providing this region, it is possible to irradiate the outside of the house lamp with light without lowering the irradiation brightness of the light from each LED as compared with the whitening region.

A part of the non-stop area shown in FIG. 43 (b) is arranged at a position overlapping the sticker sticking surface, and the non-stop symbol shown in FIG. 43 (c) is located at a position not overlapping with the sticker sticking surface. Have been placed. When a part of the non-stop area overlaps with the sticker sticking surface, the light emitted from each LED passes through a part of the non-stop area, but does not pass through the part overlapping with the sticker sticking surface. .. When arranged in this way, the brightness in the space becomes high, but a part of the space is not included in the irradiation range, so that a part of the unstopped area looks black when viewed from the player, so that the player sees it. There is a risk that the visibility and design of the reel will deteriorate.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), by arranging the non-stop area in an area that does not overlap with the sheet pasting surface, the entire non-stop area transmits the light emitted from each LED. , It is possible to prevent the black line from appearing.

This makes it possible to provide the player with the brightness of the light from each LED due to the conventional structure without lowering it as much as possible, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a reel sheet having excellent design as well as the design area and the background area. Can be given.

As a derivative plan, the pattern used in the pattern area may be included in the pattern area in consideration of the design property used in the game machine. The pattern arranged in the pattern area may be a non-stop area as in the pattern area, or may be a white stop area as well. By setting the pattern arranged in the symbol area as the non-stop area, a specific symbol can be emphasized more. It is desirable that the specific symbol at this time is used as a relatively large symbol (white 7 or the like) among the symbols attached on the reel or as an index symbol when the player performs so-called eye-pressing. By setting the pattern arranged in the pattern area as the whitening area, the pattern area can be further emphasized.

Further, the number of pattern regions may be different between the index symbol and the non-index symbol. As described above, the index symbol is a relatively large symbol, and the area where the pattern area can be arranged is small. In other words, the symbols other than the index symbol are relatively small, and the area where the pattern area can be arranged is large. It can be used as a reference when the player presses a specific symbol according to the arrangement and size of the pattern symbol when pressing a symbol other than the index symbol.

Further, the liquid crystal effect provided in the game machine and the lighting mode of each LED may be linked. Specifically, after the player operates all the operations of the stop switch and all the rotating reels are stopped, each LED is turned on in order from the lower stage to the upper stage, and after the upper LED is turned on, It is conceivable to display a pattern of the same system from the lower region of the liquid crystal corresponding to the reel. At this time, the color of the displayed pattern is preferably the same color as or similar to the color projected on the pattern area. Further, it is more preferable to perform the effect during a period in which AT or a big hit can be expected (so-called precursor).

Further, each LED may be arranged at a position in the vertical direction of the design area and a position in the vertical direction of the pattern area.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the configuration related to scenario management in the advantageous section applicable to the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, by managing the expected value of the game medal acquisition while staying in the advantageous section in advance, it is possible to prevent the player from acquiring an excessive number of game medals and to shoot the player. The purpose is to suppress the mind.

In the third embodiment, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won (when it is decided to newly shift from the normal section to the advantageous section), any one of scenario numbers 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 44. Is now selected. In addition, the maximum number of games that can be stayed in one advantageous section (the maximum number of games that can be stayed continuously) is 1480, and basically, a new scenario number will not be selected unless 1480 games are played. ing.

The scenario number shown in FIG. 44 is a number stored in the main RWM when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, and is configured so that any one of scenario number 1 to scenario number 6 is selected. .. The cycle is the number of games with 37 games as one unit. As for the values of "0" and "1" corresponding to each scenario number and each cycle, "0" indicates a non-AT period and "1" indicates an AT period. For example, when the scenario number "1" is selected, "0" is stored in the first cycle, which indicates that the first cycle is a non-AT period (in other words, from the first game). AT is not executed during 37 games up to the 37th game). When scenario number 1 is selected, it indicates that the 25th cycle (889th game) is the AT period because "1" is stored.

When scenario number 1 is selected, the period from the first cycle to the 24th cycle is "0", so that the non-AT period is in progress and the game medals are reduced. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the expected number of game medals won during the non-AT period is -54. That is, since the number of game medals decreases during the non-AT period, 54 game medals are designed to decrease per cycle. Further, since the period from the 25th cycle to the 39th cycle is "1", it is in the AT period and the game medal can be increased. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected number of game medals to increase during the AT period is 100. That is, since the number of game medals increases during the AT period, it is designed so that 100 game medals increase per cycle. The expected number of game medals won is the average value of all game states in the advantageous section. It should be added that the numerical values in the figure may be applied only to a predetermined gaming state in an advantageous section.

Considering the expected number of game medals to be acquired during the non-AT period and the AT period, the game medal when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, scenario number 1 is selected, and the game of 1480 games in the advantageous section is executed. The expected number of medals can be calculated as 150. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of games that can be stayed in one advantageous section is designed to be 1480 games, but the maximum number of games may be 1500 games. That is, when scenario number 1 is selected, the expected number of medals won is 150, so it is highly likely that the player will be better off playing the game in the advantageous section where scenario number 1 is selected. .. The expected number of game medals may be the average value of all the game states in the advantageous section, or may be applied only in the case of a predetermined game state (the same applies to other scenarios).

Similarly, regarding the expected number of game medals to be acquired when the 1480 game games in scenario numbers 2 to 5 are executed, the expected number of game medals to be acquired in scenario number 2 is 1074, and the expected number of game medals to be acquired in scenario number 3 is 10. Is 612, the expected number of game medals for scenario number 4 is -1082, and the expected number of game medals for scenario number 5 is 1536.

When any of the scenario numbers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 44 is selected, the game is played from the start of the selected scenario number (first game) to the end of the selected scenario number (1480 games). As a result, the number of game medals (owned medals) that is close to the expected number of game medals will increase or decrease.

However, if the AT period is predetermined, it becomes easier for a player with abundant (knowledge) game experience of this specification to identify the current scenario number depending on the cycle in which the AT period occurs. .. In particular, since the expected value of the game medal acquisition is negative for the scenario number 4, if it can be determined that the scenario number 4 is selected, the player is more likely to leave the seat.

In order to solve the above problem, scenario number 6 in which the non-AT period and the AT period are not predetermined in each cycle is prepared. The scenario number 6 is a scenario number that determines whether or not to win during the AT period according to the result of the winning combination lottery. By providing the possibility that the scenario number 6 is selected, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine whether the expected value for acquiring the game medal is a positive scenario number or a negative scenario number.

In the present embodiment, the scenario number 6 determines whether or not to shift to the AT period by a random lottery (according to the result of the winning combination lottery) until the 24th cycle. Specifically, if it is decided to shift to the AT period by random lottery in the second cycle, the third cycle will be the AT period. As described above, in scenario 6, when staying in a predetermined cycle, whether to set the AT period or the non-AT period in the next cycle of the predetermined cycle is determined by the result of the lottery of each game. It is configured to do. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being discriminated against the scenario determined by the player depending on whether or not it is the AT period, and the game proceeds with a sense of expectation for the arrival of the AT period. can do.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected value of winning game medals when scenario number 6 is selected is -700. Further, in scenario number 6, when the AT period is entered and then the non-AT period is entered, the current advantageous section may be terminated (the current advantageous section is terminated and a new scenario number is assigned. Will be decided).

Next, the selection probability of the scenario number will be described. The “selection probability” in FIG. 44 indicates a value in which the ratio of winning the advantageous section transition lottery and the scenario number being selected is different for each set value. R1 is a set value 1, R2 is a set value 2, R5 is a set value 5, and R6 is a set value 6, exemplifying a case in which the set values are configured to have four stages. Further, the numerical values described under R1, R2, R5, and R6 indicate the selection probability of the scenario number in%. For example, in the set value 1, when a new transition to the advantageous section occurs, It will be decided at the ratio of scenario number 1:10%, scenario number 2: 3%, scenario number 3: 2%, scenario number 4: 20%, scenario number 5: 5%, scenario number 6: 60%. ..

At the setting value 1, the selection ratio of the scenario number 3 is the lowest and the selection ratio of the scenario number 6 is high, and at the setting value 6, the selection ratio of the scenario number 4 is the lowest and the selection ratio of the scenario number 1 is high. ing. Generally, for each set value, a design in which the expected value for acquiring a game medal is negative and a design in which the expected value is positive are often provided. In this embodiment, the set values 1 and 2 are negative and the set values 5 and 6 are positive. It is the expected value for winning game medals.

The scenario number 6 shown in FIG. 44 is different from the above-mentioned scenario numbers 1 to 5, and is a scenario in which it is determined whether or not to win the AT lottery based on the winning combination lottery results and the like until the 24th cycle. It has become. The reason why the scenario number 6 is prepared is that in the case of the patterns from the scenario number 1 to the scenario number 5 described above, there is a cycle in which the player does not hit when playing the game, and the player has the cycle. There is a high possibility that the game will be stopped when the game is reached. Therefore, by providing the scenario number 6, the player can increase the interest in guessing the current scenario number.

The expected value of winning the game medal of scenario number 6 is designed to be negative, and the set value 1 is designed to be easy to win, and the set value 6 is designed to be difficult to win. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1 has the highest selection probability of the scenario number 6 having a negative expected value for acquiring a game medal, and the setting value 6 has the lowest selection probability. Further, the setting value 6 has the highest selection probability of the scenario number 1 in which the expected value of acquiring the game medal is positive, and the setting value 1 has the lowest selection probability. That is, when the player plays the game, the setting value can be inferred by changing the scenario number, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The start time (1st cycle to 3rd cycle) and the end time (40th cycle) of scenario numbers 1 to 5 are designed to be "0". This is to prevent the number of game medals that can be obtained while staying in one advantageous section from becoming excessive. For example, although not shown, if the AT period corresponding to the selected scenario number is from the 16th cycle to the 40th cycle, assuming that 100 game medals can be obtained in one cycle, about 2400 game medals can be obtained. You will be able to acquire it. By completing the 40th cycle, the current advantageous section ends, and when the next advantageous section transition lottery is won, the AT period corresponding to the selected scenario number is from the 1st cycle to the 20th cycle. Assuming that 100 game medals can be obtained in one cycle, about 2000 game medals can be obtained. From the player's point of view, since the situation is such that 2400 and 2000 medals can be continuously obtained, there is a high possibility that the medals will be excessively obtained and the player will be absorbed in the game machine. Further, although the maximum number of game medals that can be obtained in one advantageous section is 2,400, there is a possibility that the maximum value of the game medals that can be obtained intentionally will be raised.

Therefore, even if scenario numbers 1 to 5 are selected, it is possible to avoid a situation in which excessively continuous game medals can be obtained across advantageous sections. Furthermore, since the AT period (in other words, the expected number of game medals to be acquired) is determined in advance as in scenario numbers 1 to 5, it is possible to control the acquisition of excess game medals and the consumption of excess game medals. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can expect a relatively stable design that does not depend only on probability. That is, by setting the start cycle (from the first cycle to the third cycle) and the end cycle (40th cycle) in the scenario as the non-AT period, the scenario numbers that are advantageous to the player are continuously selected. Even if the game is played, it is possible to prevent the player from getting an excessive number of game medals and getting into the game machine.

In the present embodiment, it is conceivable that the advantageous section transition lottery is won and the advantageous section lamp is not turned on at least until the scenario number shifts to the AT period, but scenario numbers 1 to 5 are If selected, the selected scenario number is maintained until the 1480 game is played. In other words, once the advantageous section lamp is turned on (shifted to the AT period), the advantageous section lamp cannot be turned off until the advantageous section ends. As a result, for example, in the advantageous section in which the scenario number 2 is selected, the timing at which the advantageous section lamp lights up is the start timing of the fourth cycle. In this way, if the advantageous section lamp is designed to be turned on in a specific cycle, the options of scenario number 1 and scenario number 5 disappear, and when the fifth cycle is the non-AT period (the expected value of winning the game medal is negative). ) Since it is detected that the scenario number is 4, the player is more likely to leave the seat.

Based on the above, from the next game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won and one of the scenario numbers is selected, the advantageous section lamp is turned on, and the advantageous section lamp is turned on until the selected scenario number ends. It is desirable to continue. This makes it difficult for the player to identify which scenario number the player has, and thus avoids unintentional leaving.

Next, the selection of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44 will be described. In the present embodiment, when the scenario number 1 is selected, the effect configuration 1 is selected, when the scenario number 2 is selected, the effect configuration 2 is selected, and the scenario number 3 is selected. If this is done, the effect configuration 3 will be selected, if the scenario number 4 is selected, the effect configuration 4 will be selected, and if the scenario number 5 is selected, the effect configuration 5 will be selected. Therefore, when the scenario number 6 is selected, one of the effect configuration 1 to the effect configuration 5 is selected. "0" described in the production configuration indicates that the precursory effect is not performed, and "1" indicates that the precursory effect indicating the case where it is decided to shift to the AT period is executed, and "2". Indicates that a Gase precursor effect that does not shift to the AT period but suggests the possibility of shifting to the AT period is executed. That is, in the next cycle, the effect of inciting whether or not the AT period is reached can be executed.

As for the effect configuration 6, as described above, when the scenario number 6 is selected, any one of the effect configuration 1 to the effect configuration 5 is selected. Therefore, the player depends on the timing of the occurrence of the precursory effect by the effect configuration. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of playing a game while guessing which is the current scenario number.

As described above, the scenario management and the production configuration when shifting to one advantageous section have been described, but the design may be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the scenario numbers are designed to be 1 to 6, but the number of selectable scenarios may be increased.

In the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario number is designed to be different according to the set value, but not limited to this, the set value 1 has the worst selection probability for the scenario numbers 1, 2, 3, and 5. , The selection ratio may be increased stepwise so that the set value 6 has the highest selection ratio.

In the present embodiment, in scenario number 6, when the AT period is entered at least once and the non-AT period is changed, the current advantageous section is terminated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the 25th cycle is not limited to this. The advantageous section may not be completed until the transition to the AT period of. For example, when the expected value of winning a game medal in scenario number 6 is positive, it is designed so that it is easier for a player to play a game if he / she stays in scenario number 6. Further, regarding scenario number 6, it is considered that the conditions for shifting to the non-AT period after the transition to the AT period are the non-winning of the game number management and the continuation rate lottery.

In the present embodiment, the effect configuration when the scenario number 6 is selected is designed so that any one of the effect configuration 1 to the effect configuration 5 is selected, but it is possible to shift to the AT period by a random lottery. When the decision is made, if the current production configuration is 0, the player can recognize that the precursor has started by rewriting it to 1. Further, when it is decided to shift to the AT period, it is conceivable not to rewrite from the case where the current production configuration is 0.

Further, in scenario number 6, the probability of winning the AT lottery (determining that the next cycle will be the AT period) may be different for each set value. For example, the set value 6 may be configured so that the scenario number is more easily selected than the other set values, while the winning rate of the AT lottery in the scenario number 6 is higher than the other set values.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned number of types of scenario numbers, the number of games in one cycle, the distribution of AT periods, etc. are just examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, in the fourth embodiment, the playability regarding the end timing of the MB and the RT fluctuation at the end of the CB will be described.

FIG. 45 shows the reel arrangement according to the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 46 shows a list of symbol combinations that can be won based on the winning combination lottery result in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 47 shows a list of winning combination combinations based on the winning combination lottery result in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 48 shows the winning combination lottery in the fourth embodiment. The number of combinations is listed.

In the fourth embodiment, BB and MB can be won as bonuses. The CB does not have a symbol combination, the CB game starts at the start of the game during the MB operation, and the CB game ends at the end of the game during the MB operation.

FIG. 49 shows the RT transition diagram according to the fourth embodiment. The non-RT is an RT state in which a game is possible by shifting to the factory shipment, after the main RWM is initialized, or when the result of 50 games is obtained in RT2. As will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the non-RT is also referred to as a pullback zone.

The RT1 is an RT state that can be shifted when the winning 05, winning 09, and replay 02 symbol combinations are displayed. As will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, RT1 is also referred to as a normal game.

RT2 is an RT state that can be shifted when the MB is completed and the winning 05 and winning 09 symbol combinations are not displayed. As will be described later, RT2 is also referred to as a first advantageous game in the fourth embodiment.

RT3 is an RT state that can be transferred after the end of BB. As will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, RT3 is also referred to as a second advantageous game.

Inside the BB is an RT state in which the player wins the BB and can shift to the case where the BB symbol combination is not displayed in the game. As will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the inside of the BB is also referred to as an internal middle game.

The BB operating state is an RT state that can be shifted when the BB symbol combination is displayed. As will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the operation during BB operation is also referred to as a game during BB.

The replay winning probability in each RT state will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the specified number can be selected from 2 and 3 (only 3 specified during BB operation and MB-B operation), and according to the specified number of each RT state, The reference destination of the lottery table of the role lottery and the number of game medals paid out are different.

In the fourth embodiment, while the MB is operating, it is a game in which the symbol combinations related to all the small winning combinations can be displayed regardless of the winning combination lottery result. For example, even if the result of the winning combination lottery is lost during the MB operation, the winning winning combinations that can be displayed are all small winning combinations (winning-A condition device to winning-G condition device). If the result of the replay-B condition device is obtained as a result of the combination lottery during the MB operation, the winning combination that can be displayed is all small combinations (winning-A condition device to winning-G condition device) and replaying. It becomes a game-B condition device. Since the patterns of the symbol combinations that can be displayed are different between the time of loss and the result of the replay-B condition device, a predetermined stop control may be performed according to the pattern of each displayable symbol combination. .. Specifically, it is controlled to preferentially pull in a specific symbol combination at the time of loss, and to preferentially pull in a predetermined symbol combination different from the specific symbol combination at the time of the replay-B condition device. You may do so. Details will be described later.

FIG. 50 describes the end timing and RT fluctuation timing of the MB-A game. As for the MB game, the MB game is completed by paying out more than 72 game medals for MB-A. On the other hand, the CB game that operates during the MB-A game ends after the result of the game is obtained. In the present embodiment, even if the RT transition symbol combination is displayed in the MB-A game, the RT transition cannot be performed, but in the MB-A game and the CB game, a specific symbol combination related to the small winning combination is displayed. , While the game medals are being paid out, the MB game is terminated when the payout of the game medals, which is the end condition of the MB-A game, is reached. However, in the CB game, since all the game medals have not been paid out and the result of the game has not been obtained, the CB game is continuing. The timing at which the CB game ends is such that the CB game ends after the payout of the game medals is completed.

In the present embodiment, in the MB-A game, when the specified number of 3 cards is displayed, when the symbol combination related to the winning 05 is displayed, 12 game medals are controlled to be paid out, but the 10th card out of the 12 cards is controlled. At the time when the game medals are paid out, 72 game medals, which is the end condition of the MB-A game, are paid out, so that the MB game is ended. That is, the MB game ends in the middle of paying out 12 game medals. After that, after the payout of 12 game medals is completed, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in this game is a symbol combination that triggers the RT transition. Since the winning 05 is a symbol combination that shifts to RT1, the game will be played at RT1 from the next game. Since RT1 is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is relatively low, the gaming state is disadvantageous for the player.

Further, in the MB-A game, when the symbol combination related to the winning 06 is displayed in the specified number of 3 cards, the control is performed so that 11 game medals are paid out, but the 10th game medal out of the 11 cards The MB game ends when 72 game medals, which are the conditions for ending the MB-A game, are paid out at the time of payout. That is, the MB game ends in the middle of paying out 11 game medals. Then, after the payout of 11 game medals is completed, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in this game is a symbol combination that triggers the RT transition. Since the winning 06 is not a symbol combination that shifts to RT1, it is possible to continue to stay in the RT2 state even after the end of the MB game. From the player's point of view, with the specified number of 3 cards, the player can play the game while maintaining RT2, which is in the RT state with a higher replay probability than RT1, except during BB operation. Therefore, the player is expected to win a game medal. The game can be played with a high value.

In the fourth embodiment, a game flow in which a player normally plays a game will be described. A player usually plays a game in RT1 with a specified number of three cards, with the expectation that he will win the MB-A or BB. In the case of the specified number of 2 cards, the replay winning probability is high, but since the winning probability of BB or MB-A is low, it is disadvantageous for the player to execute the game with the specified number of 2 cards, and the specified number of 3 cards is used. It is desirable to play a game.

When the MB-A is won, the player plays the game so as to display the symbol combination related to the winning 05 until the game in which more than 72 cards can be paid out. For example, 72 cards are paid out by displaying the symbol combination related to the winning 05 six times. As described above, in the present embodiment, the MB game can be completed even during the payout of the game medal.

In the case of MB-A game, when the game is played with RT1 and the specified number of 3 cards, the result of the lottery is 2 types (re-game-A condition device + all prizes, all prizes). Since the results of the two types of lottery are controlled so that winning 05 or winning 09 is displayed, if the player plays a game with a specified number of three, there is an opportunity to get the maximum payout of game medals. At the end timing of payout after satisfying the end condition of MB-A, the winning 05 or winning 09 is displayed to shift to RT1, so that the subsequent game proceeds at RT1 with a low replay probability. Become.

Similarly, in the MB-A game, the player plays the game so as to display the symbol combination related to the winning 05 until the game in which more than 72 cards can be paid out. For example, 72 cards are paid out by displaying the symbol combination related to the winning 05 six times. In the next game, if the game is played with the specified number of 2 cards, that is, the MB-A game, and the game is played with RT1 and the specified number of 2 cards, the re-game-B will be won at about 1/2. By configuring so that the winning 06 can be displayed when the re-game-B is won, "the winning 06 is stopped and the game medal payout starts → MB in the middle of the game medal payout. -Satisfying the end condition of -A-> RT2 is set-> The payout of game medals is completed-> The RT state does not shift because the winning 06 is stopped and displayed ", and the final game in MB-A Although the acquisition of one game medal is less than when the winning 05 is displayed in (the game with the final winning), as a result, it is possible to shift to RT2 having a high replay probability.

At the timing when the MB end condition is satisfied, the processing related to the transition of the RT state is executed by the interrupt processing.

As a method of increasing the probability of winning the re-game-B in RT1, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the specified number of 3 cards and the re-game-B in RT1, but the specified number of 3 and 2 cards is increased. By selecting one of the two types to play the game, even if the RT1 is the same, the reference destination of the lottery table is different. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the MB game and RT1, in the game immediately before the game in which the MB game may end, the re-game-B is played with a high probability of winning two cards. It is possible to increase the rate at which winning 06 is displayed (in other words, winning 05 or winning 09 is not displayed), and it is possible to improve playability. The winning rate of replay-B when the specified number of cards is two is 50% (32768/65536).

Further, in the MB-A game and RT2, even if the game is played with three cards, the re-game-B is won with a high probability, so that the player can display the winning 05 by playing the three cards. There is no need to worry, and the prize 06 is displayed so that you can play the game with peace of mind. In RT2, it is possible to maintain RT2 at about 80% (52066/65536) when the game is played with the specified number of 3 cards, and about 50% (32769/65536) when the game is played with the specified number of 2 cards. ), Since RT2 can be maintained, it is most advantageous to play a game with a specified number of 3 cards in RT2. In addition, when the specified number of cards is 2, it is desirable to play the game with the specified number of 3 cards because the payout of the game medals is small even if the same symbol combination is used.

Finally, RT3 will be described. RT3 is a game state that can be transferred after the BB game is completed, and unlike the route that makes it easier to shift to RT2 by winning the above-mentioned MB-A and changing the specified number, it shifts to RT2 relatively. It is an easy route.

From the above, in the fourth embodiment, by ending the end timing of the MB game according to the timing of the number of payouts, it is possible to provide the game property capable of RT transition by the symbol combination displayed after that. As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to select whether or not to change the specified number at the timing before the end of the game.

In addition to the above, as a derivative plan, if there is a situation where it is advantageous to play a game with a specified number of 3 cards and a situation where it is advantageous to play a game with a specified number of 2 cards, specifically, MB During the -A game, the game machine may notify whether to bet two cards or to play three cards according to the remaining number of payouts at which the MB-A game ends. It is desirable that the notification is performed by LED lighting, segment display, liquid crystal display, voice output, or the like. As for the timing of notification,
1: After satisfying the condition of the remaining number of sheets, a notification is given during the game standby.
2: During the game, notification is given from the time when the winning combination lottery result is determined to the time when the result of the game is obtained, based on the condition before the condition of the remaining number of sheets is satisfied.
3: Always notify after the condition of the remaining number of sheets is satisfied.
Can be considered.

As a result, the player can easily change the specified number according to the notification regardless of the timing of the notification, and can easily satisfy the transition condition to RT2, which causes an unintended disadvantage. You can proceed with the game without any.

<Configuration related to the main switch applicable to this example>
(Various main switches)
A 1-bet switch, a MAX bet switch, a start switch, a left stop switch, a middle stop switch, a right stop switch, a settlement switch, and a reset switch are provided as switches managed by the main control means (hereinafter, may be referred to as a main switch). ing. Information on whether or not these main switches have been operated (data corresponding to ON and OFF) is stored in a storage area starting from a predetermined address in the RWM. More specifically, input port 0 level data at address 0xF001, input port 1 level data at address 0xF002, input port 2 level data at address 0xF003, input port 0 fall data at address 0xF004, and input port 0 rise at address 0xF005. Data, input port 1 rising data is stored at address 0xF006, and input port 2 rising data is stored at address 0xF007.

Further, in this example, the setting / reset switch signal is set in the 0th bit (D0) of the input port 0, the setting key switch signal is set in the 1st bit (D1), and the door switch is set in the 2nd bit (D2). A signal is set, the 3rd bit (D3), the 4th bit (D4), and the 5th bit (D5) are unused, and the 6th bit (D6) is set with a power failure detection signal, and the 7th bit (D6). In D7), a full detection signal is set. When each of the D0, D1, D2, D6, and D7 bits is 0, it indicates OFF, and when it is 1, it indicates ON.

The right stop switch sensor signal is set in the 0th bit (D0) of the input port 1, the middle stop switch sensor signal is set in the 1st bit (D1), and the left stop switch sensor signal is set in the 2nd bit (D2). Is set, the 3rd bit (D3) is set with the 3-sheet insertion sensor (MAX bet switch sensor) signal, the 4th bit (D4) is set with the 1-sheet insertion switch signal, and the 5th bit (D5) is settled. The switch signal is set, the start switch sensor signal is set in the 6th bit (D6), and the 7th bit (D7) is unused. When each of the D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, and D6 bits is 0, it indicates OFF, and when it is 1, it indicates ON.

Further, the rotation sensor signal 1 is set in the 0th bit (D0) of the input port 2, the rotation sensor signal 2 signal is set in the first bit (D1), and the rotation sensor signal is set in the second bit (D2). 3 is set, the payout sensor 2 signal is set in the 3rd bit (D3), the payout sensor 1 signal is set in the 4th bit (D4), and the input sensor 2 signal is set in the 5th bit (D5). The input sensor 1 signal is set in the 6th bit (D6), and the selector passage sensor signal is set in the 7th bit (D7). When each of the D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, and D7 bits is 0, it indicates OFF, and when it is 1, it indicates ON.

When various main switches are operated, the sensors provided on the various main switches detect the operation of the various main switches, and if the sensors of the various main switches detect the operation of the various main switches, the corresponding input port The corresponding bit is configured to contain 1. Then, the input port is checked for each interrupt process of the main control means, and processing based on various main switches corresponding to the input port 1 is executed.

In addition, when various main switches are operated, a predetermined process may be executed, but the various main switches have a valid period during which the predetermined process can be executed (conversely, the predetermined process can be executed). The period that is not invalid is called the invalid period). For example, the valid period of the start switch is a state in which a specified number of bets are placed after all reels are stopped (referred to as a start switch operation waiting state in this embodiment), and the start switch is in a start switch operation waiting state. When the start switch sensor detects that the start switch has been operated, the internal lottery process and the reel rotation process can be executed. When the start switch sensor detects that the start switch has been operated in a state other than the start switch operation waiting state, the internal lottery process and the reel rotation process are not executed.

In this way, when a predetermined process (for example, in the case of a start switch corresponds to an internal lottery process or a reel rotation process) is executed when the sensor of the main switch detects the operation of the main switch, in other words, the validity period When the main switch is operated in, it is called effective detection, and when the sensor of the main switch detects the operation of the main switch, a predetermined process (for example, in the case of a start switch, an internal lottery process or a reel rotation process is applicable. In other words, when the main switch is operated during the invalid period, it is called invalidation detection.

In addition, the state in which the main switch is operated during the valid period (the state in which it is ON) is called the valid detection state, and the state in which the main switch is operated during the invalid period (the state in which it is ON) is referred to as the valid detection state. It is called an invalidity detection state.

Next, the validity period of various main switches will be described. The validity period of the MAX bet switch is that all reels are stopped, the maximum specified number or more (3 or more and 50 or less in this embodiment) is stored in the credit, and the number of bets is less than the maximum specified number (this implementation). In the form, it is 0 or more and less than 3).

The valid period of the start switch is a state in which the number of bets is set to a specified number (including betting by automatic betting processing), and the valid period of the left stop switch is that the left reel rotates at a constant speed. The middle (constant speed state) state, the valid period of the middle stop switch is the state in which the middle reel is rotating at a constant speed (constant speed state), and the valid period of the right stop switch is the right reel. It is in the state of high speed rotation (constant speed state), the valid period of the settlement switch is the state in which all reels are stopped and one or more are stored in the credit, and the valid period of the reset switch is. An error is detected and the error flag is set (the setting change mode may be set as the valid period).

Next, predetermined processing executed by various main switches will be described. When the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is a 3-sheet bet process or the like, and the start switch sensor is used during the valid period of the start switch. The predetermined processing based on the start switch when the operation of the start switch is detected is the internal lottery processing, the reel rotation processing, etc., and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch. The predetermined process based on the left stop switch is the stop control process of the left reel, etc., and the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch. The processing is the stop control processing of the middle reel, etc., and the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch is the stop control of the right reel. The predetermined processing based on the settlement switch when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch is the settlement processing (payout processing), etc., and is reset during the validity period of the reset switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is an error release process or the like.

Of the various main switches, when a plurality of main switches are operated at the same time, processing based on the operated main switch may not be executed. The action when such a plurality of main switches are operated at the same time (all of the plurality of main switches are ON) will be described in detail below.

(Processing of other main switches when the MAX bet switch detects invalidity 1)
The processing when the MAX bet switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the MAX bet switch is in the invalidity detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed and the left is left during the valid period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, it is medium. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch without executing the predetermined process based on the stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the settlement switch When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch is used. It is configured to perform certain processes based on it.

With this configuration, when the MAX bet switch fails and the player is always ON (the level data of the MAX bet switch sensor is always 1) regardless of whether the MAX bet switch is operated or not. Does not execute a predetermined process based on other main switches (excluding the reset switch), so that it is easy to detect that the MAX bet switch has failed. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the amusement park from being illegally exploited. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, when an error occurs at the same time, the error can be canceled and the warning sound can be stopped, so that the business of the amusement park can be not disturbed.

(Processing of other main switches when the MAX bet switch detects invalidity 2)
The processing when the MAX bet switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the MAX bet switch is in the invalidity detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed and the left is left during the valid period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, it is medium. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch without executing the predetermined process based on the stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the settlement switch When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, it is based on the reset switch. It is configured to perform a predetermined process.

With this configuration, if the MAX bet switch is always turned on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on other main switches (excluding the checkout switch and reset switch) is not executed, so MAX It becomes easier to detect that the bet switch is out of order. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, when an error occurs at the same time, the error can be canceled and the warning sound can be stopped, so that the business of the amusement park can be not disturbed.

(Processing of other main switches when the MAX bet switch detects invalidity 3)
The processing when the MAX bet switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the MAX bet switch is in the invalidity detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and the left stop is performed during the valid period of the left stop switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined process based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch is used. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed and the settlement is performed during the valid period of the settlement switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the checkout switch, the predetermined process based on the checkout switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed. It is configured to run.

With this configuration, even if the MAX bet switch is always turned on due to a failure, the game can proceed, so that the game can be played regardless of the timing of the MAX bet switch failure during the game. Can be completed. As a result, the game for the bet used by the player at the start of the game can be executed, so that troubles between the player and the playground can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs at the same time, the operation of the reset switch can be performed. Since it is possible to cancel a predetermined error and stop the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error, it is possible to prevent the business of the game hall and the game of other players from being hindered.

(Processing of other main switches when the MAX bet switch detects invalidity 4)
The processing when the MAX bet switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the MAX bet switch is in the invalidity detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed and the left is left during the valid period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined process based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop is performed. When a predetermined process based on the switch is executed and the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed and during the valid period of the settlement switch. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is performed. It is configured to perform processing.

With this configuration, even if the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can proceed during the game (for example, if the reel is rotating, the stop button can be operated. Since it is effective, the rotation of the reel can be stopped), so that the game can be completed even if the MAX bet switch fails at any timing during the game, and the bet used by the player at the start of the game can be completed. Since the game can be executed, troubles between the player and the playground can be prevented. Further, since the game cannot be newly started when the MAX bet switch is out of order, troubles between the player and the game hall can be prevented. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the amusement park from being illegally exploited. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined process is performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to a predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch detects invalidity 1)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the start switch becomes invalid detection and the state continues will be described. When the start switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the left stop switch is enabled. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the period, the predetermined process based on the left stop switch is not executed, and the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch. When the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is not executed, and when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch. It is configured to perform a predetermined process based on the reset switch.

With this configuration, if the start switch is always ON due to a failure, the start switch will fail because the specified processing based on other main switches (excluding the reset switch) will not be executed. It becomes easier to detect that. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the start switch fails due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the amusement park from being illegally exploited. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, a predetermined process can be performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch detects invalidity 2)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the start switch becomes invalid detection and the state continues will be described. When the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch when the start switch is in the invalidity detection state, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the left stop switch is enabled. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the period, the predetermined process based on the left stop switch is not executed, and the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch. When the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is not executed, and when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the reset is performed. It is configured to perform certain operations based on the switch.

With this configuration, if the start switch is always ON due to a failure, the start switch will not execute the specified processing based on other main switches (excluding the checkout switch and reset switch). It becomes easier to detect that is out of order. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, a predetermined process can be performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch detects invalidity 3)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the start switch becomes invalid detection and the state continues will be described. When the start switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed and the valid period of the left stop switch. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined process based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, The predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed and the settlement switch is valid. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed. Is configured to perform the processing of.

With this configuration, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can proceed, so the game is completed no matter when the start switch fails during the game. be able to. As a result, the game for the bet used by the player at the start of the game can be executed, so that troubles between the player and the playground can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, a predetermined process can be performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch detects invalidity 4)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the start switch becomes invalid detection and the state continues will be described. When the start switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the left stop switch is enabled. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the period, the predetermined process based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch. Executes a predetermined process based on the middle stop switch, and when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the validity period of the right stop switch, executes the predetermined process based on the right stop switch, and performs the predetermined process based on the right stop switch. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch is used. It is configured to perform certain processes based on it.

With this configuration, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can proceed during the game (for example, the operation of the stop button is effective when the reel is rotating). Therefore, the rotation of the reel can be stopped), so that the game can be completed no matter when the start switch fails during the game, and the game for the bet used by the player at the start of the game is Since it can be executed, troubles between the player and the playground can be prevented. In addition, since it is difficult to start the game because a new bet is not made when the start switch is out of order, troubles between the player and the game hall can be prevented. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the amusement park from being illegally exploited. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, a predetermined process can be performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the left stop switch detects invalidity 1)
The processing when the left stop switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the start switch is enabled. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch is operated. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch without executing the predetermined process based on the stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the settlement switch When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch is used. It is configured to perform certain processes based on it.

With this configuration, if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure, the left stop switch may be out of order because the predetermined processing based on the other main switches is not executed. It will be easier to detect. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the left stop switch breaks down due to fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the amusement park from being illegally exploited. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined process is performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to a predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the left stop switch detects invalidity 2)
The processing when the left stop switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the start switch is enabled. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, it is medium. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch without executing the predetermined process based on the stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the settlement switch When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, it is based on the reset switch. It is configured to perform a predetermined process.

With this configuration, if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure, the left stop switch may be out of order because the predetermined processing based on the other main switches is not executed. It will be easier to detect. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined process is performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to a predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the left stop switch detects invalidity 3)
The processing when the left stop switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed and the valid period of the start switch is executed. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch is used. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed and the settlement is performed during the valid period of the settlement switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the checkout switch, the predetermined process based on the checkout switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed. It is configured to run.

With this configuration, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can proceed, so even if the left stop switch fails at any timing during the game, the game can be played. Can be completed. As a result, the game for the bet used by the player at the start of the game can be executed, so that troubles between the player and the playground can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined process is performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to a predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

(Processing of other main switches when the left stop switch detects invalidity 4)
The processing when the left stop switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed and the valid period of the start switch is executed. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch is used. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch without executing the predetermined process based on the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is not executed and the valid period of the settlement switch. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed. It is configured to perform processing.

With this configuration, if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure, the left stop switch is out of order because the specified processing based on the middle and right stop switches is not executed. Is easier to detect. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined process is performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to a predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the business of the game hall or the game of other players.

The processing of the other main switch when the middle stop switch is invalidity detection and the processing of the other main switch when the right stop switch is invalidation detection are the other mains when the left stop switch is invalidation detection. Since it is the same as the switch processes 1 to 4, the description is omitted.

(Processing of other main switches when the checkout switch detects invalidity 1)
The processing when the settlement switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the checkout switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, the left stop is performed. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch without executing the predetermined process based on the switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is not executed and the right stop switch is used. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. It is configured to perform a predetermined process based on the reset switch.

With this configuration, if the checkout switch is always ON due to a failure, the checkout switch is detected to be out of order because the predetermined processing based on the other main switches is not executed. It will be easier. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the amusement park from being illegally exploited. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the settlement switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined process is performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to prevent the business of the game hall and the game of other players from being disturbed.

(Processing of other main switches when the checkout switch detects invalidity 2)
The processing when the settlement switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the settlement switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is set. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and the right is performed during the valid period of the right stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed. Is configured to perform the processing of.

With this configuration, even if the settlement switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can proceed, so the game is completed no matter when the settlement switch fails during the game. be able to. As a result, the game for the bet used by the player at the start of the game can be executed, so that troubles between the player and the playground can be prevented. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the settlement switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined process is performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to prevent the business of the game hall and the game of other players from being disturbed.

(Processing of other main switches when the checkout switch detects invalidity 3)
The processing when the settlement switch becomes invalid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. When the checkout switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, the left stop is performed. When a predetermined process based on the switch is executed and the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the validity period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed and the validity period of the right stop switch is executed. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch is set. It is configured to perform certain processes based on it.

With this configuration, even if the checkout switch is always turned on due to a failure, the game can proceed during the game (for example, the operation of the stop button is effective when the reel is rotating). Therefore, the rotation of the reel can be stopped), so that the game can be completed no matter when the settlement switch fails during the game, and the game for the bet used by the player at the start of the game is Since it can be executed, troubles between the player and the playground can be prevented. In addition, since it is difficult for a new game to be started because a new bet is not made when the settlement switch is out of order, troubles between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Further, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the settlement switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined process is performed by operating the reset switch. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible to prevent the business of the game hall and the game of other players from being disturbed.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch detects invalidity 1)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the reset switch becomes invalid detection and the state continues will be described. When the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, the left stop is performed. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch without executing the predetermined process based on the switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is not executed and the right stop switch is used. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the checkout switch sensor detects the operation of the checkout switch during the valid period of the checkout switch. It is configured not to perform a predetermined process based on the checkout switch.

With this configuration, if the reset switch is always ON due to a failure, the reset switch will be detected as having failed because the predetermined processing based on the other main switches will not be executed. It will be easier. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the amusement park from being illegally exploited. Further, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of canceling the error by an illegal means.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch detects invalidity 2)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the reset switch becomes invalid detection and the state continues will be described. When the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, the left stop is performed. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch without executing the predetermined process based on the switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is not executed and the right stop switch is used. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the checkout switch sensor detects the operation of the checkout switch during the valid period of the checkout switch. It is configured to perform a predetermined process based on the checkout switch.

With this configuration, if the reset switch is always ON due to a failure, the reset switch will fail because the specified processing based on other main switches (excluding the checkout switch) will not be executed. It becomes easier to detect that. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of canceling the error by an illegal means. Further, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of canceling the error by an illegal means.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch detects invalidity 3)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the reset switch becomes invalid detection and the state continues will be described. When the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and during the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is set. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and the right is performed during the valid period of the right stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is executed. Is configured to perform the processing of.

With this configuration, even if the reset switch is always turned on due to a failure, the game can proceed, so the game is completed no matter when the reset switch fails during the game. be able to. As a result, the game for the bet used by the player at the start of the game can be executed, so that troubles between the player and the playground can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals stored by the player can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Further, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of canceling the error by an illegal means.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch detects invalidity 4)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the reset switch becomes invalid detection and the state continues will be described. When the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed and the valid period of the start switch. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is used. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle stop switch is executed, and during the valid period of the right stop switch. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, it is based on the settlement switch. It is configured not to perform a predetermined process.

With this configuration, even if the reset switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can proceed (for example, if the reel is rotating, the operation of the stop button is effective, so the reel Since the rotation can be stopped), the game can be completed even if the reset switch fails at any timing during the game. However, even if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch, it does not execute a predetermined process, so that it is difficult to start a new game. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent the amusement park from being illegally exploited. Further, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of canceling the error by an illegal means.

When an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state, the error cannot be cleared because the error is cleared based on the rising signal of the reset switch signal, and the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state. In the case of, the rising signal does not turn ON, so the error cannot be cleared. In addition, if the error cancellation is configured to be canceled based on the falling signal instead of the rising signal (error is cleared by OFF → ON → OFF), the reset switch is turned ON and OFF when the error is cleared by an illegal operation. Therefore, it is possible to make the configuration more difficult to clear the error.

(Processing of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is valid detection)
The processing when the MAX bet switch becomes valid detection and another main switch is operated while the state continues will be described. In addition, the start switch, the settlement switch, or the reset switch corresponds to the other main switches whose operation can be effective in the situation where the MAX bet switch is detected as valid. When the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the start switch. By combining such a configuration with the process 3 of the other main switch when the MAX bet switch is invalid, the start switch sensor can be activated during the valid period of the start switch when the MAX bet switch is in the invalid detection state. When the start switch operation is detected, the predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the start switch operation during the valid period of the start switch, The configuration is such that a predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to fraudulent operation of the MAX bet switch. That is, it is highly likely that the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is validly detected is likely to be fraudulent, so that the game cannot proceed and the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected as invalid. The state of being operated is considered to have a low possibility of fraud, and the game can proceed.

Further, when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch. By combining such a configuration with the processing 2 or 3 of the other main switch when the MAX bet switch described above is ineffective detection, the settlement is made during the valid period of the settlement switch when the MAX bet switch is in the invalidity detection state. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the payment switch, the predetermined processing based on the payment switch is executed, and when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state, the payment switch sensor detects the operation of the payment switch during the valid period of the payment switch. When this happens, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game is settled due to fraudulent operation of the MAX bet switch. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, making it impossible to settle the game, and the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid. The state of being operated is considered to have a low possibility of fraud, and the game can be settled.

Further, when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state and the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch sensor during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the other main switch when the MAX bet switch described above is in the invalidity detection state, the reset switch can be used when the MAX bet switch is in the invalidity detection state. When the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the MAX bet switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor is the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. When the operation of is detected, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the error is cleared due to fraudulent operation of the MAX bet switch. In other words, if the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, the error cannot be cleared, and the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid. Since the possibility of fraud is low, the error can be cleared.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch is valid detection)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the start switch becomes valid detection and the state continues will be described. In addition, the stop switch (left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch) or the reset switch corresponds to the other main switches whose operation can be effective when the start switch is detected as valid. When the start switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch. By combining such a configuration with the other main switch processes 3 or 4 when the start switch is ineffective detection, the stop switch sensor is in the effective period of the stop switch when the start switch is in the invalidity detection state. When it detects the operation of the stop switch, it executes a predetermined process based on the stop switch, and when the start switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch. The configuration is such that a predetermined process based on the stop switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to fraudulent operation of the start switch. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the game cannot proceed, and the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be invalid. The state of being is considered to have a low possibility of fraud, and the game can proceed.

Further, when the start switch is in the valid detection state and the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with other main switch processes 1, 2, 3, or 4 when the start switch is ineffective detection, the validity period of the reset switch is when the start switch is in the invalidity detection state. When the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the start switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor operates the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. When it is detected, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to fraudulent operation of the start switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected as valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and the error cannot be cleared, and the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected as invalid. Since the possibility of fraud is low, the error can be cleared.

Further, when the start switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, it is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch. By combining such a configuration with the other main switch processes 1 or 2 when the start switch is ineffective detection, when the start switch is in the invalidity detection state, the stop switch sensor is in the effective period of the stop switch. When the stop switch operation is detected, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed, and when the start switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the stop switch operation during the valid period of the stop switch. Is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch.

With such a configuration, dissatisfaction with the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In other words, it is highly likely that the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is effectively detected is the operation of the start switch operated by the player, and the operation of each stop switch is performed in order to end the game to the end. The state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected as invalid is likely to be the operation of the start switch by a factor other than the operation (illegal or failure). It is impossible to operate each stop switch so that it will not end until the end.

(Processing of other main switches when the stop switch is valid detection)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the stop switch is valid detection and the state continues will be described. It should be noted that, among other main switches, the stop switch (non-operated stop switch) or the reset switch corresponds to the other main switches in which the operation is effective when the stop switch is detected as valid. When the left stop switch is in the valid detection state while all reels are rotating, the middle or the right stop switch is in the valid period, or the right stop switch sensor detects the middle or the operation of the right stop switch. It is configured not to perform a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch. By combining such a configuration with the process 3 of the other main switch when the left stop switch is ineffective detection, when the left stop switch is in the invalidity detection state, the middle or right stop switch is valid. When the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is executed, and when the left stop switch is in the effective detection state, the middle or right stop switch is detected. During the valid period of the right stop switch, when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch, the middle or right stop switch does not perform a predetermined process.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to fraudulent operation of the left stop switch. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the left stop switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the game cannot proceed, and the switch continues after the left stop switch is detected to be invalid. The state of being operated is considered to have a low possibility of fraud, and the game can proceed.

In addition, when the left stop switch is in the valid detection state while all reels are rotating, and the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed. It is configured as. By combining such a configuration with other main switch processes 1, 2, 3, or 4 when the left stop switch is ineffective detection, the reset switch can be used when the left stop switch is in invalidity detection state. When the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the left stop switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor is the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. When the operation of is detected, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the error is cleared due to fraudulent operation of the left stop switch. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the left stop switch is detected as valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, making it impossible to clear the error, and the switch continues after the left stop switch is detected as invalid. It is possible to clear the error because the operating state is unlikely to be fraudulent.

In addition, in the state where all reels are rotating, when the left stop switch is in the valid detection state, the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the middle or right stop switch operation during the valid period of the right stop switch. When is configured to perform a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch. By combining such a configuration with the other main switch processes 1, 2, or 4 when the left stop switch is ineffective detection, the middle or right stop is in the invalidity detection state of the left stop switch. During the valid period of the switch, when the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle or right stop switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is in the valid detection state. Occasionally, during the validity period of the middle or right stop switch, when the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle or right stop switch is executed. It becomes.

With such a configuration, dissatisfaction with the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In other words, it is highly likely that the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the left stop switch is effectively detected is the operation of the left stop switch operated by the player, and the remaining each to end the game to the end. The state in which the stop switch can be operated and the switch is continuously operated after the left stop switch is detected as invalid may be the operation of the left stop switch by the player due to a factor other than the operation (illegal or malfunction). Is high, and it is impossible to operate each of the remaining stop switches in order not to end the game to the end.

(Processing of other main switches when the checkout switch is valid detection)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the settlement switch is valid detection and the state continues will be described. In addition, the MAX bet switch or the reset switch corresponds to the other main switches whose operation can be effective in the situation where the settlement switch is detected as valid. When the settlement switch is in the valid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch. By combining such a configuration with the processing 2 of the other main switch when the settlement switch is ineffective detection, the MAX bet switch sensor can be used during the validity period of the MAX bet switch when the settlement switch is in the invalidity detection state. When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and when the settlement switch is in the valid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor operates the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When it is detected, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to fraudulent operation of the settlement switch. In other words, it is highly likely that the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the settlement switch is validly detected is likely to be fraudulent, and the game cannot proceed, and the switch is continuously operated after the settlement switch is detected to be invalid. The state of being is considered to have a low possibility of fraud, and the game can proceed. In addition, as a situation where the MAX bet switch can be operated in the valid detection state of the settlement switch, only the bet portion is settled when betting as the settlement process, or the bet portion is settled when the bet is placed as the settlement process. The situation from the settlement of the bet when the settlement is made first and then the settlement of the credit to the settlement of the credit is applicable.

Further, when the settlement switch is in the valid detection state and the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the reset switch. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, or 3 of the other main switch when the above-mentioned settlement switch is invalidity detection, when the settlement switch is in the invalidation detection state, it is reset during the valid period of the reset switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch, the predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the settlement switch is in the valid detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. In some cases, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the error is cleared due to fraudulent operation of the checkout switch. In other words, if the switch is continuously operated after the checkout switch is detected as valid, there is a high possibility of fraud, and it is impossible to clear the error, and the switch is continuously operated after the checkout switch is detected as invalid. The error is cleared because the possibility of fraud is low.

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch is valid detection)
The processing when another main switch is operated while the reset switch becomes valid detection and the state continues will be described. In addition, the MAX bet switch, the start switch, the stop switch or the settlement switch correspond to the other main switches whose operation can be effective in the situation where the reset switch is detected as valid. When the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch. By combining such a configuration with the process 3 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid, the MAX bet switch sensor can be used during the valid period of the MAX bet switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor operates the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When it is detected, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to fraudulent operation of the reset switch. In other words, if the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, the game cannot proceed, and the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. It is possible to proceed with the game, assuming that the state of being is unlikely to be fraudulent.

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, the predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the other main switch processes 3 or 4 when the reset switch is invalid, the start switch sensor is in the valid period of the start switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. When it detects the operation of the start switch, it executes a predetermined process based on the start switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, The configuration is such that a predetermined process based on the start switch is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to fraudulent operation of the reset switch. In other words, if the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, the game cannot proceed, and the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. It is possible to proceed with the game, assuming that the state of being is unlikely to be fraudulent.

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch. By combining such a configuration with the processing 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch described above is ineffective detection, the stop switch sensor is in the effective period of the stop switch when the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state. When the stop switch operation is detected, the predetermined process based on the stop switch is executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the stop switch operation during the valid period of the stop switch, The configuration is such that a predetermined process based on the stop switch is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game progresses due to fraudulent operation of the reset switch. In other words, if the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, the game cannot proceed, and the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. It is possible to proceed with the game, assuming that the state of being is unlikely to be fraudulent.

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, it is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch. By combining such a configuration with the processing 2 or 3 of the other main switch when the reset switch described above is ineffective detection, the settlement switch sensor is used during the valid period of the settlement switch when the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state. When the checkout switch operation is detected, the predetermined process based on the checkout switch is executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the checkout switch sensor detects the checkout switch operation during the valid period of the checkout switch, The configuration is such that a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the game is settled due to fraudulent operation of the reset switch. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, making it impossible to settle the game, and the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. It is possible to settle the game because the possibility of fraud is low.

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, it is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch. .. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch described above is in the invalidity detection state, when the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state, in the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor is in the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed.

With such a configuration, dissatisfaction with the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game can be advanced, and the switch is activated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. The state of being continuously operated is likely to be an abnormal (illegal) reset switch operation, and the progress of the game is made impossible. If the game can be advanced, at least the game can be terminated, and a control for prohibiting the game may be executed from the next game, or a failure may occur but the game is hindered. Since there is no such thing, the game may be configured so that the game can proceed until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel when an error occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, it is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the start switch. By combining such a configuration with the other main switch processes 1 or 2 when the reset switch is invalid, the start switch sensor is in the valid period of the start switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. When the start switch operation is detected, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the start switch operation during the valid period of the start switch. Is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the start switch.

With such a configuration, dissatisfaction with the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game can be advanced, and the switch is activated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. The state of being continuously operated is likely to be an abnormal (illegal) reset switch operation, and the progress of the game is made impossible. If the game can be advanced, at least the game can be terminated, and a control for prohibiting the game may be executed from the next game, or a failure may occur but the game is hindered. Since there is no such thing, the game may be configured so that the game can proceed until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel when an error occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, it is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch. By combining such a configuration with the other main switch processes 1 or 2 when the reset switch is invalid, the stop switch sensor is in the effective period of the stop switch when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state. When the stop switch operation is detected, the predetermined process based on the stop switch is not executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the stop switch operation during the valid period of the stop switch. Is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch.

With such a configuration, dissatisfaction with the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game can be advanced, and the switch is activated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. The state of being continuously operated is likely to be an abnormal (illegal) reset switch operation, and the progress of the game is made impossible. If the game can be advanced, at least the game can be terminated, and a control for prohibiting the game may be executed from the next game, or a failure may occur but the game is hindered. Since there is no such thing, the game may be configured so that the game can proceed until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel when an error occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, it is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch. By combining such a configuration with the other main switch processes 1 or 4 when the reset switch described above is ineffective detection, the settlement switch sensor is used during the valid period of the settlement switch when the reset switch is in the invalidity detection state. Does not execute the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch when the operation of the settlement switch is detected, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch when the reset switch is in the valid detection state. Is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch.

With such a configuration, dissatisfaction with the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the progress of the game can be smoothed. In other words, it is highly likely that the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is validly detected is a normal reset switch operation, and the game can be settled, and the switch is activated after the reset switch is detected as invalid. The state of continuous operation is highly likely to be an abnormal (illegal) reset switch operation, making it impossible to settle the game. When the settlement of the game is enabled, at least the settlement of the game is feasible, and the control for prohibiting the game from the game after the settlement may be executed, although it is a failure. Since there is no problem in the game, the game may be allowed to proceed until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel the game when an error occurs).

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, all the configurations of the MAX bet switch can be replaced with the 1-bet switch. Furthermore, if various main switches detect invalidity when the replay symbol combination of the replay winning game is displayed (more specifically, from the time when the third stop is accepted until the automatic bet processing is executed), MAX The automatic bet processing is configured to be executed even when the predetermined processing based on the bet switch is not executed. This is because if the automatic bet processing is stopped, the game cannot be completed, and even if the settlement switch is enabled, the settlement switch cannot be entered into the valid period and the settlement processing cannot be executed. This is to prevent.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, both the MAX bet switch and the 1-bet switch may be provided, or only the MAX bet switch may be provided. If only the MAX bet switch is provided, the processing related to one bet cannot be executed by the main switch, but it can be realized by inserting one medal by care.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the settlement switch and the 1-bet switch may be shared. In this case, the function of the 1-bet switch is executed in the case of a single press, and the function of the settlement switch is executed in the case of a long press. In addition, single press means that in the input port check executed for each interrupt process, the settlement / 1-bet switch is released within 894 ms (the settlement / 1-bet switch is ON 400 times in a row in the interrupt process) (OFF). (It became), and long press means that the input port check executed for each interrupt process is settled even if it exceeds 894 ms (payment by interrupt processing / 1 bet switch is equivalent to ON 400 times in a row). The bet switch was operated (it was still ON).

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the processing based on the operation of the bet switch may be invalidated, or the medal may be inserted by maintenance. With this configuration, the blocker is not operated by operating various main switches, so that it is possible to reduce the wear of the blocker motor due to the player operating the blocker at any time. In addition, the progress of the game can be stopped by invalidating the operation of the start switch even when three cards are inserted (specified number of sheets are inserted) by maintenance.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the processing based on the operation of the bet switch may be invalidated, or the automatic betting processing may be possible. With this configuration, any of the various main switches can be used between the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the replay symbol combination stops and the time when the reel stops (more specifically, before the winning determination process). Even if the switch of is detected as invalid and the predetermined processing based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (invalid), the automatic betting processing is executed. Therefore, the state of the switch is changed before the automatic betting processing is executed. The program capacity can be reduced because it is not necessary to make a judgment. Further, even when the automatic betting process is performed, the progress of the game can be stopped by invalidating the operation of the start switch. In the case of such a configuration, from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the small winning combination is won and the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped until the reel is stopped (more specifically, before the winning determination process). ), If any of the various main switches is detected as invalid and the predetermined processing based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (invalidated), the payout processing can also be executed. Further, in the case of such a configuration, from the final stop operation reception at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination at the time of winning the predetermined combination (replay, small combination, bonus, etc.) is stopped until the reel is stopped (more concretely). Specifically, if any of the various main switches is detected as invalid during (before the winning determination process), the slip control is executed, and then the progress of the game is stopped after the winning determination process.

Further, in the above-mentioned processing of the various main switches, when the processing based on the operation of the betting switch is invalidated, the automatic betting processing may also be invalidated. With this configuration, any of the various main switches can be used between the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the replay symbol combination stops and the time when the reel stops (more specifically, before the winning determination process). When the switch of is invalid and the predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (invalid), the automatic bet process is not executed, so that the progress of the game can be stopped. As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped when the main switch is operated due to fraud, and damage to the game field can be suppressed. In the case of such a configuration, from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the small winning combination is won and the symbol combination of the small winning combination is stopped until the reel is stopped (more specifically, before the winning determination process). ), If any of the various main switches is detected as invalid and the predetermined processing based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (invalidated), the payout processing is also infeasible. Further, in the case of such a configuration, from the final stop operation reception at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination at the time of winning the predetermined combination (replay, small combination, bonus, etc.) is stopped until the reel is stopped (more concretely). Specifically, if any of the various main switches is detected as invalid during (before the winning judgment processing), the slip control is executed, and then the progress of the game is stopped before the winning judgment processing. ..

In addition, in the above-mentioned processing of various main switches, if another main switch is operated when various main switches are detected as valid, it is considered to be valid only once (a predetermined process based on the other main switch can be executed). May be good. For example, when the reset switch is valid detection, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch can be executed, but the operation of the stop switch in the game is performed. Makes certain processing based on infeasible. With this configuration, the start switch sensor picks up noise, and even if a continuous ON state occurs for a minimum period, the next operation is effective once, so the game can proceed. If it is noise, the continuous ON state is canceled and the predetermined process based on the next operation (stop switch in the above example) can be executed and the game can proceed. If it is not noise, the continuous ON state is maintained and the process can proceed. A predetermined process based on the next operation (stop switch in the above example) cannot be executed, and the game cannot proceed. As a result, even if noise is generated, the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the valid period during which the reset switch is effective may be the door open detection state and the error detection state (error is occurring). That is, when the reset switch is turned ON in the door open detection state and the error detection state, the reset switch is effectively detected, and when the reset switch is turned ON in the door closure detection state and the error detection state, the reset switch is reset. The switch is detected as invalid.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even during the validity period of a certain main switch, the operation reception of a certain main switch is invalid while the inputs of a certain main switch and another main switch are detected at the same time. In that case, the predetermined process may not be executed even during the valid period. For example, the state where the specified number is bet is the valid period of the start switch, but when the specified number is bet and the bet switch is detected as invalid, the operation reception of the start switch is invalid. In some cases (for example, processing 1, 2, 4 of other main switches when the MAX bet switch detects invalidity). Even in such a case, when the bet switch is no longer detected, the operation reception of the start switch becomes effective, so the valid period of the start switch is set. That is, the "valid period" does not mean the period during which the operation of the main switch is effective in any state, but is used as the period during which the operation of the main switch alone is effective. In addition, although the example of the validity period of the start switch has been described above, the same intention is applied to the validity period of other main switches (MAX bet switch, left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch, settlement switch, reset switch). I'm using it.

<Structure related to passing medals applicable to this example>
(Structure of medal selector)
The structure of the medal selector will be described. The medal selector is provided to switch whether the medal inserted from the medal slot is guided to the inside of the game machine (inside the hopper) or outside the game machine (receiver). In addition, a plurality of sensors for detecting passed medals are provided in the medal selector, and the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are configured to pass in the order of the passage sensor, the insertion sensor 1, and the insertion sensor 2 from the upstream. Has been done. Further, a blocker is provided between the passage sensor and the insertion sensor 1, and when the blocker is ON, the inserted medal is guided into the game machine, and when the blocker is OFF, the inserted medal is moved out of the game machine. Guide. When guiding medals outside the game machine, if medals cannot be stored (credit storage upper limit (50) and MAX bet (3)), non-standard medals are inserted (medals). When the game is in progress (from the reception of the start switch to the game end processing after all reels have stopped), an error is occurring, the setting is being confirmed, or the settlement is in progress. Etc. are applicable.

When the passage sensor detects a medal (when it changes from OFF to ON), the input monitoring counter is incremented by 1. The value of the input monitoring counter is cleared (set to 0) when the blocker is turned from OFF to ON. Further, if the passing time and passing order of the closing sensor 1 and the closing sensor 2 are normal, the value of the closing monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 when the closing sensor 2 is turned from ON to OFF. That is, the value of the insertion monitoring counter when the normal medal is inserted and guided into the game machine is 0 because 1 is added when the passage sensor is detected and 1 is subtracted when the insertion sensor 2 is detected. Then, if the value of the insertion monitoring counter is within the range of 0 to 2, it is assumed that the game medal has passed normally, and the process of turning on the insertion number display LED is executed. However, if the replay is won and the automatic bet processing is executed, the processing to turn on the input number display LED is not newly executed, and the addition processing (including the addition display processing) to the credit number display is performed. Do (if the credit is less than 50). The input monitoring counter is incremented when the blocker is OFF, but is cleared when the blocker is ON, so that it does not substantially function when the blocker is OFF.

When the insertion sensor 1 detects a medal (when it is turned from OFF to ON), the measurement of the passing time is started until the insertion sensor 1 does not detect the medal (from ON to OFF). If this passing time is within the threshold value, it is normal, but if it exceeds the threshold value, it is determined that a medal retention error is made, and medal retention error processing is executed. The threshold value from when the insertion sensor 1 is turned on to when the insertion sensor 1 is turned off is set to 4 ms or more and 200 ms or less in consideration of the passing speed of medals.

When the insertion sensor 2 detects a medal (from OFF to ON to OFF) after the insertion sensor 1 detects a medal (from OFF to ON), the insertion sensor 1 The measurement of the passing time until the medal is no longer detected (from ON to OFF) is started. If this passing time (the time from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned on to when the insertion sensor 1 is turned off) is within the threshold value, it is normal, but when the threshold value is exceeded, a medal retention error is determined and a medal retention error processing is performed. To execute. The threshold value from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned on to when the insertion sensor 1 is turned off is set to 2 ms or more and 120 ms or less in consideration of the passing speed of medals.

If the insertion sensor 2 detects a medal (from OFF to ON to OFF) after the insertion sensor 1 detects a medal (from OFF to ON), the insertion sensor 2 will perform. The measurement of the passing time until the medal is no longer detected (from ON to OFF) is started. If this passing time (the time from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned on to when the insertion sensor 2 is turned off) is within the threshold value, it is normal, but when the threshold value is exceeded, a medal retention error is determined and a medal retention error processing is performed. To execute. The threshold value from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned on to when the insertion sensor 2 is turned off is set to 4 ms or more and 200 ms or less in consideration of the passing speed of medals.

If the insertion sensor 2 detects a medal (when it changes from OFF to ON) before the insertion sensor 1 detects the medal (before it turns from OFF to ON), it is determined that a medal backflow error occurs and the medal Execute backflow error processing.

The insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2 are arranged so that both of them are turned ON when one medal passes (the distance between the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2 is shorter than the diameter of the medal). , Error processing can be executed according to the passing time of medals.

When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, it is guided to the hopper through the passage in the selector by free fall. If the time from the insertion of the medal to the guidance to the hopper is too short, the blocker will not be turned on in time and the inserted medal will be guided to the return passage. Also, if the time from the insertion of the medal to being guided to the hopper is too long, the insertion time of the medal to start the game will be longer than necessary, so the passing time of the medal guided to the hopper from the insertion of the medal Must be set at an appropriate time. There are various possible operations for inserting medals from the medal insertion slot, but as shown in FIG. 51, a medal is set at the upper part of the medal insertion slot (the initial speed when the medal is set is 0), and it is artificial. In the present embodiment, the operation of freely dropping the medal without applying a large acceleration is described as a general medal insertion operation. In addition, after the medal is freely dropped, it may collide with each part in the selector, but it is called free fall including deceleration due to this collision.

The condition for the blocker to turn from OFF to ON is after one game is completed. More specifically, after executing the winning process due to all the reels being stopped and all the stop switches being released in the previous game, the game start display LED (start lamp), which is the information of the previous game, After initializing the RWM storage area related to the input indicator LED (1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, 3-bet lamp) and replay indicator LED (replay lamp), the blocker is turned on.

Here, in the case where the player aims to perform the maximum game within the business hours of the game playing field, etc., in order to continuously execute the game, after the game is completed. It is conceivable to immediately perform an action for executing the next game. As this operation, if medals are stored in the credits, the bet switch (MAX bet switch) is operated and then the start switch is operated. If medals are not stored in the credits, the specified number of medals are inserted from the medal slot ( In this embodiment, the start switch is operated after inserting (three). The shorter the time to perform this operation, the more games can be executed. Therefore, if the inserted medals are guided to the return passage without being guided by the hopper, the time until the next game is executed becomes longer. This may make the player feel that the operability is poor, and may reduce the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in a situation where medals can be inserted, it is preferable to guide the medals to the hopper as much as possible when the medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this example, the stop switch corresponding to the last reel in the situation where the last one reel is rotating among the plurality of reels (three reels in the present embodiment) is used. When the stop switch is operated in a situation where the operation is valid, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last reel detects the operation of the stop switch and starts the process of stopping the last reel, and then. When the stop switch sensor no longer detects the operation of the stop switch and a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, the inserted medal is guided to the hopper (the process of turning the blocker from OFF to ON is executed). Is configured to be).

This makes it possible to insert medals after the end of the game, and makes it easier for the player to understand when the medals can be inserted (the moment the last stop switch is released, the medals can be inserted), so that the operation of the game Can be executed quickly.

In order not to make the following explanation redundant, the time from the moment the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch is turned off until the blocker is turned on is set to "T1", and after the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot ( From the state where the lower string of the medal coincides with the upper part of the medal insertion slot when the medal insertion slot is viewed from the front (from the state directly above the medal insertion slot and the entire medal is visible) until reaching the blocker. The time will be described as "T2".

In addition, as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, if the out-of-order (including the spilled eyes of the push order small winning combination), the 1-card combination, the 10-card combination, the replay, or the bonus can be selected, any of the internal lottery Even in the case of a result, the medal may be guided to the hopper when the medal is inserted at the moment when the last stop switch is released.

In this case, payout processing (process of giving medals to the player), automatic betting processing (automatic betting processing when the replay symbol combination is displayed), or display freeze processing (bonus) executed after the last stop switch is released. T1 including the processing time of (freeze processing after displaying the symbol combination) is made shorter than T2 (T1 <T2).

With this configuration, the medal insertion timing guided to the hopper when the medal is inserted is the same regardless of the result of the internal lottery, and the game is executed without disturbing the tempo of the player's game. Can be done.

In addition, in the game resulting from the internal lottery having a 10-card combination, if the last stop switch is pressed (operation is accepted) and then the pressing is continued, "press the last stop switch → last reel". Stops → pays out 10 game medals. " That is, instead of paying out the game medal based on the stopped symbol combination by releasing the stop switch, pressing the stop switch (accepting the operation) causes the game medal based on the stopped symbol combination. It may be configured to execute the payout, and in such a configuration, the medal is guided to the hopper when the medal is inserted at the moment when the stop switch is pressed (the operation is accepted). You may.

In addition, as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, the loss (including the spilled part of the push order small combination), the loss, or the loss when the 1-card combination, 10-card combination, replay, or bonus is configured to be selectable. When the one-card combination is selected, the medal may be guided to the hopper when the medal is inserted at the moment when the last stop switch is released.

In this case, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch including the processing time of the payout process (process of giving one medal to the player) executed after the last stop switch is released is turned off. T1a, which is the time from the moment until the blocker is turned on, is made shorter than T2 (T1a <T2), automatic bet processing (automatic bet processing when the replay symbol combination is displayed), or display freeze processing (bonus symbol combination is displayed). T1b, which is the time from the moment the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch including the processing time of the freeze processing after the operation is turned off until the blocker is turned on, is made longer than T2 (T1b> T2) ).

This is when the number of medals to be paid out is 1 and 10 when the medals are inserted at the moment when the last stop switch is released in the result of all internal lottery. Even so, the same time design is used, so that time is lost when the number of payouts is one. Therefore, by configuring T1a <T2 only when the number of payouts is one and the processing is shorter than that (no payout), time loss can be reduced and the player's playing time can be shortened. it can.

In addition, as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, when the out-of-order (including the spilled eyes of the push order small winning combination), the 1-card combination, the 10-card combination, the replay, or the bonus can be selected, the internal lottery by the internal lottery means As a result, the selection probability of the out-of-card or 1-card combination is designed to be higher than the selection probability of the 10-card combination, replay, or bonus. Then, the medal may be guided to the hopper when the medal is inserted at the moment when the last stop switch is released only when the medal is removed or the one-card combination is selected.

This is an event with a high probability of encounter (a role with a high probability of winning) while the player is playing, and by designing T1 <T2 for the result of the internal lottery in which the processing time of the winning process is short. Considering within the business hours of the amusement park, it is possible to efficiently execute the number of games.

As a specific example of the above-mentioned T1 and T2, when the average speed when the medal (diameter 25 mm, weight 5 g) is inserted from the medal insertion slot and then passes through the selector is set to about 0.6 mm / ms, the medal When the medal inserted into the insertion slot is guided by the hopper, the distance from the medal insertion slot to reach the blocker is designed to be about 60 mm, and the time from the medal insertion slot to reach the blocker is designed to be about 90 ms. When designed in this way, it is desirable to design T2 to be 90 ms and T1 to be less than 90 ms, but the design is not limited to this, and T2 can be adjusted by adjusting the distance in the selector and the speed at which the medal passes through the selector. It is conceivable that the design value changes and the design value of T1 is changed accordingly.

In addition, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, it accepts the operation of the start switch and is removed by the internal lottery (including the spilled eyes of the small winning medals), 1-card combination, 10-card combination, replay, or When the bonus is won, as described above, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the final stop operation detects the operation of the stop switch and accepts the operation of the stop switch, and then the stop switch sensor corresponding to the final stop operation is the stop switch. It was explained that when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot at the timing when the operation of is no longer detected, the state of the blocker when the medal reaches the blocker is ON, but the start switch sensor is the start switch. By detecting the operation of, the operation of the start switch is accepted, and it is lost by the internal lottery (including the spilled eyes of the push order small role), the 1-card role, 10-card role, replay, or bonus is won, and the turning body If a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot at the timing when the rotation start process (process for rotating all reels) is started, the state of the blocker when the medal reaches the blocker is OFF, so at that timing. Even if the stop switch is operated the earliest by design after the medal is inserted, the medal reaches the blocker before the blocker is turned on, and the medal is guided to the outside of the game machine (receiver). ..

<Configuration related to reel unit applicable to this example>
The reel unit R008 applicable to this example will be described with reference to FIG. The reel unit R008 is mainly composed of a reel frame R001, a left reel R002, a middle reel R003, and a right reel R004. With respect to the reel frame R001, the left reel R002, the middle reel R003, and the right reel R004 are reel lower screws. It is fixed via R006. Then, after the reel unit R008 is installed on the reel mounting portion of the housing, the upper and lower parts are fixed by the reel unit lower screw R005 and the reel unit upper screw R007.

Further, each reel (left reel R002, middle reel R003, right reel R004) may be fixed to the reel frame R001 up and down. In that case, the lower reel screw R006 and the upper reel unit screw R007 may be used. Each reel may be fixed to the reel frame R001.

Further, when a reel upper screw (not shown) is provided separately from the reel unit upper screw R007 and each reel is fixed to the reel frame R001, the reel is fixed with the reel lower screw R006 and the reel upper screw (not shown). When the unit R008 is fixed to the housing, it may be configured to be fixed by the reel unit lower screw R005 and the reel unit upper screw R007.

The rightmost reel lower screw R006 in front view is more likely to transmit the impact of closing the door than other reel lower screws R006, so when the right reel lower screw R006 falls off, it will not get into the hopper. The right reel lower screw R006 is fixed to the reel unit R008, and the right reel lower screw R006 is arranged directly above the flow path leading from the hopper to the auxiliary tank. That is, if the right reel lower screw R006 comes off due to some trouble, the right reel lower screw R006 will fall into the flow path leading from the hopper to the auxiliary tank.

As a result, failure of the hopper caused by the right reel lower screw R006 entering the hopper can be suppressed, and when the right reel lower screw R006 falls off, it flows into the auxiliary tank, so that the right reel lower screw R006 You can reduce the chance of loss.

Further, the reel unit upper screw R007 on the far right side in the front view is also more likely to fall off because the impact due to the door closing is more easily transmitted than the other reel unit upper screws R007. Therefore, the width of the space generated in the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001 so as not to enter the inside of the reel unit R008 when the right reel unit upper screw R007 falls off (corresponding to A in FIG. 52). Is shorter than the length of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (corresponding to B in FIG. 52) (relationship in which A and B in FIG. 52 are A <B). With this configuration, when the right reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, it is possible to prevent it from entering the inside of the reel unit R008.

The above relationship is not limited to the right reel, but is also common to the middle reel and the left reel. The ease with which the reel unit upper screw comes off differs depending on the reel unit upper screw, but the reel unit upper screw actually After falling off, all reels and the upper screw of the reel unit will have the same configuration and effect.

As a result, when the right reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, it can be prevented from entering the inside of the reel unit R008. If the upper screw R007 of the right reel unit gets inside the reel unit R008, it affects the rotation of the reel (the upper screw R007 of the right reel unit damages the reel or hinders the rotation operation of the reel. Therefore, it is necessary to immediately take out the reel unit upper screw R007 from the inside of the reel unit R008, but since the reel unit R008 is fixed to the housing, the reel unit R008 is removed from the housing to perform the work. You will have to. In this way, when the reel unit upper screw R007 on the right side enters the inside of the reel unit R008, it takes a long time to restart the game. Therefore, in this example, the reel unit upper screw R007 is the reel unit. It is configured so that it does not easily get inside the R008.

Further, the length of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the lateral direction (corresponding to C in FIG. 52) may be longer than the width A of the space generated in the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008.

In the state where each reel is installed in the reel unit R008, the front part (the part closest to the player) of each reel is on the front side rather than the front part (the part closest to the player) of the reel frame R001. When the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, the reel unit upper screw R007 comes into contact with the upper surface of the reel. When the reel unit upper screw R007 comes into contact with the upper surface of the reel, the reel unit upper screw R007 may bounce off and enter the inside of the reel unit R008, and may go behind the reel unit R008. In particular, if the reel unit upper screw R007 comes into contact with the upper surface of the reel when the reel is rotating in the reverse direction (the reel rotates from the bottom to the top), the possibility of bouncing further behind the reel unit R008 increases. In order to prevent such a situation, according to the above-described configuration, it is difficult for the reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008.

The width of the space created in the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001 (corresponding to A in FIG. Even when the length of the upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (corresponding to B in FIG. 52) is shorter (relationship in which A and B in FIG. 52 are A <B), the reel unit upper screw R007 is the reel unit. There is a possibility that it will get inside R008. Even in this case, the reel R002 is configured so as not to be damaged by the rotation of the reel R002 with the upper screw R007 of the reel unit inserted inside the reel unit R008.

FIG. 53 is a view of the reel unit R008 as viewed from the right side. The reel R002 is attached to the reel unit R008, the reel unit R008 is fixed to the housing, and the front panel R013 is closed.

If the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and enters the inside of the reel unit R008 in this state, the fallen reel unit upper screw R007 rolls on the reel R002. The reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 are provided below the highest apex of the reel R002, and the vertical lengths of the openings of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010. Since (corresponding to E and F in FIG. 53) is configured to be longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to B in FIG. 53), the upper part of the reel unit that has rolled on the reel R002 The screw R007 is discharged to the outside of the reel unit R008 from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 or the reel unit rear lower opening R010 (configured so as to be easily discharged). As a result, the reel unit upper screw R007 does not remain inside the reel unit R008, so that damage to the reel R002 can be prevented.

Regarding the lengths of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010, the length in the lateral direction is also longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to B in FIG. 53). Therefore, the reel unit upper screw R007 is configured to be easily discharged from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

Further, the size of the opening of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 may be larger, and if B <E and B <F hold, B <E <F, B <. Either F <E or B <E = F may be used. The B and F may be the length of the opening of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 in the vertical direction, may be the length in the horizontal direction, or may be the area.

Further, the shortest distance between the front portion of the reel R002 and the front panel R013 (corresponding to D in FIG. 53) is longer than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007. As a result, when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off in front of the reel, it falls downward without being pinched between the reel R002 and the front panel R013, so that the reel unit upper screw does not easily damage the reel R002 when it falls. Become. In particular, when the reel R002 is rotating, a strong force is applied. Therefore, even if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off in such a case, the reel unit upper screw is less likely to damage the reel R002 and the reel R002 is rotated. It can be configured so as not to interfere.

Further, the relationship between the frontmost portion of each reel and the frontmost portion of the hopper installed at the bottom of the housing is that the frontmost portion of each reel protrudes forward from the frontmost portion of the hopper. Even if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and rolls in front of the reel unit R008 and is guided toward the lower part of the housing, it is difficult to enter the hopper. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the hopper from breaking down due to the reel unit upper screw R007 entering the hopper.

A central display board R011 is attached to the rear of the front panel R013. The central display board R011 is controlled by the main control board, and various front side main control devices (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, etc.) attached to the front surface of the front panel R013. It controls the display of the medal insertion possible lamp, the credit number indicator, the payout number indicator) and the rear side main control device (set value indicator) attached to the rear surface of the front panel R013.

A central display board protection cover R012 that protects the central display board R011 is attached to the central display board R011. The central display board protective cover R012 is made of a transparent resin to ensure the visibility of the central display board R011.

The upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 is inclined downward toward the rear. When the front panel R013 is closed, the shortest distance between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 (corresponding to G in FIG. 54) is from the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007. Is also getting longer (relationship of B <G).

With these configurations, when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and rolls forward, the center display board R011 is protected by the center display board protection cover R012, so that the reel unit upper screw R007 is the center display board R011. It is possible to prevent the reel unit from being damaged, and because the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 is inclined, it is possible to guide the reel unit upper screw R007 downward, and the reel R002 and the central display are displayed. Since the shortest distance G from the upper part of the board protection cover R012 is longer than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007, the reel unit upper screw R007 guides the reel R002 downward without damaging the reel R002. It becomes possible.

Further, the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship of B> G), but the reel R002 and the central display board. The shortest distance G from the upper part of the protective cover R012 may be longer than the length C in the lateral direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship of C <G). In this case, since the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007, it may be pinched, but the reel unit upper screw R007 Since it is longer than the length C in the lateral direction, it is possible to suppress the possibility of being pinched. Therefore, even when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, the reel unit upper screw R007 is less likely to damage the reel R002, and the reel unit upper screw R007 can be guided to the lower side of the housing while preventing damage.

Further, the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the center display board protection cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship of B> G), and the reel R002 and the center display board protection. The shortest distance G from the upper part of the cover R012 may be shorter than the length C in the lateral direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (relationship of C> G). In this case, when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, the reel unit upper screw R007 is sandwiched between the reel R002 and the center display board protection cover R012 and stops, so that the reel unit upper screw R007 can be visually recognized from the closed door state and the reel unit. It becomes easy to see that the upper screw R007 has fallen off, and the whereabouts of the reel unit upper screw R007 can be visually recognized, so that the reel unit upper screw R007 can be easily recovered.

Further, a plurality of reel unit rear upper opening R009 and reel unit rear lower opening R010 may be provided corresponding to each reel. That is, the rear of the left reel is provided with the left upper rear opening of the reel unit and the left lower opening rear of the reel unit, and the rear of the middle reel is provided with the upper rear opening of the reel unit and the lower rear opening of the reel unit. A right reel unit rear upper opening and a reel unit rear lower opening right are provided behind the right reel. With such a configuration, the reel unit upper rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 corresponding to the dropout of the reel unit upper screw R007 corresponding to each reel are provided, and any reel unit upper screw R007 is provided. Can be discharged to the outside of the reel unit R008 from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 or the reel unit rear lower opening R010 even if the reel unit falls off and enters the inside rear of the reel unit R008.

Further, the rear side of the reel unit R008 may have a full opening. In such a configuration, even if the reel unit upper screw R007 rolls to the inner rear of the reel unit R008, the rear of the reel unit R008 is not closed, so that the reel unit upper screw R007 is inside the reel unit R008. It is discharged to the outside of the reel unit R008 without being pinched.

<Structure related to display of instruction information applicable to this example>
In the advantageous section, the AT lottery is executed as a process related to the instruction function, and when the AT lottery is won and the AT is in a playable state, the first stop left reel correct answer and the second stop as a result of the internal lottery. When the correct push order combination of the middle reels (hereinafter referred to as left middle right push order combination) is won, a process for notifying the player of the push order corresponding to the left middle right push order combination is executed. In addition, when the left middle right push order combination is operated in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination (may be composed of a plurality of symbol combinations) is always displayed, and an advantageous payout (for example, 10 cards) is given to the player. If the game is operated in the order of incorrect answering, the correct answer symbol combination (which may be composed of a plurality of symbol combinations) is not displayed and the player cannot be given an advantageous payout (in other words, the incorrect answer symbol). The combination is displayed and a disadvantageous payout (for example, one piece) is given to the player, or the out-of-design combination is displayed and the payout is not given to the player).

The notification process when the left middle right push order is won is roughly divided into four notification means to execute notification. The first is an instruction monitor (the pressing order is displayed by the acquired number display 27 shown in FIG. 21), the second is a liquid crystal (display device 32 shown in FIG. 21), and three. The eyes are lamps (left operation instruction lamp 24a, middle operation instruction lamp 24b, and right operation instruction lamp 24c shown in FIG. 21), and the fourth is a speaker (speaker S shown in FIG. 21).

The instruction monitor has the above-mentioned contents, and the main control means notifies the pressing order by using the 7-segment display. The instruction monitor executes dynamic lighting control. Digit 1 is a stored number display LED (upper digit) and ratio display LED (1000th digit), and digit 2 is a stored number display LED (lower digit) and ratio. The display LED (100th digit), the digit 3 is the acquired number display LED (upper digit) and the ratio display LED (10th digit), and the digit 4 is the acquired number display LED (lower digit) and the ratio display LED. (1st digit) and the advantageous section display LED, and the digit 5 is an input number display LED, a game start display LED, an input display LED, a re-game display LED, and a setting display LED. Since the instruction monitor in the present embodiment is also used as the acquired number display, it is displayed at the time of digit 4 (when "=" is displayed, it is displayed at the time of digit 3).

The lighting of each digit is switched for each interrupt process, and when the digit 4 is turned on next, it is after 5 interrupts (after 11.175 ms). That is, each interrupt lights a different part. Since it is blinking at high speed, it can be made to appear to the player as being always lit due to the afterimage.

When the push order is notified by the liquid crystal, in the situation where all the reels are rotating when the left middle right push order is won in the advantageous section, the image is displayed as "123", and then the left stop switch is turned on. After the operation, the image is displayed as "_23" (_ is blank), and then, after the middle stop switch is operated, the image is displayed as "__3" (_ is blank). Also, when "123" is displayed to emphasize the information corresponding to the stop switch to be operated now, the player can understand by displaying "1" larger than "2" and "3". It is easy to inform. Similarly, for "_23" and "__3", the image display corresponding to the stop button to be operated at present is displayed in a large size. In addition, when the left stop switch is operated in the situation where the image is displayed as "123" and the image is displayed as "_23" (_ is blank), the image display corresponding to the left stop button is displayed. It will change from "1" to blank, but in this case, it may be configured to accompany an effect (for example, a bursting effect) when erasing the image of "1".

In addition, the liquid crystal is controlled by the sub control board, and when the sub control board receives the push order information command regarding the left, middle, and right push order transmitted from the main control board, the command is acquired by the reception interrupt process. If the command acquired by the command analysis process of the main loop processing of the sub control board is analyzed and the result of the command analysis is determined to be a push order command, the image data related to the corresponding push order is acquired from the image table and the liquid crystal is controlled. The image control board executes the drawing process by transmitting the acquired image data command to the image control board. The sub-control board and the image control board may be composed of one board, but even in this case, the control unit corresponding to the sub-control board and the control unit corresponding to the image control board are via commands. Information is being transmitted.

As for the lamp, the middle panel lamp covering the front surface of the reel and the frame lamp on the upper part of the front panel correspond to the lamp. The middle panel lamps are provided on both the top, bottom, and top and bottom of each reel, and correspond to the left reel in the situation where all reels are rotating when the left middle right push order is won in the advantageous section. The middle panel lamp L is turned on, then the middle panel lamp C corresponding to the middle reel is turned on after the left stop switch is operated, and then the middle panel lamp C corresponding to the right reel is turned on after the middle stop switch is operated. Turn on the panel lamp R. By notifying the reel to be stopped now in this way, the corresponding stop switch can be stopped. There is no problem even if the shape and the position of the middle panel lamp are changed as appropriate, and the lighting mode can also be changed. When the middle panel lamp L is lit, the lamp corresponding to the left reel is lit. It suffices if the player can recognize that the case is (the same applies to the middle panel lamp C and the middle panel lamp R).

Regarding the frame lamp, the frame lamp L on the left side of the housing, the frame lamp C on the upper center of the housing, and the frame lamp R on the right side of the housing correspond to the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch, respectively. As with the panel lamp, it is possible to notify the pressing order.

The middle panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by the sub control board, and when the sub control board receives a push order information command regarding the left, middle, and right push order transmitted from the main control board, reception interrupt processing is performed. When the command is acquired by By acquiring data and transmitting the acquired lamp lighting data command to each lamp board, the corresponding lamp board executes lighting control according to the lighting data.

As for the speaker, the upper speaker L on the upper left side of the housing, the upper speaker R on the upper right side of the housing, and the lower speaker on the lower part of the housing are provided. If the right middle right right answer push order is won, the process of outputting the voice "left" is performed from the upper speakers L and R until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. Then, after the left stop switch is made by the player, a process of outputting a voice saying "middle" is performed. Then, after the middle stop switch is made by the player, a process of outputting a voice saying "right" is performed.

The middle panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by the sub control board, and when the sub control board receives a push order information command regarding the left, middle, and right push order transmitted from the main control board, reception interrupt processing is performed. The command is acquired by the command, the command acquired by the command analysis processing of the main loop processing of the sub control board is analyzed, and if it is determined that the command is a push order command as a result of the command analysis, the corresponding audio data is acquired from the audio table. By transmitting the acquired voice data command to the voice board that controls the speaker, the voice is output from the speaker.

The interrupt processing executed on the sub control board is executed every 1 ms, and is executed at an interval shorter than the interrupt processing interval of 2.235 ms on the main control board. When a command is received from the main control board, the command is preferentially acquired by generating a reception interrupt. As a result, it is possible to control the effect without missing a command from the main control board.

(Regarding the processing of various notification means when the push order is incorrect)
Regarding the instruction monitor, in the situation where the left middle right push order is won and the push order is displayed on the instruction monitor (for example, "= 1" is displayed on the instruction monitor), the middle stop switch is first stopped. If it happens (when the stop operation is performed for a stop switch that is different from the correct pressing order), the display of the instruction monitor is continued and after the last stop switch when all reels are stopped is accepted. , The display is initialized (turns off) when the last stop switch is released. After that, if an incorrect symbol combination is displayed, "1" indicating the number of payouts is displayed. That is, when the left middle right push order is won and "= 1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the left stop switch, which is the correct answer as the first stop operation, is stopped. After that, the display of the instruction monitor maintains "= 1", and even if the middle stop switch, which is an incorrect answer as the first stop operation, is stopped, the display of the instruction monitor then changes to "= 1". maintain.

Regarding the liquid crystal, if the left middle right push order is won and the push order is displayed on the liquid crystal (for example, "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal), if the middle stop switch is stopped first, At that point, control is performed so that the full press order information on the liquid crystal is not displayed. That is, if the left middle right push order is won and "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal, and the left stop switch, which is the correct answer as the first stop operation, is stopped, then the liquid crystal is displayed. Is displayed as "_23", but if the middle stop switch, which is an incorrect answer as the first stop operation, is stopped, then all the liquid crystal displays (displays related to the pressing order) are erased. It becomes.

Regarding the lamp, the middle stop switch is stopped first in the situation where the left middle right push order is won and the push order is displayed on the lamp (for example, the middle panel lamp L is lit or the frame lamp L is lit). If this happens, do not turn on the middle panel lamp L or the frame lamp L at that time. That is, when the left middle right push order is won and the middle panel lamp L is lit (or the frame lamp L is lit), the left stop switch, which is the correct answer, is stopped as the first stop operation. In that case, the middle panel lamp C is lit (or the frame lamp C is lit) after that, while the middle stop switch, which is an incorrect answer as the first stop operation, is stopped after that. The panel lamp (or frame lamp C) will not be turned on.

Regarding the speaker, after the left middle right push order is won and the push order is notified by voice, it is not repeatedly notified, so even if the middle stop switch is stopped for the first time, a new voice is output. Do not output. That is, when the left middle right push forward combination is won and the left stop switch, which is the correct answer as the first stop operation, is stopped, the speaker outputs a voice saying "middle". On the other hand, if the middle stop switch, which is an incorrect answer, is stopped as the first stop operation, the speaker does not output the sound related to the pressing order thereafter.

(Press order notification timing based on start switch operation reception)
As a result of the internal lottery executed based on the operation reception of the start switch, the left middle right push order is won, and then the push order information is displayed on the instruction monitor as the rotation start process (acceleration process for all reels). It is conceivable to execute the display process immediately before. With such a configuration, the acceleration process is executed as the rotation start process, then the constant speed process is executed, and then the stop switch operation becomes effective. Therefore, the player presses the stop switch before operating the stop switch. Sequential information can be displayed.

Further, when the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker notify the pressing order, the notification processing cannot be executed unless the information from the main control board is received. Therefore, it is necessary to start the notification processing before the rotation cylinder rotation start processing. Specifically, after the push order combination is won, the push order command set processing is executed in the processing of the main control board, then the push order command is transmitted, and the sub control board receives the push order command. Execute.

In this way, it is better to execute the rotating cylinder rotation start processing as the processing of the main control board, which is the notification starting point on the instruction monitor, which is the starting point of the processing related to the push order notification, for various production devices (liquid crystal, lamp, or speaker). The processing timing is later than the execution of the push order command set processing as the processing of the main control board, which is the notification starting point in. However, in reality, the processing executed on the main control board has a shorter overall processing time than the processing executed on the sub control board after the push order command is sent to the sub control board, so the weight period elapses. If the start switch is operated after this is performed, the instruction monitor is configured to notify the pressing order earlier than the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker notifying the pressing order. With this configuration, the push order information managed by the most reliable main control board can be notified first, and then the push order information managed by the sub control board can be notified as supplementary information. , The player can easily recognize the push order information managed by the most reliable main control board, and the possibility that the push order becomes incorrect due to the operation of the player can be reduced.

(When the start switch is operated after the weight period has elapsed)
Next, the situation in which the start switch is operated after the weight period has elapsed and the left middle right push forward combination is won will be described in detail.

As a result of an internal lottery executed based on the reception of the start switch operated after the weight period measured from the previous game has elapsed (4.1 seconds have passed) during the advantageous section, the middle left When the right-pressed sequence is won, the command corresponding to the left-middle-right-pressed sequence is stored in the command buffer by the main loop processing of the main control board, and the command buffer is executed by the command transmission processing executed by the interrupt processing of the main control board. The command stored in is sent at any time.

After storing the command corresponding to the left middle right push order in the main loop processing of the main control board in the command buffer, it is determined whether or not the weight time has elapsed (because the weight time has already passed in this situation). When it is determined that the weight period has elapsed, the instruction number displayed on the instruction monitor is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM, and the instruction monitor lighting process executed by the interrupt process of the main control board is performed. In, the RWM address in which the instruction number is stored is acquired, and the instruction monitor is turned on. After storing the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor in the corresponding address of the RWM in the main loop process of the main control board, the process of accelerating all reels is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the lighting control of the instruction monitor is executed after the command corresponding to the left middle right push order is stored in the command buffer, the weight period has elapsed (or the rest of the weight period). In a situation where there are very few cases), the push order display on the instruction monitor can be notified before the push order display on the other sub-control board.

(If the start switch is operated before the weight period has elapsed)
Next, the situation in which the start switch is operated before the weight period elapses and the left middle right push forward combination is won will be described in detail.

If the left middle right push order is won as a result of the internal lottery executed based on the reception of the start switch operated before the weight period measured from the previous game elapses during the advantageous section. The command corresponding to the left middle right push order is stored in the command buffer by the main loop processing of the main control board, and the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted at any time by the command transmission processing executed by the interrupt processing of the main control board. To do.

After storing the command corresponding to the left middle right push order in the main loop processing of the main control board in the command buffer, it is determined whether or not the weight time has elapsed (since this situation is before the weight time has elapsed). (It is determined that the weight period has not elapsed), and then the determination process is repeatedly executed until the weight period elapses. When it is determined that the weight period has elapsed, the instruction number displayed on the instruction monitor is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM. In the instruction monitor lighting process executed by the interrupt process of the main control board, the RWM address in which the instruction number is stored is acquired and the instruction monitor is turned on. After storing the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor in the corresponding address of the RWM in the main loop process of the main control board, the process of accelerating all reels is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the lighting control of the instruction monitor is executed after the command corresponding to the left middle right push order is stored in the command buffer, if the situation is before the weight period elapses, the instruction monitor is used. It is possible to notify the push order display on another sub-control board before the push order display of.

This is because it is better to notify the display of the instruction monitor as soon as possible, but if it is too early, the expectation after the start switch is operated will be impaired (the player expects the winning role to draw the lottery about AT and the start lever. It is more interesting to notify after a certain period of time from the operation of the start switch, instead of performing the lottery related to AT immediately after operating (because it is known that the winning of the push order small role is low). It is based on being effective in improving. For this reason, the instruction monitor is configured to be displayed according to the rotation start processing (acceleration processing of all reels), but if the notification of the pressing order is too late, the pressing order will be different from the pressing order notified by the game machine. Since there is a possibility that the player operates the push order, the push order notified on the sub-control board is constant regardless of the elapse of the wait period so that the notification of the push order does not become too late at the start of the game before the elapse of the weight period. I am trying to notify at the timing.

As a process on the sub control board, when a left middle right push order command is transmitted from the main control board, it is stored in the command reception buffer of the sub control board. When the left middle right push order command is stored in the command reception buffer, reception interrupt processing occurs, the received command is analyzed, and the analyzed command is saved (in this example, the left middle right push order command is saved). ). It takes about 16 ms from receiving a command to saving the command.

When displaying the correct left, middle, and right images on the liquid crystal display, the left, middle, and right push order commands (processed commands may be sent as they are in this example) are sent to the image control board by interrupt processing on the sub control board to control the image. When the board receives the left middle right push order command, the image corresponding to the left middle right push order command is selected from the image data table stored in the image control board, and the drawing process is started. Since the drawing process in this embodiment is executed at 30 fps, the drawing speed per sheet is about 3.3 ms. Further, the period until the data saved on the sub control board (left middle right push order command) is transmitted to the image control board is 1 ms.

To execute the left correct answer notification by the lamp, select the lamp pattern corresponding to the left middle right push order command from the lamp data table stored in the sub control board, and send it to the corresponding lamp board to execute the lighting control. Let me. Alternatively, when the left middle right push order command is sent to the lamp board by interrupt processing on the sub control board and the lamp board receives the left middle right push order command, the left middle right push order is displayed from the lamp data table stored in the lamp board. Select the lamp pattern corresponding to the command and execute the lighting control. The time from selecting the lamp pattern to turning on the lamp is about 1 ms. Further, the period until the data (lamp pattern or left middle right push order command) stored on the sub control board is transmitted to the lamp board is 1 ms.

To execute left correct answer notification by the speaker, select the voice pattern corresponding to the left middle right push order command from the voice data table stored in the sub control board, and send it to the corresponding speaker board to control the voice output. Let it run. Alternatively, when the left middle right push order command is transmitted to the speaker board by interrupt processing on the sub control board and the speaker board receives the left middle right push order command, the left middle right push order is displayed from the audio data table stored in the speaker board. Select the voice pattern corresponding to the command and execute the voice output control. The time from selecting the voice pattern to outputting the voice is about 1 ms. Further, the period until the data (voice pattern or left middle right push order command) saved on the sub control board is transmitted to the speaker control board is 1 ms.

By the processing on the sub-control board side described above, the push order notification order on the sub-control board side becomes the order of the lamp, the speaker, and the liquid crystal. The notification processing timings of the lamp and the speaker are substantially the same, but due to the relationship between the speed of light and the speed of sound, the order of the lamp and the speaker is often the one that is easily recognized by the player.

With such a configuration, it is easy for the player to focus at the start of the game, and the notification by the lamp is performed at the fastest speed, and then the speaker and the liquid crystal are used, so that the pressing order can be easily understood, and the player's pressing order mistake Can be prevented.

(Pressing order notification timing based on stop switch operation reception)
As a result of the internal lottery executed by receiving the operation of the start switch, the left middle right push order combination is won, and the instruction monitor, the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker notify the information of the correct operation mode regarding the left middle right push order combination. If the correct first stop operation (in this example, the left stop switch first stop) is accepted, the display on the instruction monitor does not change, but the push order notification mode by the liquid crystal, lamp, and speaker changes. To do.

As a result of the internal lottery executed by receiving the operation of the start switch, the left middle right push order combination is won, and the instruction monitor, the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker notify the information of the correct operation mode regarding the left middle right push order combination. When the correct first stop operation (left stop switch first stop in this example) is accepted, the left stop switch reception command is stored in the command transmission buffer of the main control board. The left stop switch reception command is transmitted to the sub control board by the interrupt processing of the main control board that occurs after that. When the sub-control board receives the left stop switch reception command, it generates a reception interrupt process, analyzes the received command, and saves the analyzed command (in this example, the left stop switch reception command is saved). It takes about 16 ms from receiving a command to saving the command.

When displaying the middle second stop image (highlighting the image of "2" with "_23") by the liquid crystal, the left stop switch reception command (processed command may be used, but it is as it is in this example) by interrupt processing on the sub control board. (Send) to the image control board, and when the image control board receives the left stop switch reception command, the image corresponding to the left stop switch reception command is selected from the image data table stored in the image control board, and drawing processing is performed. To start. Since the drawing process in this embodiment is executed at 30 fps, the drawing speed per sheet is about 3.3 ms. Further, the period until the data saved on the sub control board (left stop switch reception command) is transmitted to the image control board is 1 ms.

To execute the middle second stop notification (turn off the left lamp and turn on the middle lamp) by the lamp, select the lamp pattern corresponding to the left stop switch reception command from the lamp data table stored in the sub control board. Then, it is transmitted to the corresponding lamp board to execute the lighting control. Alternatively, when the left stop switch reception command is sent to the lamp board by interrupt processing on the sub-control board and the lamp board receives the left stop switch reception command, the left stop switch reception command corresponds to the lamp data table stored in the lamp board. Select the lamp pattern to be used and execute the lighting control. The time from selecting the lamp pattern to turning on the lamp is about 1 ms. Further, the period until the data (lamp pattern or left stop switch reception command) stored on the sub control board is transmitted to the lamp board is 1 ms.

To execute the middle second stop notification (output the voice "Middle") by the speaker, select the voice pattern corresponding to the left stop switch reception command from the voice data table stored in the sub control board. Send to the corresponding speaker board to execute audio output control. Alternatively, when the left stop switch reception command is transmitted to the speaker board by interrupt processing on the sub control board and the speaker board receives the left stop switch reception command, it corresponds to the left stop switch reception command from the audio data table stored in the speaker board. Select the voice pattern to be performed and execute the voice output control. The time from selecting the voice pattern to outputting the voice is about 1 ms. Further, the period until the data (voice pattern or left stop switch reception command) saved on the sub control board is transmitted to the speaker control board is 1 ms.

By the processing on the sub-control board side described above, the push order notification order on the sub-control board side becomes the order of the lamp, the speaker, and the liquid crystal. The notification processing timings of the lamp and the speaker are substantially the same, but due to the relationship between the speed of light and the speed of sound, the lamp and the speaker may be configured in the order of being easily recognized by the player, or the speaker, the speaker. It may be configured to be in the order of the lamps.

With such a configuration, it is easy for the player to focus at the start of the second stop operation, and the notification by the lamp is performed at the fastest speed, and then the speaker and the liquid crystal are used, so that the pressing order can be easily understood, and the player's pressing can be performed. It is possible to prevent order mistakes. In this example, the configuration of the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker in the first stop operation and the second stop operation is described in detail, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third stop is also referred to as the second stop. There is no problem even if the same configuration is applied.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the buttons used for the effect such as the effect button P381 and the sub switch 20 briefly described in FIG. 1 are collectively referred to as the effect input button, and the basic structure of the effect input button is described in FIG. 57 effect input button. This will be described using an operation explanatory diagram.

The basic configuration of the effect input button 1000 is roughly divided into three parts, a push-down portion 1010, an outer wall portion 1020, and an internal structure portion 1030, and the effect input button 1000 is fixed to the game machine P as another configuration. There is also a fixed part (not shown) for this purpose and a vibration generating part (not shown) that vibrates the entire effect input button, but the description in this embodiment is omitted.

For example, the outer wall portion 1020 has an engine cylinder-like tubular structure inside, and the inner diameter portion 2022 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the push-down portion 1010 so that the piston can operate smoothly after the push-down portion 1010 is attached. It consists of dimensions. In particular, when a vibration generating portion is provided, a large clearance between the inner diameter portion 1022 and the pushing down portion 1010 is set in order to positively vibrate the pushing down portion 1010.

The push-down portion 1010 has a columnar shape whose inside is hollowed out like an engine piston, and is mainly wrapped in the inner diameter portion 1022 of the outer wall portion 1020 and combined to enable piston operation. It is composed of a push-down surface 1011 pushed down by the operation of the player, and an operation detection unit (not shown) detected by the operation detection sensor.

The internal structure portion 1030 mainly holds the push-down portion 1010 in an unoperated position, and detects the operation by a spring member (not shown) that expands and contracts by the push-down operation of the player and the push-down operation of the player. It is composed of an operation detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the unit has moved to a predetermined position, and a light emitting unit 1034 having a plurality of light sources k in order to illuminate the push-down surface 1011.

Operational explanation cross-sectional view 1 of the effect input button whose pushed-down portion is flat in FIG. 57 and operation explanatory cross-sectional view 2 of the effect input button whose pushed-down surface is curved in FIG. 58. Explaining the operation of the button 1000, the push-down surfaces 1030 and 1060 are pushed down along the inner wall surfaces 1022 and 1072 of the outer wall portions 1020 and 1070 by pushing down the push-down surfaces 1011 and 1061 by the operation of the player. And move. At this time, the distance between the light emitting parts 1034 and 1084 of the internal structure parts 1030 and 1080 and the back surfaces of the push-down surfaces 1011 and 1061 is close. Further, when the player stops the operation on the push-down surfaces 1011 and 1061, the push-down portions 1030 and 1060 are urged and held in the initial position by utilizing the repulsive force of the spring member.

In recent years, the sizes of the effect button P381 and the sub switch 20 have been gradually increased, and the effect input button 1000 having a push-down surface 1011 and 1061 having a large area and a plurality of light sources k has been adopted. However, if the size of the effect input button 1000 is increased, there is a possibility that a problem that does not occur in the normal size effect input button 1000 may occur.

First, the first possible defect will be described based on the effect input button defect explanatory diagram 1 of FIG. 59. At the lower part of the back surface of the push-down surface 1011 of the normal effect input button 1000, a light emitting portion 1034 that illuminates the entire push-down portion 1010 centered on the push-down surface 1011 is provided. Further, when the stroke of the push-down portion 1010 is long, it is necessary to sufficiently illuminate the push-down surface by the light of the light emitting portion even when the push-down operation is not performed. It is necessary to narrow the distance between the surface 1010 and the light emitting unit 1034 as much as possible. However, as the size of the effect input button 1000 increases, the area of the push-down surface 1011 increases, and when operated with a strong force, the curvature rate of the center portion of the push-down surface 1011 increases and becomes the center of the light emitting portion 1034. There is a risk of contact destruction of the mounted light source k (for example, LED).

Next, the second possible defect will be described with reference to FIG. 60 for explaining the defect of the effect input button in FIG. As a normal action, the push-down portion 1060 of the effect input button 1000 reciprocates by the operation of the player, but especially in the case of the effect input button 1000 equipped with a vibration generator, the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion 1070. Since the clearance between the 1072 and the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion 1060 is large, eccentric movement as shown in FIG. 60 may occur. At this time, the inner diameter portion 1072 of the outer wall portion 1070 may be damaged, or the light source k arranged around the light emitting portion 1084 may collide with the back surface of the push-down surface 1061 and be destroyed. In addition, in the eccentric movement, the player normally pushes down the central part of the push-down surface 1061, but the push-down part 1060 is vertical by repeatedly hitting or pushing down the pushed-down part deviating from the central part. It means that it moves diagonally instead of in a direction.

In the event that the components of the portion 1060 pushed down to the light source k and destroyed by the above-mentioned eccentric movement, once the inner diameter portion 1072 of the outer wall portion 1070 is damaged due to operational deterioration, the eccentric movement continuously occurs. Further, there is a possibility that a large number of light sources k in a wide range will be contact-destroyed due to the deterioration of the pushing mechanism.

Therefore, as a countermeasure against the malfunction of the effect input button 1000, the first is a measure to guard the event that the component touches the light source k, and the second is a light emitting state by destroying a part of the mounted light sources. It is conceivable to take measures to generate an abnormality in the above and to recognize the malfunction of the production input button mechanism at an early stage. In addition, in FIG. 60, the case where the pushing-down portion 1060 moves to the left side when viewed from the front is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the eccentricity in any direction such as the right side, the back side, and the front side. The configuration shown in the figure can be adopted for movement.

Explanatory Measures of FIG. 61 As a first countermeasure against light source destruction using FIG. 1, the central portion of the push-down surface 1011 of the push-down portion 1010 of the effect input button 1000 is curved by the operation of the player. An example of countermeasures against destroying the light source k will be described. It should be noted that this embodiment is an example, and the shape and arrangement of parts other than the main part can be changed as appropriate.

The effect input button 1000 is composed of an outer wall portion 1020, a push-down portion 1010, and an internal structure portion 1030, but is a light source that approaches the back surface of the most pushed-down surface of the light source portion 1034 that forms a part of the internal structure portion 1030. A screw n having a screw head height higher than the height of the light source is adopted in the vicinity of k. By doing so, the deformed push-down surface 1011 collides with the deformed push-down surface 1011 without colliding with the light source k. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the light source k from being destroyed while fixing the light emitting unit 1034. Further, if the protective plating of the screw n arranged in the vicinity of the light source k is a silver-colored screw n such as chrome plating, the light emission of the light source k is diffusely reflected by the screw head, and a more vivid light emission mode can be expressed.

Subsequently, an example diagram of the arrangement of the light source k mounted on the substrate 1111 of the light emitting portions 1100A and 1100B of FIG. Explanatory Measures for Avoidance Measures for light source destruction will be described based on FIG. It should be noted that this embodiment is an example, and the shape and arrangement of parts other than the main part can be changed as appropriate. Further, the substrate of the light emitting portion is described by using a film type having an extremely thin thickness as an example, and the notation in the thickness direction is omitted in the drawings. Of course, a conventional glass epoxy resin may be used for the substrate of the light emitting part of the present implementation.

The light emitting portions 1100A and 1100B have the same shape as the pushed-down surface 1061 as the outer shape of the substrate, and are mainly provided at the central portion and the peripheral portion of the substrate as the arrangement positions of the light source k. Further, as a method of fixing the light emitting units 1100A and 1100B, fixing by a positioning boss b and a screw n is used. At this time, the screw n and the boss b are provided in the vicinity of the light source k. In particular, in the case of the light source k arranged on the peripheral edge portion, the positioning fixing means is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the light source k. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the light source k from being destroyed at the component portion of the push-down portion 1060 due to the eccentric movement caused by the player pushing down the peripheral portion of the push-down surface 1061.

Further, an example of structural modification of the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion 1300 of FIG. 64 and an example of structural modification of the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion 1200 in contact with the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion will be described. In this embodiment, the convex rail r having a semicircular cross section provided on the outer diameter portion 1262 of the push-down portion 1200 and the concave rail h having a semicircular cross section provided on the inner diameter portion 1372 of the outer wall portion 1300. The explanation will be given with an example in which the above are combined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the structure has the same effect.

As a modification example of the effect input button 1000, a semicircular concave rail h is provided in the 0 o'clock direction, the 3 o'clock direction, the 6 o'clock direction, and the 9 o'clock direction when the inner diameter portion 1372 of the outer wall portion 1300 is viewed from a plane. , The cross section of the inner diameter portion 1372 continuous in the vertical direction forms a crescent-shaped concave shape. Further, the outer diameter portion 1262 of the push-down portion 1200 is provided with a semicircular convex rail r in the 0 o'clock direction, the 3 o'clock direction, the 6 o'clock direction, and the 9 o'clock direction when viewed from a plane, and the outer diameter portion is provided. The cross section of 1262 continuous in the vertical direction forms a crescent-shaped convex rib shape. By arranging these configurations together, eccentric movement is less likely to occur, and even if eccentric movement occurs, eccentricity in the 0 o'clock direction, 3 o'clock direction, 6 o'clock direction, and 9 o'clock direction in which each rail shape is applied. The frequency of movement increases.

With such a configuration, if the boss b for fixing the substrate 1111 of the light source k and the screw n are arranged in the 0 o'clock direction, the 3 o'clock direction, the 6 o'clock direction, and the 9 o'clock direction, the light source k due to eccentric movement can be arranged. It is possible to efficiently prevent destruction with a small number of configurations. In this embodiment, the four concave rails h and the convex rail r have been adopted, but the settings can be appropriately changed according to the size and shape of the effect input button 1000. Further, positioning and fixing means such as a boss b for fixing the light emitting portion and a screw n are arranged at a position overlapping the portion where the concave rail h and the convex rail r are provided, and the boss b and the screw n are arranged in the vicinity or on the inner peripheral side. If the light source k is mounted (toward the center of the substrate of the light emitting portion 1100), it is possible to effectively prevent the light source from being destroyed due to the eccentric movement of the pushing portion 1060. From this, if the arrangement positions of the concave rail h and the convex rail r, the substrate fixing means of the light emitting unit 1100, and the light source mounting position are set by linking the positions, the effect input button 1000 suitable for cost can be provided.

In the above description, the boss b and the screw n have been described as examples of the substrate positioning and fixing means of the light emitting unit 1100, but the shape of the substrate 1110 of the light emitting unit 1100, the size of the substrate 1110, the mounting angle of the substrate 1110, and the occurrence of defects have occurred. Depending on the frequency, the boss b may be operated by using the substrate 1110 as a fixing means, and the portion that protects the light source k may be selected as the boss b at the time of design.

In the explanation so far, the method of preventing the destruction of the light source k due to the defect of the effect input button 1000 has been explained, but it is also considered that the destruction of the light source k cannot be prevented depending on the unique structure of the effect input button 1000 or the degree of the defect. Be done. Therefore, an embodiment in which the light irradiation ranges of the adjacent light sources k overlap each other will be described based on the explanatory view of the LED irradiation range of FIG. 65.

In FIG. 65 (A), the region w1 and the region w2 that illuminate the pressed surface by the respective light sources k are shown by solid lines and alternate long and short dash lines, respectively. As shown in the figure, the light irradiation ranges of two adjacent light sources k partially overlap and irradiate the surface with light. For example, even if one light source is destroyed, it is pushed down by the other light source k. It is possible to irradiate the surface with light and make the light emission unevenness inconspicuous. Further, FIG. 65 (B) shows regions w3, regions w4, and regions w5 that are pushed down by a plurality of light sources k arranged continuously and illuminate the surface with solid lines, alternate long and short dash lines, and alternate long and short dash lines. By overlapping and illuminating the regions that illuminate the pushed-down surface 1011 in this way, it is possible to further make the light emission unevenness due to the destruction of the light source k less noticeable. FIG. 65 (B) describes an example in which three consecutively arranged light sources k illuminate the push-down surface 1011 in three overlapping areas, but a plurality of light sources k are arranged scattered over a wide area. By doing so, it is possible to exert further effects by illuminating a wide area with other overlaps.

Next, as a second countermeasure against the malfunction of the effect input button 1000, a method of causing an abnormality in the light emitting state and recognizing a defect of the effect input button mechanism at an early stage by destroying a part of a plurality of light sources k mounted. explain. Similar to the effect input button shown in FIG. 58, the effect input button of this embodiment is a combination of the configurations of the outer wall portion, the push-down portion, and the internal component portion. However, the mounting position of the fixing means for mounting the substrate of the light emitting portion of the internal component is different, and the structure is one step lower in the vertical direction, and the substrate has a similar structure. The description of the same configuration as described above will be omitted.

Generally, for the convenience of design, a general resin is used as the material of the effect input button 1000, and a material suitable for abrasion resistance and slidability such as polyacetal resin is not used. Therefore, if a significantly large stress or a continuous stress is continuously applied in the pushing direction different from the set operating direction of the pushing-down portion 1060, a defect occurs in the structure of the effect input button 1000 and an abnormality such as eccentric movement occurs. The behavior is repeated, and if the problem progresses further, even if the push-down surface 1061 is operated due to the biting of the sliding part of the effect input button 1000, the push-down portion 1060 does not move, and the operation detection unit May develop into a serious problem such as not passing through the detection part of the operation detection sensor correctly.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a mechanical defect of the effect input button 1000 can be detected at an early stage by destroying the light source k. More specifically, the light emitting unit 1094 is replaced without knowing the cause of the defect. However, it is possible to quickly detect the game machine P which gives an unpleasant impression to the player due to the phenomenon that the light source is repeatedly destroyed in a short period of time and the mechanical defect of the effect input button 1000.

The process of defect detection will be described with reference to the light source destruction explanatory diagram due to the eccentric movement of the effect input button 1000 of FIG. The outer shape of the light emitting portion 1094 has the same shape as the pushed-down surface, and is provided mainly at the central portion and the peripheral portion of the substrate as the arrangement position of the light source. Further, as a method of fixing the light emitting unit 1094, fixing by a positioning boss b and a screw n is used, but the boss b and the screw n are provided at a position one step lower than the surface on which the light source k is provided. By doing so, the light source k is destroyed at the constituent portion of the push-down portion 1060 by the eccentric movement caused by the player pushing down the peripheral portion of the push-down surface.

With such a configuration, it is possible to detect a mechanical defect of the effect input button 1000 at an early stage. Further, if one light source k is destroyed, a plurality of surrounding light sources may not emit light. In addition, by making the light source k's light emission pattern and lighting pattern the same, it is possible to easily detect that the light source k has been destroyed because the light source k, which should have been lit, is not lit. You may go.

Further, the appearance frequency / execution frequency of the light emission patterns having the same lighting pattern may be set to be the highest. By doing so, the game hall manager can detect a mechanical defect of the effect input button 1000 at an early stage without touching the effect input button 1000. Further, by adopting the above-mentioned convex rail r and concave rail h, the location where damage is expected can be limited, and the light source k corresponding to the location where damage is expected can be replaced with a socket type light source having a relatively low unit price. By combining the possible structure, not only can the defect of the effect input button 1000 be detected at an early stage, but also the light emitting unit 1094 can be easily recycled, and the light source k can be replaced without notifying the police station in charge of change approval. be able to.

(Part 1) Regarding the above-mentioned problem of the effect input button, the configuration to be solved is as follows.
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and holding the push-down portion in a predetermined position, and a spring member.
A light emitting part having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the push-down part, and a light emitting part.
A detection unit that detects the detection target unit and
It is a button unit equipped with at least
The push-down surface and the light emitting portion are configured so that the distance is reduced by the push-down operation.
The substrate is locked by fixing means and
It is characterized in that the push-down operation is executed with respect to the push-down surface, and when the fixing means is contacted, the push-down surface and the light source are not in contact with each other.
For more details,
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and holding the push-down portion in a predetermined position, and a spring member.
A light emitting part having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the push-down part, and a light emitting part.
A detection unit that detects the detection target unit and
It is a button unit equipped with at least
The push-down surface and the light emitting portion are configured so that the distance is reduced by the push-down operation.
When a large stress acts on the push-down surface operated by the player, when the central portion of the push-down surface is deformed, the push-down surface is the first of the parts constituting the light emitting portion. It is characterized in that the contact with the back side is a fixing means of the substrate having a height direction larger than that of the light source.
As an effect, it is possible to prevent the light source from being destroyed because the push-down surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source.

(Part 2) Regarding the above-mentioned problem of the effect input button, the configuration to be solved is summarized as follows.
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
The push-down surface and the light emitting portion are configured so that the distance between them is narrowed by the push-down operation.
The substrate has a positioning portion and
The push-down operation is performed on the push-down surface, and when the positioning portion is contacted, the push-down surface and the light source are not in contact with each other. A push-down surface that allows the player to slide and move by means of a push-down surface that allows the player to come into direct contact with the push-down portion, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
The push-down surface and the light emitting portion are configured so that the distance between them is narrowed by the push-down operation, and the push-down surface operated by the player is pushed down by excessive stress. When the central portion of the surface is deformed, it is the positioning means of the substrate that is larger in the height direction than the light source that comes into contact with the back side of the pushed-down surface first among the parts constituting the light emitting portion. It is a feature.
As an effect, it is possible to prevent the light source from being destroyed because the push-down surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source.

(Part 3) Regarding the above-mentioned problem of the effect input button, the configuration to be solved is as follows.
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the peripheral portion of the substrate of the light emitting portion, and a means for fixing the substrate having a height direction larger than that of the light source is provided on a portion outside the virtual line connecting the plurality of mounted light sources. ,
The substrate is locked by fixing means and
It is characterized in that the push-down operation is executed with respect to the push-down surface, and when the fixing means is contacted, the back surface of the push-down surface and the light source are not in contact with each other.
As an effect, when the push-down part causes eccentric movement, in order to prevent the push-down part and the light source of the light emitting part from coming into contact with each other, a substrate fixing means is placed on the outer peripheral side of the light source. It is possible to prevent damage to the.

(Part 4) Regarding the above-mentioned problem of the effect input button, the configuration to be solved is summarized as follows.
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
The substrate has a positioning portion and
The push-down operation is executed with respect to the push-down surface, and when the positioning portion is contacted, the push-down surface and the light source are not in contact with each other.
For more details,
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
The substrate has a positioning portion, and a plurality of light sources are mounted on the peripheral portion of the substrate of the light emitting portion, and the height is higher than the light source in a portion further outside the virtual line connecting the mounted plurality of light sources. It is characterized in that a positioning means for the substrate having a large direction is provided.
As an effect, when the push-down part causes eccentric movement, in order to prevent the push-down part and the light source of the light-emitting part from coming into contact with each other, a fixing means is placed on the outer peripheral side of the light source to prevent the light source. It is possible to prevent damage.

(Part 5) Regarding the above-mentioned problem of the effect input button, the configuration to be solved is as follows.
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
The substrate is locked by fixing means and
When the push-down operation is executed with respect to the push-down surface and the light source comes into contact with the light source, the back surface of the push-down surface and the fixing means are not in contact with each other.
For more details,
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and the distance between the back surface of the push-down surface and the fixing means arrangement position of the substrate is the distance between the arrangement positions of the plurality of light sources and the back surface of the push-down surface. It is characterized in that it is set at a distant position.
As an effect, when the push-down part causes eccentric movement, the push-down part and the light source of the light-emitting part come into contact with each other, and the light source does not emit light. Can be converted.

(Part 6) Regarding the above-mentioned problem of the effect input button, the configuration to be solved is summarized as follows.
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and the substrate has a plurality of types of light emission patterns implemented by the plurality of light sources.
Among the light emission patterns executed in a predetermined game time, the ratio of the plurality of light sources being executed in the same light emission pattern is the highest.
As an effect, when a problem occurs due to the destruction of the light source, it can be easily found when the adjacent light sources and the light emission pattern are the same. Therefore, if the same light emission pattern as that of the adjacent light source is performed many times, a defect of the light source can be detected at an early stage.

(7) Regarding the above-mentioned problem of the effect input button, the configuration to be solved is summarized as follows.
A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A light emitting portion having a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and maintaining the pushing portion in a predetermined position, and a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the pushing portion, and the detection. A button unit having at least a detection unit for detecting a target unit.
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and the light source is mounted so that the light irradiation ranges of the plurality of light sources always overlap with adjacent light sources.
The effect is that when a problem occurs due to the destruction of the light source, the light irradiation range of the adjacent light source overlaps with the light source in which the problem occurred, so that when all lights are turned on, a part of the light irradiation part becomes dark. Can be reduced.
<Sixth Embodiment>

Next, the transmission mechanism of the vibration generated from the vibration device provided in the effect button of the pachinko gaming machine will be described.

The configuration in which the button effect can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine will be described in detail below. Here, the button effect in the pachinko gaming machine is to display an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the effect button at a predetermined timing during the symbol change, and the button validity period during which the operation promotion image is being displayed. Predetermined operation for the effect button (single press operation that turns on → off within 0.3 seconds, long press operation that turns on → off for 0.3 seconds or more, on → off within 0.3 seconds By executing the repeated hitting operation, etc.), a series of post-operation effects (such as the effect that suggests the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation by the content of the character's dialogue and the color of the characters) is executed as a button effect. It is called. If the predetermined operation for the effect button is not executed during the button validity period and the button validity period ends, the post-operation effect may not be executed, or at the end timing of the button validity period. It may be configured to execute the effect after the operation. Further, the button valid period may be set even during the period when the operation promotion image is not displayed (a button effect that does not display the operation promotion image may be executed).

Here, in the predetermined button effect described in detail in this example, the effect button vibrates while the operation promotion image is being displayed (or the button is valid period), and the player is effective in operating the effect button. It is an effect mode to notify that. In this embodiment, the predetermined button effect will be referred to as effect A.

In this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect button is accepted, the vibration of the effect button continues for a certain period of time. Further, the magnitude of vibration is determined by the magnitude of displacement of vibration (width of displacement), the speed of vibration, the acceleration of displacement of vibration, etc., but in this embodiment, which of the different members is used. We will only mention whether the magnitude of the displacement of the degree vibration is transmitted. The magnitude of the displacement is, for example, the width between the state of being positioned at the top and the state of being positioned at the bottom when the effect A is executed and the effect button vibrates up and down. The direction of vibration is not limited to the vertical direction, and the maximum width in any linear direction may be the magnitude of displacement.

In the present embodiment, the effect button vibrates when the effect A is executed, and the displacement of the vibration of the effect button is 1 cm.

When playing with a pachinko machine, the player will play while touching the steering wheel, but if the displacement of the vibration of the production button is transmitted to the steering wheel without being attenuated, the player's firing strength can be controlled. The game ball is fired at an unintended firing strength, which may result in unexpected loss.

In FIG. 67, a component (front member) connecting the effect button and the handle operated by the player is connected.
Furthermore, when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front, in a straight line from the effect button to the handle, there is a substantially right angle and a substantially curved shape between the place where the effect button of the front member is connected and the place where the handle is connected. Neither shape is included, and vibration can be transmitted linearly.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm as described above.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the front member, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the front member is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front member to the handle, which is a member different from the front member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.8 cm.
In this way, when the vibration of the effect button is transmitted through only one component from the effect button to the handle, a large vibration is transmitted. Therefore, in this example, the configuration of the game machine in which the vibration generated in the effect button is difficult to be transmitted to the handle will be described in detail below.

In FIG. 68, the parts connecting the effect button and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws. ..
When the pachinko machine is viewed from the front, the upper plate, the upper member, and the lower member do not include any shape of substantially right angle or substantially curved in the straight line from the effect button to the handle.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the upper plate, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member becomes 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws, so that the vibration is transmitted. It is damped and the vibration displacement in the lower member is 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by screws like the upper member and the lower member in the figure, the vibration is also attenuated by the screws, so that the case where the two different members are joined is more than the case where the two different members are joined. Can also dampen vibrations. In addition, when the connection method of two different members is not mentioned like the upper plate and the upper member in the figure, it is assumed that they are joined by a linear joint.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.2 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are passed from the effect button to the handle, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is inserted from the effect button to the handle. it can.
If the vibration transmitted to the steering wheel is small, it is difficult for the player to affect the firing operation, and it is possible to create a gaming machine in which the strength of the steering wheel is unlikely to be changed due to the execution of the button effect. ..

In FIG. 69, the parts connecting the effect button and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by a fitting type. There is. The inset type means that, as described in the dotted circle in the figure, at least a part of the joint is an inset type so that the joint of two different members is not released even if a force is applied in one direction. Is.
When the pachinko machine is viewed from the front, the upper plate, the upper member, and the lower member do not include any shape of substantially right angle or substantially curved in the straight line from the effect button to the handle.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the upper plate, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member becomes 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the upper member and the lower member are connected by a fitting type, so that the vibration is transmitted. Is attenuated, and the displacement of vibration in the lower member becomes 0.2 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by a fitting type like the upper member and the lower member in the figure, the fitting type joint is used as compared with the linear joint as shown in FIG. 69. Further, since the vibration is damped, the vibration can be damped more than when two different members are joined (when the joint is on a straight line).

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.1 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are passed from the effect button to the handle, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is inserted from the effect button to the handle. it can.
If the vibration transmitted to the steering wheel is small, it is difficult for the player to affect the firing operation, and it is possible to create a gaming machine in which the strength of the steering wheel is unlikely to be changed due to the execution of the button effect. ..

In FIG. 70, the parts connecting the effect button and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws. ..
When the pachinko machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the effect button to the handle, the upper plate and the upper member do not include any shape of substantially right angle or substantially curved, and the lower member includes a shape of approximately right angle. ..

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the upper plate, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member becomes 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws, so that the vibration is transmitted. It is damped and the vibration displacement in the lower member is 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by screws like the upper member and the lower member in the figure, the vibration is also attenuated by the screws, so that the case where the two different members are joined is more than the case where the two different members are joined. Can also dampen vibrations.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and further, since the lower member includes a substantially right-angled shape, the lower member is vibrated. When is transmitted, it cannot be transmitted linearly, and the vibration is more attenuated than when it can be transmitted linearly, and the displacement of the vibration at the handle is 0.15 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are passed from the effect button to the handle, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is inserted from the effect button to the handle. it can.
If the vibration transmitted to the steering wheel is small, it is difficult for the player to affect the firing operation, and it is possible to create a gaming machine in which the strength of the steering wheel is unlikely to be changed due to the execution of the button effect. ..

In FIG. 71, the parts connecting the effect button and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws. ..
When the pachinko machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the effect button to the handle, the upper plate and the upper member do not include any shape of substantially right angle or substantially curved, and the lower member includes a shape of substantially curvature. ..

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the upper plate, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member becomes 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws, so that the vibration is transmitted. It is damped and the vibration displacement in the lower member is 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by screws like the upper member and the lower member in the figure, the vibration is also attenuated by the screws, so that the case where the two different members are joined is more than the case where the two different members are joined. Can also dampen vibrations.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the lower member includes a substantially curved shape, so that the shape is substantially curved. The vibration is more damped and the displacement of the vibration at the handle is 0.12 cm than when it is not included.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are passed from the effect button to the handle, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is inserted from the effect button to the handle. it can.
If the vibration transmitted to the steering wheel is small, it is difficult for the player to affect the firing operation, and it is possible to create a gaming machine in which the strength of the steering wheel is unlikely to be changed due to the execution of the button effect. ..

Other configurations that attenuate vibration (attenuate vibration displacement) are not shown, but parts (metal, etc.) made of different materials are provided between the effect button and the handle operated by the player. If so, the vibration is further damped. As an example, it is better to connect the effect button to the handle with plastic, metal, or plastic parts than when the effect button vibrates and the effect button is connected to the handle with plastic, plastic, or plastic parts. The vibration transmitted to is weak. That is, since one or a plurality of different parts are made of different materials such as metal, the vibration transmitted to the handle can be further damped. Further, by making one or more parts between the effect button and the handle metal, electromagnetic waves can be prevented, and the influence of electromagnetic waves on various substrates can be reduced.

Due to the effect, the vibration is transmitted to the handle when the effect button is vibrated, and if the strength of the handle is shaken, the ball to be launched is shaken, which is disadvantageous to the player.
It is possible to attach a vibration absorber to the device that vibrates the effect button, but the cost is high and the structure may become large.
In the present application, the structure of the effect button is not enlarged, vibration is difficult to be transmitted to the handle, and the invention is made to maximize the effect without giving a disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 72 is a table summarizing the values of vibration displacement when one or a plurality of configurations capable of attenuating the transmission of vibration displacement described above are adopted. The values of vibration displacement are shown in the figure, and the following configurations can be considered as a method of attenuating the transmission of vibration displacement, taking into consideration the shape, design, cost, etc. of the desired gaming machine. , May be combined as appropriate.

<Structure that attenuates vibration displacement>
(1) Shape of joint part: screwing, fitting (2) Increasing the number of parts from the effect button to the handle (3) Shape of member: Partially right angle, partly curved (4) Material such as metal <7th embodiment>

Next, the transmission mechanism of the vibration generated from the vibration device provided in the effect button in the slot machine will be described.

In the sixth embodiment, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the effect A accompanied by the vibration of the effect button as the button effect has been described in detail, but the configuration can also be applied to the rotating body type gaming machine. Here, the button effect in the rotating cylinder type game machine is to display an operation promotion image that urges the player to operate the effect button at a predetermined timing during reel rotation or when the reel is stopped, and display the operation promotion image. Predetermined operation for the effect button during the button validity period (single press operation that turns on → off within 0.3 seconds, long press operation that turns on → off for 0.3 seconds or more, within 0.3 seconds By executing the on-to-off operation of multiple hits, etc.), the post-operation effect (the content of the character's dialogue and the color of the characters, the bonus is won, the AT is executed, and ART A series of productions in which (such as an production that suggests the degree of expectation that is executed) is executed is called a button production. When the button validity period ends without executing the predetermined operation for the effect button during the button validity period (for example, when the stop button operation, the bet button operation, or the start lever operation is accepted). The post-operation effect may not be executed, or the post-operation effect may be executed at the end timing of the button validity period. Further, the button valid period may be set even during the period when the operation promotion image is not displayed (a button effect that does not display the operation promotion image may be executed).

Here, in the predetermined button effect described in detail in this example, the effect button vibrates while the operation promotion image is being displayed (or the button is valid period), and the player is effective in operating the effect button. It is an effect mode to notify that. In this embodiment, the predetermined button effect will be referred to as effect A.

In this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect button is accepted, the vibration of the effect button continues for a certain period of time. Further, the magnitude of vibration is determined by the magnitude of displacement of vibration (width of displacement), the speed of vibration, the acceleration of displacement of vibration, etc., but in this embodiment, which of the different members is used. We will only mention whether the magnitude of the displacement of the degree vibration is transmitted. The magnitude of the displacement is, for example, the width between the state of being positioned at the top and the state of being positioned at the bottom when the effect A is executed and the effect button vibrates up and down. The direction of vibration is not limited to the vertical direction, and the maximum width in any linear direction may be the magnitude of displacement.

In the present embodiment, the effect button vibrates when the effect A is executed, and the displacement of the vibration of the effect button is 1 cm.

When playing with a rotating body type game machine, the player operates a stop button to stop the reel. Further, since the stop position of the reel may differ depending on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is received, if the displacement of the vibration of the effect button is transmitted to the stop button without being attenuated, the stop operation of the player is affected. Therefore, the operation of the stop button is accepted at an unintended timing, and there is a possibility of suffering an unexpected loss. The stop button in the configuration illustrated below may be any stop button, but the configuration of the left stop button will be illustrated as an example.

In FIG. 73, a component (front mask) connecting the effect button and the stop button operated by the player is connected.
Furthermore, when the rotating body type game machine is viewed from the front, in a straight line from the effect button to the stop button, there is a substantially right angle between the place where the effect button of the front mask is connected and the place where the stop button is connected. It does not include any of the shapes of and substantially curved, and the vibration can be transmitted linearly.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm as described above.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the front mask, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the front mask is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button, which is a member different from the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0.8 cm. Become.
As described above, when the vibration of the effect button is transmitted through only one component from the effect button to the stop button, a large vibration is transmitted. Therefore, in this example, the configuration of the gaming machine in which the vibration generated in the effect button is difficult to be transmitted to the stop button will be described in detail below.

In FIG. 74, the parts connecting the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask, stop button unit), and the control panel and the front mask are connected by screws. It is connected.
When the rotating body type game machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the effect button to the stop button, the control panel, the front mask, and the stop button unit do not include any shape of substantially right angle or substantially curved.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the control panel, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the control panel and the inside of the front mask are connected by screws. , The vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by screws as in the front mask and the stop button unit in the figure, the vibration is also damped by the screws, so the two different members are joined. Vibration can be damped more than in the case. When the connection method of the two different members is not mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joint.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a different member from the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit is increased. It becomes 0.6 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. It will be 5 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are inserted from the effect button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button is smaller than when only one component is inserted from the effect button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the stop operation of the player is less likely to be affected, and the timing of accepting the stop operation of the stop button is unlikely to shift due to the execution of the button effect. Can be created.

In FIG. 75, the parts connecting the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, in front mask, stop button unit), and the control panel and in front mask are inset type. Is connected. The inset type means that, as described in the dotted circle in the figure, at least a part of the joint is an inset type so that the joint of two different members is not released even if a force is applied in one direction. Is.
When the rotating body type game machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the effect button to the stop button, the control panel, the front mask, and the stop button unit do not include any shape of substantially right angle or substantially curved.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the control panel, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the control panel and the inside of the front mask are connected by a fitting type. , The vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.65 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by a fitting type as in the control panel and the front mask in the figure, the vibration is further damped by the fitting type joint as compared with the linear joint. Therefore, the vibration can be damped more than when two different members are joined (when the joint is on a straight line).

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a different member from the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit is increased. It becomes 0.55 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. It will be 45 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are inserted from the effect button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button is smaller than when only one component is inserted from the effect button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the stop operation of the player is less likely to be affected, and the timing of accepting the stop operation of the stop button is unlikely to shift due to the execution of the button effect. Can be created.

In FIG. 76, the parts connecting the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask, stop button unit), and the control panel and the front mask are connected by screws. It is connected.
When the rotating body type game machine is viewed from the front, the straight line from the effect button to the stop button does not include any shape of a substantially right angle or a substantially curved shape in the control panel and the front mask.
The stop button unit contains a substantially right-angled shape.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the control panel, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the control panel and the inside of the front mask are connected by screws. , The vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by screws as in the front mask and the stop button unit in the figure, the vibration is also damped by the screws, so the two different members are joined. Vibration can be damped more than in the case. When the connection method of the two different members is not mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joint.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a different member from the front mask, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the front mask contains a substantially right-angled shape. , When the vibration is transmitted through the front mask, it cannot be transmitted linearly, and the vibration is more attenuated than when it can be transmitted linearly, and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit. Becomes 0.5 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. It will be 4 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are inserted from the effect button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button is smaller than when only one component is inserted from the effect button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the stop operation of the player is less likely to be affected, and the timing of accepting the stop operation of the stop button is unlikely to shift due to the execution of the button effect. Can be created.

In FIG. 77, the parts connecting the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask, stop button unit), and the control panel and the front mask are connected by screws. It is connected.
When the rotating body type game machine is viewed from the front, the straight line from the effect button to the stop button does not include any shape of a substantially right angle or a substantially curved shape in the control panel and the front mask.
The stop button unit includes a substantially curved shape.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the effect button at this time is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the control panel, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration on the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the control panel and the inside of the front mask are connected by screws. , The vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front mask becomes 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by screws as in the front mask and the stop button unit in the figure, the vibration is also damped by the screws, so the two different members are joined. Vibration can be damped more than in the case. When the connection method of the two different members is not mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joint.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a different member from the front mask, the vibration is transmitted between the different parts, and the front mask contains a substantially curved shape. The vibration is more damped and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit is 0.48 cm than in the case where it can be transmitted linearly.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. It will be 38 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are inserted from the effect button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button is smaller than when only one component is inserted from the effect button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the stop operation of the player is less likely to be affected, and the timing of accepting the stop operation of the stop button is unlikely to shift due to the execution of the button effect. Can be created.

Other configurations that attenuate vibration (attenuate vibration displacement) are not shown, but parts (metal, etc.) made of different materials are provided between the effect button and the stop button operated by the player. If so, the vibration is further damped. As an example, it is better to connect the effect button to the stop button with plastic, metal, or plastic parts than when the effect button vibrates and the effect button is connected to the stop button with plastic, plastic, or plastic parts. , The vibration transmitted to the stop button is weak. That is, since one or a plurality of different parts are made of different materials such as metal, the vibration transmitted to the handle can be further damped. Further, by making one or more parts between the effect button and the handle metal, electromagnetic waves can be prevented, and the influence of electromagnetic waves on various substrates can be reduced.

Due to the effect, the vibration is transmitted to the stop button during the effect of vibrating the effect button, and if the stop button is pressed at a different timing, the position where the rotating cylinder stops will shift, which is disadvantageous to the player. It ends up.
It is possible to attach a vibration absorber to the device that vibrates the effect button, but the cost is high and the structure may become large.
In the present application, the structure of the effect button is not enlarged, vibration is difficult to be transmitted to the stop button, and the invention is made to maximize the effect without giving a disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 78 is a table summarizing the values of vibration displacement when one or a plurality of configurations capable of attenuating the transmission of vibration displacement described above are adopted. The values of vibration displacement are shown in the figure, and the following configurations can be considered as a method of attenuating the transmission of vibration displacement, taking into consideration the shape, design, cost, etc. of the desired gaming machine. , May be combined as appropriate.

<Structure that attenuates vibration displacement>
(1) Shape of joint part: screwed, fitted (2) Increase the number of parts from the effect button to the stop button (3) Shape of the member: Partially right angle, partly curved (4) Metal etc. Use materials

<Additional notes in the 6th and 7th embodiments>
In order to absorb the vibration when assembling each member, there is a technique of suppressing the transmitted vibration by using a cushioning material such as a rubber washer (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-29853). The more cushioning material is provided, the less the influence of durability on each member is reduced. However, the cost of developing a game machine tends to increase by newly providing a member that is not originally required for the game machine.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention can reduce the development cost of a game machine by suppressing the transmission of vibration based on the members constituting the game machine without providing a new member such as a cushioning material, and can efficiently transmit the vibration. Can be suppressed.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, regarding the fact that the logic level is determined by the low active determination when the input device that affects the result of the game used in the game machine is operated, the start switch of the slot machine is used as an example of the input device. explain.

In a slot machine, a typical function executed by operating a start switch will be described. First, determine the role (perform an internal lottery). The type of symbol combination that can be displayed is determined according to the combination, and the right to acquire game medals, re-games, and bonus games is given, and the start switch affects the result of the game. Secondly, it is possible to determine the set value by operating the start switch while the setting change device is operating (in the setting change mode). More specifically, in the setting change mode, the setting value candidate is selected by operating the setting switch, and the selected setting value is confirmed by operating the start switch. The set value is designed so that the player plays the game a plurality of times, and the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out is generally determined from the number of medals inserted in the game. For example, a gaming machine in which the expected medal acquisition value is designed to be negative (that is, decrease) at the set value 1 and is designed to be positive (that is, increased) at the set value 6 is generally used.

As described above, the start switch is an input device that affects the result of the game, and is a highly important input device for the game machine.

Here, the high active determination, the low active determination, and chattering described in the present embodiment will be described.

High active judgment is also called positive logic, and a state with a high voltage level corresponds to 1 and a state with a low voltage level corresponds to 0. Low active judgment is also called negative logic, and a state with a low voltage level is 1 , Refers to a method that associates a high voltage level with 0. It is more intuitive to use the high active judgment.

Chattering, also called noise, is an event in which contact and non-contact repeat on and off at high speed in a short period of time at the moment when distant contacts are brought into contact when a mechanical switch is operated. In the present embodiment, by operating the mechanical switch in the mechanism of the start switch, when the detection piece inside the mechanism passes through the sensor light, it is generated by instantaneously repeating contact and non-contact at high speed. Can be done.

Here, a mechanism for detecting whether or not the start switch has been input will be briefly described. When the start switch is operated to determine the combination, the state of light reception or shading of the sensor changes (FIGS. 79 (a) and (b)), and the state of the sensor changes constantly. In order to determine that the start switch is operated, it is determined that the start switch is operated when the voltage level exceeds the determination threshold value (in the present embodiment, it exceeds 60 in the high active determination and falls below 40 in the low active determination). Data indicating that the start switch has been operated is stored in a specific area of the RAM (FIG. 79 (c)). The structure for general sensor detection detects that the start switch is turned on by the detection piece blocking the sensor light from the sensor light input unit.

Here, chattering may occur when the detection piece begins to change the light receiving state of the sensor light receiving unit. One of the problems that can be expected when chattering occurs is that there is a possibility that a uniform lottery result cannot be obtained when determining a combination by operating the start switch. It is stipulated that a mechanism that causes a bias in the appearance of roles when selling a game machine cannot be sold, and the player cannot play the game with peace of mind. In addition, the frequency of appearance of roles may become indefinite due to the occurrence of chattering.

In this example, in order to reduce the frequency of erroneous detection due to chattering, low active determination is adopted as the logic level determination used for detecting the start switch.

80 and 81 show a comparison diagram between the case where the high active determination is adopted and the case where the low active determination is adopted.

When the high active determination shown in FIG. 80 is adopted, the voltage level is increased by putting the sensor light receiving portion in a light-shielding state. It is determined that the start switch has been input when the voltage level exceeds 60, which is set as the threshold value, when the sensor light receiving unit is in a light-shielding state. Here, although the threshold value is set to 60, the voltage level threshold value may be appropriately changed depending on the design. When the voltage level changes, chattering may occur due to the mechanical design. In particular, when the light receiving state changes to the light blocking state, the chattering amplitude tends to increase, and the number of times the judgment threshold is exceeded tends to increase. It is in. If the threshold value is unintentionally straddled multiple times due to the influence of chattering, the possibility that the timing of determining the combination becomes uncertain increases. Specifically, one combination is determined by the combination determination means based on the fact that the determination threshold value of 60 for high active determination is exceeded, but the condition exceeding the determination threshold is satisfied a plurality of times due to the occurrence of chattering. In some cases, the winning combination may be determined multiple times and the player may operate the start switch to generate a result that is clearly different from the winning combination at the timing when the detection piece passes through the sensor, providing a uniform lottery result. There is a risk that it cannot be done.

On the other hand, when the low active determination shown in FIG. 81 is adopted, the voltage level is lowered as the sensor light receiving unit enters the light receiving state. When the sensor light receiving unit enters the light receiving state and the voltage level becomes less than 40 set as the threshold value, it is determined that the start switch has been input. Here, although the threshold value is set to 40, the voltage level threshold value may be appropriately changed depending on the design. Chattering may occur due to mechanical design when the voltage level changes, but when the light-shielding state changes to the light-receiving state, the chattering amplitude tends to be smaller than in the high-active judgment, and the judgment threshold value. The number of times below is less than the tendency.

From the above, it is possible to derive a stable result by adopting the low active determination for the input device (for example, the start switch described above) that affects the result of the game such as the determination of the winning combination. In, the low active judgment is adopted.

In the above description, the start switch of the slot machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the low active determination may be adopted also in the input device related to the error, the setting key switch, and the like. Further, in pachinko gaming machines, it is desirable to use it in an input device such as an RWM clear switch that affects the result of the game. That is, in both the slot machine and the pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to adopt the low active determination as the input device that affects the result of the game.

<Supplementary note in the eighth embodiment>
As an example of filtering processing when chattering occurs, there has been a technique of discarding data or copying previous data when the storage pattern is not normal (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-62317). The prior art has a description about positive logic (high active judgment), but does not describe the merits of adopting low active. In the present embodiment, the input device that employs negative logic (low active determination) is adopted as an input device that affects the progress of the game, thereby reducing the influence of chattering and affecting the game such as the winning combination lottery. It is possible to reduce the blurring of the given result.

As described above, the technical contents described in the embodiment for carrying out the invention may be appropriately combined.

P: Pachinko game machine,
P1: Outer frame,
P2: Front frame,
P3: Glass frame,
P4: Back set unit,
P5: Game board,
P40: Main control board,
P41: Production control board,
P42: Image control board,
P43: Payout control board,
P44: Power supply board,
P47: Power switch,
P48: Ram clear switch,
P49: Setting key switch,
P50: Main control display device,
P51: First special symbol display device,
P52: Second special symbol display device,
P80: Production display device,
P81: Production operation means (P380: Production operation unit, P381: Production button, P382: Lever, P383: Cross key),
P82: Direction lamp (P350: Frame lamp, P550: Board lamp),
P83: Speaker (P141 curtain plate speaker, P371 upper speaker)
P560: Directing character,
P710: First start winning device,
P720: 2nd start winning device,
P730: General winning device,
P740: General drawing operation gate device,
P750: Grand prize opening device P755: Special electric accessory,
P770: Ordinary electric accessory 1: Slot machine 2: Front panel 3: Cabinet 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Middle reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12 : Start switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Middle stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal insertion slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24a: Left Operation instruction lamp 24b: Medium operation instruction lamp 24c: Right operation instruction lamp 25: Bet number display lamp 26: Credit number display 27: Obtained number display 28: Receiving tray 29: Tobacco ash tray 30: Seal accommodating unit 32: Display device 34: Medal selector 35: Medal flow path 37: Setting key switch 38: Setting switch 39: Power supply device 40: Power switch 41: Main control board unit 42: Sub control board unit 43: Medal payout outlet 44: Hopper 45: Medal payout Part 46: Auxiliary tank 47: External output terminal plate 48: Door open detection switch 52: Main ROM
53: Sub ROM
56: Main RAM
57: Sub RAM
60: Stop changeover switch 62: Automatic settlement switch 64: 7-segment display 66: Stepping motor 72: Movable object 100: Main control board 105: Main CPU
110: Voltage monitoring circuit 112: Setting changing means 114: Crystal oscillator 120: Combination lottery means 122: Random number generator 124: Random number extraction means 126: Random number generation means 128: Random number determination means 130: Reel control means 132: Rotation control means 134 : Stop control means 138: Operation order detecting means 140: Winning determination means 142: Payout means 144: Power supply interrupting means 146: Special role carry-over means 148: Winning flag control means 151: Special game control means 156: Hopper motor drive means 158: Bet number setting means 1000: Sub control board 1002: Production output control means 1004: Right control means 1005: Sub CPU
1006: Notification output control means 1008: Sub input switch operation means 1010: Movable object control means 1014: Image control board 1018: BL board 1101: Sub control means 1110: Production control means 1120: Game state notification means 1130: AT lottery means 1140 : AT management means 1150: AT game count counting means 1160: Notifying means 1170: Lottery means 1180: AT notifying means S: Speaker

Claims (1)

A push-down surface that can be slidably moved by the operation of the player and that the player can directly contact, and a push-down portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion.
An outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion that holds the outer diameter portion of the pushed-down portion so as to wrap around, and an outer wall portion.
A spring member provided inside the outer wall portion and holding the push-down portion in a predetermined position, and a spring member.
A light emitting part having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating light is mounted inside the push-down part, and a light emitting part.
A detection unit that detects the detection target unit and
It is a button unit equipped with at least
The push-down surface and the light emitting portion are configured so that the distance is reduced by the push-down operation.
The substrate is locked by fixing means and
A gaming machine characterized in that the push-down operation is executed with respect to the push-down surface, and when the fixing means is contacted, the push-down surface and the light source are not in contact with each other. ..

Images